Home

color LaserJet 4600 -- Service Manual

1. 112 alli d orb T V pm 113 PAMAN charging MM 113 Laser beam eX COSUING AA AA eas 114 Development block ii 115 Attaching the paper to the E TB vau wow des deeds e ee er caw 39 Ii dna Gee eee PADALA 116 Toner transfer na 117 SPO aes eee eier aE EEE E a L 117 USING op ou bah KA Datar Boko BG AKALANG O ae oe a S E a ce O a 118 EIB Clean scaastciaarGvstadens AG ket DAA wee LAAN KANA PRA MWA Andin at eee Ba 120 Bilugan 121 Primary charging roller and toner charging roller cleaning 0 0000 c cece eee eee 121 Color registration calibration 2 0 ee rns 122 Image density detection 4 2 4 4 4 54 cess seg ton a oes bees AA 124 PICKUP TEC system dadaan ba ska me beac deeds be me nona dds ede bb Ga fs 126 List of figures xi Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure xii List of figures 9 33 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 3 5 38 5 39 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 6
2. Part number Description Figure Reference 5781A001AA Optional 500 sheet paper feeder and Figure 8 19 1 Tray 3 assembly 6822A001CN Yellow print cartridge 6822A002CN Yellow print cartridge Europe 6823A001CN Magenta print cartridge 6823A002CN Magenta print cartridge Europe 6824A001CN Cyan print cartridge 6824A002CN Cyan print cartridge Europe 6825A001CN Black print cartridge 6825A002CN Black print cartridge Europe C7848 67901 64 MB memory DIMM SDRAM C7850 67901 128 MB memory DIMM SDRAM C9144 60001 I O daughter card Figure 8 2 11 C9156 67901 Firmware DIMM Figure 8 2 10 C9653 67901 256 MB memory DIMM SDRAM C9660 40002 English overlay C9660 40003 French overlay C9660 40004 German overlay C9660 40005 ltalian overlay C9660 40006 Spanish overlay C9660 40007 Danish overlay C9660 40008 Dutch overlay C9660 40009 Finnish overlay C9660 40010 Norwegian overlay C9660 4001 1 Portuguese overlay C9660 40012 Swedish overlay C9660 40013 Czech overlay C9660 40014 Hungarian overlay C9660 40015 Polish overlay C9660 40016 Russian overlay C9660 40017 Turkish overlay C9660 40018 Arabic overlay C9660 40019 Greek overlay C9660 40020 Hebrew overlay C9660 40021 Japanese overlay C9660 40022 348 Numerical parts list Korean overlay C96
3. 189 Internal components top llle 190 Fuser power supply PCB 0 00 eee ee 190 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 137 138 Fuser drive unit kk 192 Fuser inlet paper sensor 0 194 Fuser delivery Sensor 2 0 eee 195 Output bin full sensor in 196 Cartridge fan us mum pide AP AE 197 Formatter Talks eeu areis RUE dn kh duod uu SNP RS 198 Optional 500 sheet paper feeder 199 Paper feeder top cover plate 199 Paper feeder drive unit 0 cee ees 200 Paper feeder pickup rollers 0 000 cee eee eee 201 Paper feeder PCB 0 ccc eee 202 C9660 90901 Introduction WARNING WARNING C9660 90901 Removal and replacement strategy This chapter explains how to remove and replace major printer components HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level Replacement is generally the reverse of removal Occasionally directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included The information in this section is intended for authorized service personnel only Repair notices Turn the printer off wait five seconds then unplug the power cord before servicing the printer Failure to completely disconnect the printer could result in severe injury Never operate or service the printer with the protective cove
4. Separation Chapter 5 Theory of operation 117 Fusing block The fourth part of the image formation process is the fusing block in which the toner image is fused to the paper making a permanent image that cannot be smeared This block consists of one step fusing Step 9 Fusing This printer uses the induction heating method to fuse the toner to the paper This method uses quick fuser heating resulting in shortened wait time and reduced power consumption Figure 5 26 illustrates this step Fuser sleeve PF Coil Toner Figure 5 26 Fusing Cleaning block The fifth and final part of the image formation process is the cleaning block in which the ETB and the photosensitive drums are cleaned preparing them for the next print The next section provides more information about printer calibration and cleaning This block consists of two steps e ETBcleaning e photosensitive drum cleaning Step 10 ETB cleaning See page 120 for a complete discussion of ETB cleaning Step 11 Photosensitive drum cleaning See page 121 for a complete discussion of photosensitive drum cleaning 118 Image formation system C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Calibration and cleaning The printer automatically calibrates and cleans itself at various times to maintain pus highest level of print quality You can also force the printer to calibrate by choosing Quality menu See Calibrate Now on page 294 i from the Print While the
5. 1 13 Development block Wi 115 Transfer block Wan 116 FUSING DIOCK qc 118 Cleaning block uvam a dnb dod oo OSEE aa eni 118 Calibration and cleaning ih 119 Color plane registration calibration 122 Drum phase calibration 1 2 0 0 ee 122 Image stabilization control 0 0 0 cee eee 123 Pickup feed system 1 0 eee eens 125 Pickup feed unit oo co io ooom coca R43 SERO RE een as 128 Fuser delivery unit llle 132 Duplex feed unit llle 133 500 sheet paper feeder ees 134 Pickup and feed operations eens 135 C9660 90901 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 89 Basic operation The HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printer s functions are divided into four systems engine control system laser scanner system image formation system pickup feed system This chapter describes each of these systems thoroughly lt gt LASER SCANNER SYSTEM ENGINE CONTROL u bi Boiss S IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM gt PICKUP FEED SYSTEM To external device computer etc through the formatter Figure 5 1 Basic system operation 90 Basic operation st ke i AA a a me gt i C9660 90901 Note C9660 90901 Operation sequence A microcomputer in the engine control system controls the operation sequence for the printer Table 5 1 describes the mai
6. a 165 Reinstalling the developing disengaging rod 2 Of 2 ii 165 Removing and replacing the drum drive gears ees 166 Removing and replacing the drum home position sensors 167 Removing and replacing the interlock cover eee ees 168 Removing and replacing the interlock arm ees 168 Removing and replacing the drum drive motors cyan motor shown 169 Removing and replacing the memory tag antenna PCB cyan is shown 170 Removing and replacing the developing disengaging motor assembly 171 Removing and replacing the DC controller PCB 0 ccc es 172 Removing and replacing the memory controller PCB an 173 Removing and replacing the cassette paper size detection switch 174 Removing and replacing the formatter Wan 175 Removing and replacing the low voltage power supply left side of printer 1 of 3 176 Removing and replacing the low voltage power supply rear of printer 2 of 3 177 Removing and replacing the low voltage power supply 3 of 3 177 Removing and replacing the formatter case 1 Of 2 0 ees 179 Removing and replacing the formatter case 2 of 2 0 AA 179 Disconnecting the laser scanner connectors and formatter ribbon cable 180 Removing and rep
7. ee eee 60 Connecting to a computer 0c ce ee eee 61 Parallel connections es 61 Network connections 0 000 ce eee 62 Enhanced I O EIO configuration 0 0 005 eee 64 HP Jetdirect print servers ccc eee 64 Available enhanced I O interfaces 64 NetWare networks a 64 Windows and Windows NT networks 65 AppleTalk networks an 65 LocalTalk configuration 0 0 0 cc eee eee eee 65 LocalTalk network configuration 65 UNIX Linux networks aaa 65 Printer dariVelS AA AA 66 Available drivers ee eee 66 Additional drivers 0 0 0 ccc ee ee eee 67 Network configuration 0 2 0 cee ees 68 Configuring the printer for the network 68 Configuring Novell NetWare frame type parameters 68 Setting network security on the printer 69 Locking the control panel aa 69 Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set network security WWW 70 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 51 Unpack the printer Figure 3 1 Package contents HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printer print cartridges software and electronic documentation printed documentation ao Bm c N power cord Figure 3 2 Optional package contents 1 optional 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 2 control panel overlays 3
8. Part number Description Figure Reference RG5 6416 000CN Cable main drive Figure 8 10 5 RG5 6417 000CN Cable ETB Figure 8 16 3 RG5 6418 000CN Cable antenna Figure 8 4 16 RG5 6419 000CN Cable paper feed Figure 8 15 5 RG5 6420 000CN Cable memory Figure 8 4 18 RG5 6421 000CN Cable upper crossmember Figure 8 12 2 RG5 6422 000CN Cable interface Figure 8 8 1 RG5 6423 000CN Cable sensor Figure 8 8 15 RG5 6425 000CN Cable connector fuser Figure 8 8 RG5 6427 000CN 110 volt Cable AC Figure 8 8 4 RG5 6434 000CN 220 volt RG5 6430 000CN Cable cassette size Figure 8 5 10 RG5 6430 000CN Cable connector optional feeder Figure 8 5 8 RG5 6432 000CN 100 127 volt Control panel assembly Figure 8 4 1 RG5 6433 000CN 220 240 volt RG5 6446 000CN Damper assembly Figure 8 7 10 RG5 6449 000CN HVT terminal assembly Figure 8 6 2 RG5 6450 000CN Cartridge inlet assembly Figure 8 6 8 RG5 6454 000CN Color registration detection assembly Figure 8 7 3 RG5 6456 000CN ETB latch assembly Figure 8 6 15 RG5 6459 000CN Cassette frame left assembly Figure 8 5 5 RG5 6460 000CN Cassette frame right assembly Figure 8 5 2 RG5 6464 000CN Rear top cover assembly Figure 8 3 7 RG5 6465 000CN Top cover assembly Figure 8 3 2 RG5 6466 000CN Front cover assembly Figure 8 3 4 RG5 6467 000CN Multi purpose tray assembly Figure 8 3 3 RG5 6468 000CN Paper pickup assembly Figure 8 7 4 RG5 6468 000CN Paper pickup assembly Figure 8 15 1 RG5 6469 000CN Paper pickup driv
9. Separation tabs in the cassette are damaged Tray 2 Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray or Tray 3 or replace the cassette Registration shutter is defective Make sure the registration shutter moves smoothly its spring is in place and it is clean If the registration shutter is damaged replace the paper pickup assembly C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 245 Image formation troubleshooting The image formation system is the central hub of the printer During image formation an image of colored toner is formed and then fused onto the paper The image formation system consists of the following physical components four laser scanners four print cartridges ETB fuser Before beginning image formation troubleshooting check that the media meets the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide Print quality problems associated with media Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate media Use paper that meets HP paper specifications See Supported media specifications on page 29 The surface of the media is too smooth Use media that meets HP paper specifications See Supported media specifications on page 29 The driver printer is set incorrectly Change the paper type setting to heavy or glossy The media you are using is too heavy for the printer and the toner is not fusing to the media The transparencies you are using are not des
10. 150 Multi purpose tray Tray 1 llle IB 151 FPIOULCOVGE uaocnrxsenidux u KOKO ani dau da dieses sd d 329 anaes 152 Conirol panel ea hunt dtm Ia AA 159 Internal components Wa 155 DC controller shield urs emas o Ra eoa et osito we da dedo m es DA 155 Internal components front cece ee eee ees 156 Paper pIGRUD UNIT aaaama mana 90 Sard Rel 69789 9 3 Rene Bd eh UE ed 156 Paper pickup sensor PCB Wo 157 Cassette Tray 2 paper pickup rollers 0 0 0 cece eee eee 158 Paper pickup drive unit llle 159 Multi purpose tray pickup roller and separation pad 160 SDOIEDOIUS PP PE PE EYE 161 Color registration detection unit a 162 Internal components left side eee eee 164 Drum Or GUS EE 164 Memory tag antenna PCBs 0c eee eee ene 170 Developing disengaging motor assembly 171 DC controller PGB AAP be SAS 8 he SES E Pd 172 Memory controller PCB 0 ccc eee eens 173 Cassette paper size detection switch naana aaaea 174 Internal components rear Wa 175 PONG METRE ETT Aa ADD HAHAA DANG BABAIT Done sa hi eee 175 Low voltage power supply Wa 176 Formatter case assasqxaassia4 eA 34423 2b x AP Qoam RR SSDS A ce au d 178 Laser scanner units ii 180 Internal components right side llle 185 High voltage power supply PCB
11. 330 Illustrations and parts lists RH7 1494 000CN C9660 90901 Figure 8 12 C9660 90901 Fuser drive assembly Table 8 13 Fuser drive assembly Description Fuser drive assembly Quantity Part number RG5 6512 000CN Cable upper crossmember RG5 6421 000CN Guide cable RB2 8532 000CN Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Motor M8 fuser DC brushless 24 volt RH7 1495 000CN Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 331 Figure 8 13 Cassette 1 of 2 Table 8 14 Cassette Description Quantity Part number Cassette Tray 2 RG5 6476 000CN Separation pad assembly RG5 6471 000CN Plate separation RF5 3749 000CN Arm paper size RB2 8349 000CN Multi purpose tray pickup roller RG9 1529 000CN assembly Note Table 8 14 lists parts shown in Figure 8 13 and Figure 8 14 If you order a replacement cassette item 1 you will receive all parts shown in both figures 332 Illustrations and parts lists C9660 90901 EN s NG ET Ta Oa Q 0 N o J 7 oh AWW V Cassette 2 of 2 Figure 8 14 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 333 C9660 90901 Figure 8 15 Paper pickup assembly Table 8 15 Paper pickup assembly Description Paper pickup assembly Quantity Part number RG5 6468 000CN Roller paper pickup RF5 3739 000CN Paper sensor PCB assembly RG5 6392 000CN Paper pickup drive a
12. Figure 6 3 Removing and replacing the top cover 1 of 2 Figure 6 4 Removing and replacing the top cover 2 of 2 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 145 Rear top cover To remove the rear top cover Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the three screws shown in callout 1 A c N Insert a flat blade screwdriver between the top and side covers on the left and right sides of the printer Lift slightly to disengage the tabs shown in callout 2 on the left and right sides of the printer Gi Remove the rear top cover Figure 6 5 Removing and replacing the rear top cover removing screws 1 of 3 146 Covers and external components C9660 90901 Figure 6 6 Removing and replacing the rear top cover releasing right side tab 2 of 3 Figure 6 7 Removing and replacing the rear top cover releasing left side tab 3 of 3 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 147 Left cover To remove the left cover Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Open the front cover Remove the screw shown in callout 1 Disengage the two tabs shown in callout 2 Oo OF FP Cc N ma Tilt the top of the left cover away from the printer and remove it Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the left cover be sure to insert the two hooks that are along the bottom edge of the cover into the holes
13. On the DC controller PCB disconnect the four connectors shown in callout 1 O N O A A CQ N On the DC controller PCB release the brown tab covering the formatter ribbon cable and disconnect the cable callout 2 When removing the formatter ribbon cable be careful not to tear it Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection Do not pull on the ribbon cable without releasing this tab 9 Remove the formatter case See page 178 ii a a Disconnecting the laser scanner connectors and formatter ribbon cable 10 At the rear of the printer place the cardboard spacer included with the laser scanner assembly underneath the V mark on the bottom of the printer frame callout 3 on the next page Always place the spacer under the printer frame This spacer is important to support the printer and keep it from flexing when the plate that covers the laser scanners is removed If the printer frame flexes the laser beams may become skewed resulting in print quality problems 11 Remove the four screws shown in callout 4 12 Using needle nose pliers pull down on the right side of the wire clip then release the left side of the clip from the bracket Repeat this procedure for each of the four clips 13 Remove the plate that covers the laser scanner units 180 Internal components rear C9660 90901 Figure 6 51 C9660 90901 iT TEHDUORT PIRARD AMO i L SAAKING ADARRE i
14. PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS Prints the estimated remaining life for the supplies reports statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed print cartridge manufacture date serial number page counts and maintenance information SUPPLIES STATUS Displays the supplies status in a scrollable list PRINT USAGE Prints a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer lists whether they were simplex duplex monochrome or color and reports the page count PRINT DEMO Prints a demonstration page PRINT FILE DIRECTORY Prints the name and directory of files stored in the printer on an optional hard disk PRINT PCL FONT LIST Prints the available PCL fonts PRINT PS FONT LIST Prints the available PS emulated PostScript fonts Paper handling menu The Paper handling menu allows you to configure input trays by size and type This menu can also be used to set default media size and type It is important to configure the trays correctly with this menu before you print for the first time Note If you have used previous HP LaserJet printers you might be accustomed to configuring Tray 1 to first mode or cassette mode To mimic the settings for first mode configure Tray 1 for size ANY and type ANY To mimic the settings for cassette mode set either the size or type for tray 1 to a setting other than ANY Table 7 39 Paper handling menu Menu item Description TRAY 1 SIZE A list of available s
15. Severe maximum of High 85 to 95 RH Low 10 to 35 RH Atmospheric pressure 460 to 760 mm Hg 18 1 to 29 9 in Hg Storage time 2 5 years 1 The average storage time includes use time Use cartridges within 2 5 years of the date code on the cartridge Printer specifications Note C9660 90901 Table 1 6 describes the dimensions of the printer Table 1 6 Pr inter dimensions HP Color LaserJet 4600 4600n 4600dn 566 mm 22 3 inches HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn 4600hdn 654 mm 25 8 inches 456 mm 20 inches 456 mm 20 inches 480 mm 18 9 inches 480 mm 18 9 inches 37 kg 81 Ib 44 kg 97 Ib Table 1 7 lists the acoustic emissions of the printer when it is printing and when it is in standby mode Table 1 7 Acoustic emissions HP Color LaserJet 4600 Sound power Printing PowerSave Bystander 1m Printing PowerSave Per ISO 9296 Per ISO 9296 LWAd 6 5 bels A Lwad 5 0 bels A Loam 51 dB A Loam 34 dB A 65 dB A 50qB A These values are subject to change See http www hp com support 1j4600 for current information Maximum duty cycle is 85 000 pages per month Chapter 1 Printer description 25 Printer assemblies Figures 1 5 and 1 6 show the location of each major assembly in the printer These assemblies are described in Chapter 3 Figure 1 5 Front view HP Color LaserJet 4600 series shown with additio
16. 142 Pre troubleshooting checklist 0 0 a 207 Alphabetical printer messages 00 Aa 212 Numerical printer messages a 223 Error messages and associated jam locations 235 Common causes of paper jams an 237 Causes for jams in Tray Ion nd aa aaa a 240 Causes for jams in Tray 2 ccc eee eee 240 Causes for jams in Tray 3 0 ccc ee eee 241 Causes for jams in the paper path 0 0 eee eee 242 Causes for jams in the top cover cee eee eee 243 Causes for jams in the duplex path 0 0 0 243 Causes for multiple pages feeding 0 0 00 cee eee eee 244 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper part one paper path entrance 244 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper part two paper path exit 244 Causes for skewed paper 2 2 ce ee eee 245 Image defects sca ged been a Eug irae dE e eee e oad Rn P ESPERE E RSV 253 Causes for light images 2 eee eee 254 Causes for one color printing light 0 0 254 Causes for dark images 0 00 cece ee eee eee ee 254 Causes for one color printing dark 0 0 aa 255 Causes for a completely blank image sss 255 Causes for an all black or solid colored image 255 Causes for vertical lines of white dots 00 0 cee eee 255 Causes for dirt on the back of the paper 256
17. Is each print cartridge properly installed ETB and fuser Are the ETB and fuser properly installed Are the top cover and front cover closed Condensation Does condensation occur following a temperature change particularly in winter following cold storage If so wipe affected parts dry or leave the printer on for 10 to 20 minutes Was a print cartridge opened soon after being moved from a cold to a warm room If so allow the printer to sit at room temperature for one to two hours Miscellaneous Check for and remove any non HP components print cartridges memory modules and EIO cards from the printer If hardware or software configuration has not changed or the problem is not associated with any specific software contact the Customer Care Center see Chapter 1 Remove the printer from the network and ensure that the failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting For any print quality issues calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now on page 294 for instructions C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 207 Troubleshooting flowchart The flowchart on these two pages highlights the general processes to quickly isolate and solve printer hardware problems Each heading depicts a major troubleshooting step A yes answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step A no answer indicates that additional testing is needed Proceed to the referenced section in this chap
18. Personal identification number PIN printing for printers with hard disks PowerSave setting High content of recyclable components and materials Energy star compliant Blue Angel compliant 80 internal fonts available for both PCL and PostScript emulation 80 printer matching screen fonts in IrueType M format available with the software solution Supports forms and fonts on the disk using HP Web Jetadmin Chapter 1 Printer description 19 Table 1 1 Printer features Feature Description Paper handling Prints on media from 77 mm by 127 mm 3 inches by 5 inches up to legal size e Prints on media with weights from 60 g m to 163 g m 16 Ib bond to 43 Ib bond Prints on a wide range of media types including glossy labels overhead transparencies and envelopes Multiple gloss levels e A 500 sheet input tray Tray 2 that supports letter legal Accessories Connectivity e Supplies e 20 Printer features executive JIS B5 A4 and A5 sized and custom media Optional 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 that supports letter legal executive JIS B5 A4 and A5 sized and custom media standard on HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn and 4600hdn printers 2 sided printing on HP Color LaserJet 4600dn 4600dtn and 4600hdn printers 250 sheet face down output bin Printer hard disk which provides storage for fonts and macros as well as job storage standard on HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn Dua
19. service manual hp color LaserJet 4600 series printer service manual Hewlett Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 U S A Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 2002 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws Part number C9660 90901 First Edition April 2002 Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with respect to this information HEWLETT PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for any direct indirect incidental consequential or other damage alleged in connection with the furnishing or use of this information AINA Trademark Credits Adobe and Adobe Photoshop are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated CorelDRAW is a trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited ENERGY STAR is a U S registered service mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency Microsoft is a U S registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Netscape is a U S trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation PANTONE Pantone Inc s check standard trademark for color PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may b
20. 0 ee eee 184 Removing and replacing the high voltage power supply PCB 185 Aligning the high voltage power supply PCB 0 ccc ee eens 186 Removing and replacing the toner level detection PCB AA 187 Removing and replacing the high voltage contact blocks cyan indicated 188 Removing and replacing the door switch 0 0 cc eee eee eee 189 Removing and replacing the fuser power supply PCB 1 0f2 191 Removing and replacing the fuser power supply PCB 2 0f2 191 Removing and replacing the fuser drive unit 1 Of 2 eee 193 Removing and replacing the fuser drive unit 2 Of 2 ee 193 Removing and replacing the fuser paper Sensor 00 0 ee eee eee 194 Removing and replacing the fuser delivery sensor ee eee ene 195 Removing and replacing the output bin full sensor ccc ee 196 Removing and replacing the cartridge fan Wan 197 Removing and replacing the formatter fan na 198 Removing and replacing the 500 sheet paper feeder top plate 199 Removing and replacing the paper feeder drive unit top view 1 of 2 200 Removing and replacing the paper feeder drive unit side view 2 of 2 200 Cam and gear alignment xui war GARA NANANA beget gigni cheeses en KYA 201 Removing and repl
21. 0 6 in Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom Minimum size 76 by 127 mm 3 by 5 in Maximum size 216 by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 in Glossy Paper A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom Minimum size 76 by 127 mm 3 by 5 in Maximum size 216 by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 in 75 g m to 120 g m 20 Ib to 32 Ib maximum stack height of 10 mm 0 6 in Envelopes Com10 Monarch C5 DL B5 Maximum weight 105 g m 28 Ib bond Limit of 20 Labels Tray 1 only A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom Minimum size 76 by 127 mm 3 by 5 in Maximum size 216 by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 in Do not load more than the maximum stack height of 10 mm 0 6 in C9660 90901 Chapter 1 Printer description 29 Table 1 8 Supported media specifications continued Tray Supported media Media specifications Capacity Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 Paper A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom Minimum size 148 by 210 mm 5 8 by 8 2 in Maximum size 216 by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 in 60 to 105 g m 16 to 28 Ib 500 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper maximum stack height of 50 mm 2 inches Transparencies A4 Letter 0 13 mm 5 mil Limit of 100 sheets Glossy film A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom Minimum size 148 by 210 mm 5 8 by 8 2 in Maximum size 216 by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 in 0 13 mm 5 mil Limit of 100 sheets Glossy Paper A4 L
22. C9660 90901 List of figures Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure C9660 90901 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printers a 18 Model and serial number information a 21 Sample label inna 22 Space requirements s xau acit geb does does eu ee gs AA 23 Front view HP Color LaserJet 4600 series shown with additional 500 sheet paper feeder 26 Rear view HP Color LaserJet 4600 series shown with additional 500 sheet paper feeder 27 EMI statement for Korea ee ns 39 VCCI statement for Japan mapala aa seagate FA Seed DILA HEAT Coes Peed d Ose ees 40 Package contents 0 0 ccc na 52 Optional package contents sees rus ER ALA t RA gay Lebanon Don ees Ede 52 Parallel port connection 1 0 0 0 cc eee ee ee eee hn 61 Direct to network connection mawa anh mawa a bee ds Ged db EE Phe Ga Rode ee dedi Oe ANG 62 Network print server connection 1 0 ee eee
23. C9660 90901 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 107 Figure 5 14 Print cartridges The printer has four different print cartridges one for each color However they share the same structure shown in Figure 5 14 Developing disengaging motor DEVELOPING DISENGAGING MOTOR DRIVE signal Print cartridge DC controller PCB 2 5 1 o Memory zl Pin level controller Z etection PCB DO PCB TONER LEVEL DETECTION signal Cartridge data LED DRIVE signal TONER LEVEL DETECTION signal Developing home position sensor V PS5 drum Toner level Toner level l l Developing disengaging detection detection Developing cylinder block sensor sensor light emitter light receiver The physical components inside the print cartridge are the following The photosensitive drum s rotation drives the primary charging roller All other components are photosensitive drum primary charging roller developing cylinder toner charging roller Stirrers waste toner transfer plate driven by the drum motor The developing disengaging motor drives the developing disengaging block which causes the developing cylinder to engage with or disengage from the photosensitive drum The DC controller uses an LED and a photo diode to monitor the level of toner inside the cartridge It stores this information on a memory tag built into each cartridge 108 Image formation system C9660 90901 Drum motor
24. Photosensitive Toner charging roller Figure 5 15 C9660 90901 Memory tag The memory tag is an EEP ROM built into the print cartridge It stores information about the amount of toner in the cartridge and estimates the remaining life Figure 5 15 describes how the memory tag operates DC controller PCB Antenna unit Memory tag Memory controller PCB Memory data Cartridge Memory tag The DC controller reads information from the memory tag whenever the printer is turned on whenever the top cover is closed and whenever it receives a READ command from the formatter The DC controller writes information to the memory tag at specified times during a print operation and whenever it receives a WRITE command from the formatter If the DC controller is unable to either read to or write from the memory tag four times in a row the DC controller alerts the formatter of a memory tag abnormality Chapter 5 Theory of operation 109 Toner level detection The printer monitors print cartridge life in several ways to ensure continued high print quality e The number of developer rotations measures the usefulness charge of the toner e The toner sensor monitors remaining toner and informs the user of low or out conditions e The number of photosensitive drum rotations measures the life of the photosensitive drum which degrades slightly with each rotation The cartridge life represented on the supplies status page and in t
25. Photosensitive drum has grooves going around the circumference Replace the cartridge for the color of the vertical lines Fuser sleeve has grooves around the circumference 256 Image defects Replace the fuser C9660 90901 C9660 90901 White vertical lines Table 7 27 Causes for white vertical lines Developing cylinder has grooves going around the circumference Solution Replace the print cartridge for the color in which the white lines appear Photosensitive drum has grooves going around the circumference Replace the print cartridge for the color in which the white lines appear Laser is blocked by a foreign substance Inspect the laser source for the affected color and remove any debris that might be blocking it Mirror in the laser scanner unit is dirty Replace the laser scanner for the color in which the white lines appear Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now on page 294 The fuser sleeve has vertical scars All colors are affected Horizontal lines Table 7 28 Causes for horizontal lines Photosensitive drum has scars running from end to end Replace the fuser Solution Replace the print cartridge for the affected color The fuser sleeve has scars running from end to end White horizontal lines Table 7 29 Causes for white horizontal lines Photosensitive drum has scars running from end to end Re
26. Roller paper pickup RF5 3739 000CN Figure 8 15 2 Roller paper pickup RF5 3739 000CN Figure 8 20 2 Russian overlay C9660 40016 Screw machine with washer M3x8 XA9 1276 000CN Screw truss head M3x6 XA9 1275 000CN Sensor flag RB2 8498 000CN Figure 8 18 2 Sensor bracket assembly RG5 6522 000CN Figure 8 8 14 Separation pad assembly RG5 6471 000CN Figure 8 13 2 Simplified Chinese overlay C9660 40024 Solenoid RH7 5319 000CN Figure 8 9 2 Spanish overlay C9660 40006 Spring scanner support RB2 8246 000CN Figure 8 8 3 Spring tension RS6 2510 000CN Figure 8 8 12 Spring tension RS6 2511 000CN Figure 8 6 5 Spring tension RS6 2511 000CN Figure 8 7 7 Spring tension RS6 2537 000CN Figure 8 4 12 Static eliminator RF5 3773 000CN Figure 8 7 2 Swedish overlay C9660 40012 Switch cassette paper size WC2 5452 000CN Figure 8 5 9 Thai overlay C9660 40023 Toner sensor PCB RG5 6393 000CN Figure 8 2 3 Toner sensor PCB assembly RG5 6393 000CN Figure 8 6 4 346 Alphabetical parts list C9660 90901 Table 8 22 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Reference Top cover assembly RG5 6465 000CN Figure 8 3 2 Traditional Chinese overlay C9660 40025 Turkish overlay C9660 40017 Yellow print cartridge 6822A001CN Yellow print cartridge Europe 6822A002CN C9660 90901 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 347 Numerical parts list Table 8 23 Numerical parts list
27. See Calibrate Now on page 294 C9660 90901 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message besorpton Jaen 13 XX YY JAM IN TOP There is a jam in the top cover area 1 Press for detailed information COVER AREA about clearing the jam For help press 2 Press a and W to step through the instructions WARNING The fuser might be hot Check that the fuser paper sensor is in place If it is defective replace it Replace the fuser Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 13 XX YY JAM IN A page is jammed in the Press for detailed information TRAY 1 multi purpose tray about clearing the jam For help press Press A and W to step through the instructions Clean the pickup roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Clean or replace the separation pad Replace the Tray 1 pickup solenoid Replace the pickup motor Replace the paper pickup assembly Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 13 XX YY JAM IN A page is jammed in Tray 2 Press for detailed information TRAY 2 about clearing the jam For help press Press A and W to step through the instructions Clean the pickup roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Clean the feed roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Replace the Tray 2 pickup solenoid Replac
28. Windows NT 3 51 PS UNIX model scripts Linux drivers Windows 3 1x HP LaserJet 4500 driver The OS 2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS 2 They are not available for Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Korean and Japanese For more information about Windows 3 1x drivers go to http www hp com support 1j4600 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 67 Network configuration Configuring the printer for the network You can configure certain network parameters on the printer from the printer control panel or for most networks from the HP Web Jetadmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh The utilities are provided on the printing software CD ROM that comes with the printer You can also set these parameters from the HP Web Jetadmin software which is available at http www hp com go webjetadmin For a complete list of supported networks and for instructions on configuring network parameters from software such as HP Web Jetadmin see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Software Installation Guide The guide comes on the CD ROM with printers in which an HP Jetdirect 610N print server is installed Configuring Novell NetWare frame type parameters The HP Jetdirect 610N print server automatically selects a NetWare frame type Select a frame type manually only when the print server selects an incorrect frame type To identify the frame type chosen by the HP Jetdirect 610N print server print a configurat
29. alternates with 52 XY PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 53 X0 ZZ PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message besorpton Jarn 50 X FUSER ERROR A fuser error has occurred X Description low fuser temperature fuser warmup service high fuser temperature faulty fuser inconsistent fuser open fuser A printer error has occurred X Description 1 beam detect error 2 laser error Y Description O no color K black C cyan M magenta Y yellow A printer error has occurred X Description 1 scanner error 2 scanner startup error 3 scanner rotation error Y Description O no color K black C cyan M magenta Y yellow An error has occurred in the onboard RAM Turn the printer off and allow it to cool down Reinstall the fuser and check the connector J4034 that connects the fuser and the printer Replace the connector if it is damaged Turn the printer off and remove the fuser Measure the resistance between the connector pins on the fuser If resistance does not meet the following guidelines replace the fuser J4034 5 to J4034 6 300 500 KOhms J4034 1 to J4034 2 less than 1 KOhm 4 Check for continuity between connector pins J4034 4 and J4034 2 If there is no continuity replace the fuser Replace the fuser power supply PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller S
30. paper path paper input path a HB c N trays 234 Paper path troubleshooting C9660 90901 Jam locations by error message Use Table 7 4 to help pinpoint and clear specific paper jams See Figure 7 2 for jam locations Table 7 4 Error messages and associated jam locations Error message Jam location Action 13 01 00 JAM IN TRAY X Media is delayed in the feed area of the specified tray 1 Open the covers and the ETB 2 Pull media by both corners to remove it 13 02 00 JAM IN TRAY X Media is stuck in the feed area of the specified tray 1 Open the covers and the ETB 2 Pull media by both corners to remove it 13 05 00 JAM IN PAPER PATH Media is delayed in the paper input path or has not reached the fuser paper sensor in the expected time 1 Open the covers and the ETB 2 Pull media by both corners to remove it 13 09 00 JAM IN TOP COVER Media has crumpled into an accordion fold as it enters AREA the fuser 1 Open the top cover WARNING The fuser is hot wait 10 minutes for it to cool down 2 Firmly lift the two green handles on either side of the fuser to disengage the fuser rollers 3 Open the fuser cover and remove the media 4 Firmly press down on the two green handles on either side of the fuser to re engage the fuser rollers 13 0A 00 JAM IN TOP COVER During a duplex print job media was delayed in the AREA Output bin before it entered the duplex path 1 Open the top cover WARNING The fuser is hot
31. print cartridges changing 76 lifespan 73 locating 26 safety data sheet 39 status 276 structure 108 print quality troubleshooting Index 359 pages 247 process 246 print servers configuring 277 printer accessories 20 calibration 294 connectivity 20 fonts 19 performance 19 personalities 19 printer drivers ordering 47 Printer Job Language PJL commands 264 Technical Reference Manual 70 printer management language 103 processor type 101 production number 21 punched paper 31 R RAM random access memory 19 rear cover removing and replacing 144 rear top cover removing and replacing 146 recycled paper 34 recycling print cartridge 36 reference materials part numbers 312 regulatory information power rating 22 remanufactured assemblies 46 repetitive defects 260 replacement intervals EIB 73 fuser 73 print cartridges 73 right cover removing and replacing 150 rollers attaching 112 ETB feed 112 ETB driven 112 primary charging 108 toner charging 108 transfer charging 112 S safety information 39 scanner motor control circuit 105 function 105 screws types 141 screws types 314 security levels 69 network 69 setting in embedded Web server 276 selecting media 28 sensor test 288 sensors locating 127 299 separation pad locating 297 removing and replacing 160 serial number formatter resetting 295 serial numbers locating 21 service agreements 50 approach 44 ID 296 parts informat
32. specified in the job Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than specified in the job No other tray is available A job sent requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available A job sent requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available A new cartridge has been installed that is not made by HP This message is displayed until an HP cartridge is installed or CANCEL JOB is pressed The printer has detected that a non HP print cartridge is currently installed Press for detailed information Press A and y to step through instructions Press for detailed information Press A and 1x to step through instructions Press for detailed information Press A and y to step through instructions Press for detailed information Press A and y to step through instructions If you believe the cartridge is an HP cartridge please call the HP fraud hotline Any printer repair required as a result of using non HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty To continue printing press CANCEL JOB The first pending job will be cancelled If you believe the cartridge is an HP cartridge please call the HP fraud hotline Any printer repair required as a result of using non HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty C9660 90901 C9660 90901 ORDER lt COLOR gt CARTRIDGE alternates with To continue press ORDER lt COLO
33. the transfer unit has reached the low threshold and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in the SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to STOP The transfer unit is near end of life The output bin is full and must be emptied for printing to continue The printer is performing a Paper Path test The printer is generating the print quality troubleshooting pages The printer will return to the Ready state when the pages are printed The printer is generating the registration page The printer will return to the SET REGISTRATION menu when the page is completed Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job Do not attempt to remove the pages until the job is complete A device failure has occurred on the specified drive Press to identify which supplies should be ordered Order the identified supplies Press 0 twice to continue printing Printing can continue until supplies reach end of life Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Order the transfer kit Printing can continue until the transfer unit reaches end of life Press for detailed information Press A and y to step through instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Order an image transfer kit Printing can continue until the transfer unit reaches end of life Press for detailed information Press A and vy to step through instructions Supplies orde
34. 000CN ETB assembly C9660 69004 Cap right RB2 8124 000CN Spring tension RS6 2511 000CN Cap left RB2 8121 000CN O O IN Oo Ci CO rn Developing disengaging drive assembly RG5 6507 000CN O Damper assembly RG5 6446 000CN Fuser drive assembly RG5 6512 000CN NO Laser scanner assembly RG5 6380 000CN Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 325 Internal components 5 of 5 Figure 8 8 C9660 90901 326 Illustrations and parts lists C9660 90901 Table 8 9 Internal components 5 of 5 Description Cable interface Quantity Part number RG5 6422 000CN Cable flat RH2 5471 000CN Spring scanner support RB2 8246 000CN Cable AC RG5 6427 000CN 110 volt RG5 6434 000CN 220 volt Fuser power supply PCB assembly RG5 6399 000CN 110 volt RG5 6400 000CN 220 volt Cable connector fuser RG5 6425 000CN Cable relay RG5 6414 000CN Gear 29T RS7 0136 000CN Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Gear pressure RB2 8122 000CN Cam gear 66T RS7 0135 000CN Spring tension RS6 2510 000CN Memory tag antenna PCB assembly RG5 5469 000CN Sensor bracket assembly RG5 6522 000CN Cable sensor RG5 6423 000CN Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Cable DC power supply RG5 6415 000CN Low voltage power supply ass
35. 212 Numerical printer messages eee eens 223 Paper path troubleshooting a 234 JAMS neo RRGGUPATSQERRRRESESQGUEAREGESSQATAEEDSERSSSR PRESE RES 234 Jam OCANGAS si 22 Ae TUTTI TI TI TOTO 234 Jam locations by error message 0 an 235 Paper jam recovery Wan 236 Avoiding paper JAMS na 237 Persistent UAAP AA 238 Paper transport troubleshooting 0 00 ccc cee ee eee eens 244 Multiple pages are fed nananana naaa eens 244 Paper is wrinkled or folded eens 244 Paper is skewed peer based ose bee ed oe he eH eden ey tab aan Inap 245 Image formation troubleshooting 0 cc eee eee 246 Print quality problems associated with media eee eee 246 Overhead transparency defects ee eee 247 Print quality problems associated with the environment 247 Print quality problems associated with jJams a 247 Print quality troubleshooting pages eee 247 Understanding color variations a 248 Color selection process a 248 Matching COlOrS 24 binds AT 249 USNO COlO AA EP E E ee EA NES VE 249 COlOPODIDIIS 24 o22ecue nc aseerasede doses REAPER IESU SERES PIS EOS SE 250 Adjusting color balance n 252 Image defects anna 253 Repetitive defects troubleshooting llle 260 Interface troubleshooting llle 263 Communications CNECKS 5
36. 9 Table 7 10 Table 7 11 Table 7 12 Table 7 13 Table 7 14 Table 7 15 Table 7 16 Table 7 17 Table 7 18 Table 7 19 Table 7 20 Table 7 21 Table 7 22 Table 7 23 Table 7 24 Table 7 25 Printer features 2 ee ee eee eee 19 Model names and numbers a 21 Electrical specifications a 24 Environmental specifications lel 24 Supply storage requirements llle 25 Printer OUNCMSIONS x t Nana ABALA uU NAG REPE s 25 Acoustic emissions inn 25 Supported media specifications 0 Aa 29 Printing on transparencies a 32 Weight equivalence table aa 35 Related documentation and software 47 FHBIePOHUBIS Izd eee beg NADAPA DAD Bap ede GA Bee a eee eee NT 66 Printer security levels 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eee eee ees 69 Cleaning the print r 26ecesseee CIE 72 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items 13 Basic operation sequence aaa 91 Function of motors and fans eee 95 Fuser temperatures 2222845 mGA deed bu cee Go Dat ABG Dopod p 3 3 96 Calibration timing and duration ee eee 119 Cleaning timing and duration 0 00 ccc eee es 119 Cassette paper size detection 0 ce ee 128 Feed speed according to media 00 cc es 131 Types of screws Wa 141 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items
37. CPU Lou Cassette misregistration l e a detection unit TM isl coe 1 Primary exposure unit 43 he 411 BD PCB Can a AC input Low voltage i power supply IN AA AA AA SI 1015 p ETB unit i CPU 1 PEE Transfer charging roller Fuser power supply 4 E droit Ec a AG s D a Door open kaaa o 4 detection switch L 4 oo E aa a ene eee ll we 1091 7 iy Highvolage powersupply KI m NM an PU NG 1 Paper feeder C 1 A maa ST un optional o ro z Ana m dE ee ee ih l aa A zd Mia enr PT 1 ormarier i h ll 1 Primary charging roller Sarridgetan KE circuit a AA naa 1 3 ME E Developing roller Controller fan ee baa i HR rw ACT maa I E Cartridge memory IC1011 IC1011 IC Me oq ode 0 ANG ta O O k Cartridge Figure 5 3 DC controller circuit C9660 90901 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 93 Motors and fans The printer has ten motors and two fans Eight of the motors are DC motors the other two are stepping motors Figure 5 4 shows the locations of the motors and fans Table 5 2 explains the function of each component One of the stepping motors and six of the eight DC motors are used for paper feeding and image formation The remaining stepping motor is the developing disengaging motor The remaining two DC motors are fan motors Sinc
38. Causes for dirt on the front of the paper 256 List of tables xv Table 7 26 Table 7 27 Table 7 28 Table 7 29 Table 7 30 Table 7 31 Table 7 32 Table 7 33 Table 7 34 Table 7 35 Table 7 36 Table 7 37 Table 7 38 Table 7 39 Table 7 40 Table 7 41 Table 7 42 Table 7 43 Table 7 44 Table 7 45 Table 7 46 Table 7 47 Table 7 48 Table 7 49 Table 7 50 Table 7 51 Table 7 52 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Table 8 4 Table 8 5 Table 8 6 Table 8 7 Table 8 8 Table 8 9 Table 8 10 Table 8 11 Table 8 12 Table 8 13 Table 8 14 Table 8 15 Table 8 16 Table 8 17 Table 8 18 Table 8 19 Table 8 20 Table 8 21 Table 8 22 Table 8 23 xvi List of tables Causes for vertical lines 0 0 0 aaa 256 Causes for white vertical lines lille 257 Causes for horizontal lines a 257 Causes for white horizontal lines cee ee 257 Causes for a missing color eee eee 257 Causes for blank spots 0 eee eee 258 Causes for poor fusing ee es 258 Causes for distortion or blurring a 258 Causes for smearing ee eee eens 259 Causes for a misplaced image 0 0 cece eee eee 259 Repetitive defect spacing 0 ccc eee 260 Communications check 2 0 64 uuu udi mex rtm demarre RR EE demas 263 Information MENU 4 24x8 WES tewi PE ms GSS ee ee ew Ree xS KNA 268 Paper handling menu usus a was dor
39. Figure 3 5 Network print server connection 62 Connecting to a computer C9660 90901 Peer to peer direct to network Connect one end of a network cable to the computer Connect the other end to the network Connect one end of a second parallel cable to the printer and the other end to the network Figure 3 6 Peer to peer connection direct to network Peer to peer parallel Connect two or more computers to the network hub using network cables Connect one end of a parallel cable to the printer Connect the other end to a computer Figure 3 7 Peer to peer connection parallel C9660 90901 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 63 Enhanced I O EIO configuration This printer comes equipped with three enhanced input output EIO slots The three EIO slots hold compatible external devices such as the HP Jetdirect print server network cards or other devices Plugging ElO network cards into the slots increases the number of network interfaces available to the printer EIO network cards can maximize printer performance when you are printing from a network In addition they provide the ability to place the printer anywhere on a network This eliminates the need to attach the printer directly to a server or a workstation and enables you to place the printer closer to the network users If the printer is configured through an EIO network card configure that card through the control panel Configure device menu HP Jetdirect
40. PINI MINI 1 j ka Ea O wo o9 1f C1 copo FORO NI 1 Ed INIP a OF Co ez Afo FO Jeyyewo4 E anos 4osueg uonoeje E 2 dn yolg Key sod nd yny 3 isd ETE t josueg 3 uonoejeg 1edeg ayasse Josues uonoojeq dn yolgd ONOSSEI sa BTE lt 1 2 lt 1 cof cof on cn FA PA no N ER DO S ES KO e E eS Re FS ant bo ror LAALIIIIIILII 89d 1el ou02 Aiowey 0 O Q NGAY 284 a z Z Z oen SGN 3 C3 zoor III II icono Ce DS s INI Ja J NICO I no coo 1000 1000 vioer groer dod 9d euuejuy 9 BUUSJUY A euuejuy IN Josuas uorpeied LHO euuejuy xg ANOS 3 Pm H Od dn Y0ld aou f3 sido 3 AEE ON R 3 2 1 21 poues dn yold BALE a IS Papaya bobo E 800r 18150 PA vasa P 120097 le Proveios naaaas 3 dn yold egesse 5 3 3 100 dn yotd 8 3 u 900vf G900vf wun ala ecovr H1 3 E 54 iow gia w434 3 4 VU C NG bese L L Josueg uonoejeg EE pen Peeds aa e OLSd Lic T ezovr dod 82d 26eyon UBIH uonoejeq a n9 Jauo Jopjwg un JeNie2eu 1uBr1 sowa 1461 O Jena2ay 4467 somwa O qw6rq a6puues O Jena2ay 11617 l 9 O S abpuyeg A 8 Jenloday 11617 SL FEE 4 TA E LLL O ir ebpuueb N Ke ij 9 LS 55 TH BU
41. Paper pickup assembly llle 334 ETB assembly au isc nek deoa edd en edad bane tw dede deem e dad 335 FUserassemb naat 00001 KA KA a Oe ee ee ee ee 336 500 sheet paper feeder assemblies 338 500 sheet paper feeder internal components 339 500 sheet paper feeder drive assembly 340 500 sheet paper feeder cassette 341 Alphabetical parts list 2 0 0 0 0 eee 342 Numerical Darts list anom d dore kk deos Gad Bee ow Cae e e tet 348 C9660 90901 Printer description Chapter contents Printer features 0 0 a 18 identiiication waaah DOHA MANA ads CeO RS eH Sa HANG Oates 21 Model and serial numbers 0 0000 cee eee eee 21 Power and regulatory information 22 Site requirements 0 0 00 eee es 23 Space requirements 0 000 cee ee eee 23 Electrical specifications an 24 Environmental specifications 24 Supply storage requirements 0 00 e eee eee 25 Printer specifications s 3g i re uo sade Rea PER Eee ON ae do 25 Printer assemblies ii 26 Media requirements ii 28 Selecting print media Wan 28 Media specifications na 28 Supported media weights and sizes 29 Media to avoid AA AA 31 Media that may cause damage to the printer 31 Print
42. Press Y to highlight TEM SETUP Press to select SYSTEM SETUF Press Y to highlight IB RECOUERWV Press to select JAM RECOUERW Press Y to highlight GFE O O N Oa OC FBP CQ N 10 Press the PAUSE RESUME button to return to the 27437 state To improve print speed and increase memory resources you may want to disable paper jam recovery If paper jam recovery is disabled the pages involved in a jam will not be reprinted 236 Paper path troubleshooting C9660 90901 Avoiding paper jams Table 7 5 lists common causes of paper jams and suggests solutions for resolving them Table 7 5 Common causes of paper jams Print media does not meet HP recommended media Use only media that meets HP specifications See specifications Table 1 8 Supported media specifications on page 29 A supply item is installed incorrectly causing Verify that all print cartridges the ETB and the fuser repeated jams are correctly installed You are reloading paper that has already passed Do not use media that has been previously printed on through a printer or copier or copied An input tray is loaded incorrectly Remove any excess media from the input tray Press media down in the input tray so it fits below the tabs and within the media width guides Print media is skewed Input tray guides are not adjusted correctly Adjust input tray guides so they hold media firmly in place without bending it If media heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib is loaded
43. Printer error messages override the PowerSave message The printer enters PowerSave mode at the appropriate time but the error message continues to appear Input Output Parallel interface The formatter receives incoming data through its bidirectional interface IEEE 1284 The I O provides high speed and two way communication between the printer and the host allowing the user to dabo oe settings and monitor printer status from the host E A he user can Hala the HIGH SPEED Item in the Polka ana menu This item is found in the z menu ande L menu and FPEEPLL EIL iT The default cia nies 5 allows the VO t to run at the higher speeds supported by most r newer a A When set to 4 5 the parallel tema runs at the EISE ona that is compatible with older computers The user can also configure the FL item The default setting ON allows for two way parallel communications The mode disana the advanced functionality The I O is compatible with the bidirectional Sale interface standard Expanded I O The optional HP Fast InfraRed receiver enables wireless printing from any iRDA compliant portable device such as a laptop computer to the printer The printing connection is maintained by positioning the sending infrared port within operating range The connection can be blocked by objects such as a hand or paper or by direct sunlight or any bright light shining into either infrared port Flash Optional flash is available in 4 MB fla
44. Reinstallation tip Reinstall the laser scanner retaining bars in the same order you removed them the left side and then the right side Feed the connector cables through the frame and reconnect the connectors to the DC controller Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 183 To remove the laser scanner units 1 Remove the laser scanner retaining bars See page 182 2 For the cyan laser scanner unit slide it to the left and then pull it out of the printer 3 For the yellow magenta and black laser scanner units first unhook each unit from the white strap shown in callout 1 Then pull the laser scanner units out of the printer CAUTION When reinstalling the laser scanner units always reconnect the laser scanner units to the strap Failure to do so could cause the laser scanners to become distorted and the laser beam could become skewed resulting in image defects CAUTION The laser scanner unit is not adjustable in the field Be sure not to disassemble it Figure 6 56 Removing and replacing the laser scanner units 184 Internal components rear C9660 90901 Internal components right side High voltage power supply PCB To remove the high voltage power supply PCB Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the right cover See page 150 Remove the three screws shown in callout 1 Pinch the four clips shown in callout 2 and free the board Disconn
45. Removing and replacing the laser scanner cover plate 2 of 2 Reinstallation tip When reinserting the four wire clips insert the left end of the clip first thread the clip under the center notch and then insert the right end of the clip Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 181 To remove the laser scanner retaining bars 1 Remove the laser scanner cover plate See page 180 2 Pull the cables for the four laser scanner connectors free of the printer frame 3 On the left side of the printer remove the screw above the DC controller shown in callout 1 4 Push the top of the sheet metal scanner retaining bar towards the laser scanners callout 2 5 Rotate the bar down and carefully remove it from the printer CAUTION The scanner retaining bars are under spring tension Remove them carefully Figure 6 52 Figure 6 53 Removing and replacing the left side laser scanner retaining bar rear of printer 2 of 2 182 Internal components rear C9660 90901 Figure 6 55 C9660 90901 On the top surface of the right side of the printer remove the screw shown in callout 3 7 On the right side of the printer push the top of the sheet metal scanner retaining bar in towards the laser scanners callout 4 8 Rotate the bar down and carefully remove it from the printer NG L E P zz 2 aa c4 ama i P Pa PG ra 1 por i ac htm Removing and replacing the right side laser scanner retaining bar rear of printer 2 of 2
46. Service approach C9660 90901 Parts and supplies Note C9660 90901 Ordering parts Field replaceable and accessory part numbers are found in Chapter 8 of this manual Order replacement parts from Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A or Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or support provider See Ordering related documentation and software on page 47 and Ordering parts on page 311 for additional ordering information By phone e Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A 1 800 227 8164 U S only e Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E 49 7031 14 2253 By mail Hewlett Packard Company Hewlett Packard Company HPCS A HPCS E 8050 Foothills Blvd Wolf Hirth StraBe 33 Roseville CA 95678 D 7030 B blingen Germany Ordering supplies Order supplies directly from Hewlett Packard The phone numbers for ordering supplies are e U S 800 538 8787 e Canada 800 387 3154 Toronto 416 671 8383 e United Kingdom 0734 441212 e Other local phone numbers may also be available Chapter 2 Service approach 45 Exchange program HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts These are identified in Chapter 8 and can be ordered from Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A or Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E Supplies Paper a
47. Status Check Rate might not be available if the printer administrator has restricted the rights to this function To view status messages and information On the left side of the window select the printer for which you want to see information Information provided includes status messages supplies status and printer capabilities You can also click the Job History clock icon at the top of the window to view a list of previous jobs sent to the printer from your computer 278 Tools for troubleshooting C9660 90901 Printer configuration page Use the configuration page to view current printer settings to help troubleshoot printer problems or to verify installation of optional accessories such as memory DIMMs paper trays and printer languages A c N 5 Press CO to enter the MEME Press W to highlight HF OEMATION Press C to select IMFOEMATION Press Y to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION Press G2 to select PRIHT COHFIGURRHTIOH The message PRINTING COME TOURE ee on the display until the printer finishes printing the kesa page The alat returns to the amp EPGE state after printing the configuration page Note If the printer is configured with EIO cards for example an HP Jetdirect Print Server or an optional hard disk drive an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those devices Figure 7 7 Printer configuration page oO c A Q N C9660 90901 printer information eve
48. VONISOG euoH wna ya PEFS e AN 6Sd e rs SANA oag Hs SH er 2 t 3 PJ vaHa H H Josuag uonoejeq E anos e Ap SLObr H ce 6 TH uonisod SWOH wnq N r3 0H cua Lo amp 2zovr 8Sd si 5 a kj ANOS Aa B Eos 3 AP 59r 2 einsodx3 Alewld o 1Sd gH 2 H auos p AA LAN Josuas uonoejeq o a paka HT x uonisog SWOH Wing A ttr FH auos ct E nct HF Z eon wnig TH p4 TANAN NN 5 H3 Ho osd AG 5 17 ri a Josueg uonoejeqg er C A uonisog SWOH ung 9 35 TH gzorr B aa oweubl 3 eunsodx3 ueud o 1999914 dl NI eror H L Ed reas EBA Cm m Jojo Wnig e EJ EXT er Sosy e 2 KOLA NG Ces IT A mor 3 H Hz CH ass Ho HI s EJ cn HOTHJd e HZ Jen 1u6r1 EJ L4 E IHSN3G Hs 5 H i t PIG PY ouaiveau 75 TH ula m3 pto eit LHNIY93H 9zovr 19419994 1481 a FR H he it py anos l4 X6 orp ee amp a31 Cn T4 bao ak4 0120938 3 eunsodx3 Mewid 9 Hz ad Com apd Ast m i SY G ome L anos 2 evovr ris SH Pict LP aqiuxd oma A t 2 HE H lasNaa 71H aLozr K4 3 E oauivo3u HX E rye CH PAS PM avos E n 100 wnq 7 t role Hz 9 HN Ed boy anos S S HI 9 gp 8 7 er i gJ gaa1say pio z 20 vp i ez HZ A asrorr 1870r 2 e E z H Jena 1ufr1 5 6 g 0191P 6zovr L Josuas uonoejeq UONPAISIBAH 10109 2 z lt z lt z lt E z 98 98 5a Q 4 Dt Dn gt om oosU5o o0 z 9601 20zzz0z M0 H255539390229922552255z2228 6265 SBO OK UK AG RERE EGG S00 FF00RRooddoors ee OHHHHOHOHOHHHHHOHHHOHHHHOHOHHHHHOHOHHOCOH poj AH eooo afo N
49. aa a N YW YN NUON External covers and panels Figure 8 3 Table 8 4 External covers and panels Part number RB2 8591 000CN RG5 6465 000CN RG5 6467 000CN RG5 6466 000CN RB2 8590 000CN RB2 8592 000CN RG5 6464 000CN RB2 8597 000CN RB2 8596 000CN gt m E c 0 O Description Right cover Top cover assembly Multi purpose tray assembly Front cover assembly Left cover Rear cover Rear top cover assembly Filter rear Filter left side Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 317 C9660 90901 Internal components 1 of 5 Figure 8 4 C9660 90901 318 Illustrations and parts lists C9660 90901 Table 8 5 Internal components 1 of 5 Description Control panel assembly Quantity Part number RG5 6432 000CN 100 127 volt RG5 6433 000CN 220 240 volt Control panel crossmember assembly RG5 6510 000CN Contact pin assembly RG5 6492 000CN Drum grounding assembly black and yellow RG5 6474 000CN Drum grounding assembly magenta and cyan RG5 6475 000CN Plate drive interlock RB2 8225 000CN Drum drive assembly magenta and cyan RG5 6504 000CN Drum drive assembly yellow RG5 6506 000CN Drum drive assembly black RG5 6505 000CN Gear 200T magenta and cyan RS7 0137 000CN Gear 200T black and yellow RS7 0138 000CN Spring tension RS6 2537 000CN Plate
50. and replacement 195 Output bin full sensor To remove the output bin full sensor Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the fuser See page 82 Unhook the two tabs shown in callout 1 Disconnect the connector shown in callout 2 N O OFF FP Cc N rm Remove the output bin full sensor callout 3 Jui T Figure 6 68 Removing and replacing the output bin full sensor 196 Internal components top C9660 90901 Cartridge fan To remove the cartridge fan Note The cartridge fan is the vertical front most fan Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the left cover See page 148 Remove the DC controller shield See page 155 Disconnect the connector J1004 on the DC controller PCB See page 304 Unthread the cables from the guides shown in callout 1 Remove the two screws shown in callout 2 O ON O C FP c N Remove the fan holder and fan from the printer callout 3 10 Remove the fan from the fan holder Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the cartridge fan be sure that the arrow marked on the fan holder and the arrow marked on the fan are pointing in the same direction a aga Figure 6 69 Removing and replacing the cartridge fan C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 197 Formatter fan To remove the formatter fan Note The form
51. and the component selected is this test To exit press Belt Only CANCEL JOB Rotating color A component test is in progress the Press CANCEL JOB when ready to stop cartridge motor component selected is the color this test To exit press Cartridge motor CANCEL JOB Rotating The printer is executing a Component Press CANCEL JOB when ready to stop fuser motor test and the component selected is this test To exit press Fuser Motor CANCEL JOB Rotating color Laser A Scanner test is in progress Press CANCEL JOB when ready to stop Scanner this test To exit press CANCEL JOB Rotating The printer is executing a Component Press CANCEL JOB when ready to stop transfer motors test and the component selected is this test To exit press Transfer Motors CANCEL JOB SIZE MISMATCH The tray is loaded with media longer Adjust the side and rear media TRAY XX lt SIZE gt or shorter in the feed direction than guides against the paper For help press the size configured for the tray If the media used is Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal alternates with sized the tray switch should be set to STANDARD Set the tray Ready switch to CUSTOM for all other For menus press media sizes The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel Reset the paper size in the paper handling menu 220 Printer error troubleshooting C9660 90901 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messag
52. are top priority e The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors or images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail Choose this option when sharp edges and details are top priority 250 Image formation troubleshooting C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Neutral Grays The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors used in text graphics and photographs Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting e Black Only generates neutral colors grays and black using only black toner This guarantees neutrals colors without a color cast e 4 Color generates neutral colors grays and black by combining all four toner colors This method produces smoother gradients and transitions to non neutral colors and it produces the darkest black Edge Control The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered Edge control has two components adaptive halftoning and trapping Adaptive halftoning increases edge sharpness Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color plane registration by overlapping the edges of adjacent objects slightly Four levels of edge control are available e Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting Adaptive halftoning is on for this setting e Normal is the default trapping setting Trapping is at a medium level and adaptive halftoning is on e Light sets trapping at a minimal level and adaptive halftoning i
53. be printed on two sheets of paper pages 2 and 4 print first then pages 1 and 3 print For this reason when duplex printing on pre printed letterhead be sure to load the letterhead face down in Tray 2 or Tray 3 and load letterhead face up in Tray 1 DC controller PCB Z Y O O T S Step 1 ij 6 PS12 T egay N QO TE oO c LLI WY LL m Step 2 P312 Output bin Fixing sleeve Duplex feed m CR Pressure roller unit Duplex switch back Chapter 5 Theory of operation 133 500 sheet paper feeder The HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn and 4600hdn printer models come standard with an additional 500 sheet paper feeder It is an option for all other models This additional tray Tray 3 is essentially the same as Tray 2 Figure 5 38 shows the paper path with the additional 500 sheet paper feeder installed 9 LI 4 Q JT OO S OC DIY Figure 5 38 Additional 500 sheet paper feeder 134 500 sheet paper feeder C9660 90901 Pickup and feed operations The sequence of operations for the 500 sheet paper feeder follows Figure 5 39 illustrates this sequence 1 The DC controller receives a print command from the formatter and sends a pickup command to the paper feeder driver 2 The paper feeder driver rotates the main motor M4001 in the paper feeder and the feed roller starts to rotate 3 After the printer enters the SCANNER READY state the DC controller instructs the paper feeder driver to pick a sheet of p
54. be programmed to stop from 0 to 60 000 mS If the timer is set to a value that is greater than it takes to print the job there are two ways to recover the printer e After the print job completes press CANCEL JOB to return to the diagnostic menu before the timer times out e After the timer times out press CANCEL JOB You will have to cycle the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state cos Pressing D will print the previously aa d job Ify you oe not want ihe previous job to Sat press CANCEL JOB first and then press the O button Do not attempt to execute a Print Stop test while the printer is calibrating a power cycle will be required If you encounter a jam message during testing cycle the door switch Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 291 Test pages Printing test pages helps you determine whether the printer engine and the formatter are functioning Engine test page To verify that the printer engine is functioning print an engine test page Use a small pointed object to depress the test page switch located on the left side of the printer as shown in Figure 7 15 The test page should have a series of horizontal lines The test page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source So ensure paper is loaded in Tray 2 il 0 c LI TEE NN WW Figure 7 15 Test page switch Formatter test page To verify that the formatter is functioning print a configuration page as follows
55. ccc eee 185 Toner level detection PCB 0 0 ccc ees 187 High voltage contact blocks 0 cee eee 188 Door switch aaa na nud PAMAN DB ADS HAKA ona danas ede seeneaw ys TYAN 189 Internal components top Wina 190 Fuser power supply PCB Wa ers 190 Fuser drive ONG m 192 Fuser inlet paper sensor Wa 194 Fuser delivery sensor lille 195 Output bin full sensor ii 196 eggs m E Sh 197 Formatter fan one es BAGA cde soonhs cea teeeaseseeseensneus sees 198 Optional 500 sheet paper feeder 0 0 ees 199 Paper feeder top cover plate 0a 199 Paper feeder drive unit llli 200 Paper feeder pickup rollers Wa 201 Paper feeder PCB ada bata PAGAANI ANAK RUE Bre qs 202 C9660 90901 C9660 90901 7 Troubleshooting UOCUCHON 4 42442 e06ect eden PAPA seen EE 205 Troubleshooting proceSS 0 0 cc nn 206 Pre troubleshooting checklist 0 0 0 eee eens 207 Troubleshooting flowchart Wa 208 Troubleshooting power on anna 210 Printer error troubleshooting aaa 211 Status messages oo cores eR R Rede 08 bead Ege Ro WG 211 Warning messages na 211 Error messages u2u2 ace xke oe ee ew ed naa doe ge nona o nan 211 Critical error messages ee eee ees 211 Alphabetical printer messages eens
56. color matching PANTONE has multiple color matching systems PANTONE Matching System is very popular and uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints See http www hp com for details on how to use PANTONE Matching System with this printer Swatch book color matching The process for matching printer output to preprinted swatch books and standard color references is complex In general you can obtain a reasonably good match to a swatch book if the inks used to create the swatch book are cyan magenta yellow and black These are usually referred to as process color swatch books Some swatch books are created from spot colors Spot colors are specially created colorants Many of these spot colors are outside of the gamut of the printer Most spot color swatch books have companion process swatch books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color Most process swatch books will have a note on what process standards were used to print the swatch book In most cases they will be SWOP EURO or DIC To get optimal color matching to the process swatch book select the corresponding ink emulation from the printer menu If you cannot identify the process standard use SWOP ink emulation Using color HP ImageREt 2400 HP ImageREt 2400 is a technology that provides you with the best color print quality without having to change driver settings or make trade offs between print quality performance and memory ImageRE
57. colors between the printer the PC monitor and other input devices scanner digital camera automatically without the need to become a color expert Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 249 Color options Color options enable optimal color output automatically for diverse types of documents Color options use object tagging which allows optimal color and halftone settings to be used for different objects text graphics and photos on a page The printer driver determines which objects are used on a page and uses halftone and color settings that provide the best print quality for each object Object tagging combined with optimized default settings produces great color out of the box In the Windows environment the Automatic and Manual color options are on the Color tab in the printer driver Setting color options to Automatic will typically produce the best possible print quality for color documents However there may be cases when you want to print a color document in grayscale black and white or wish to change one of the printer s color options e Using Windows print in grayscale or change the color options using settings found on the Color tab in the printer driver e Using a Macintosh computer print in grayscale or change the color options using the Color Matching pop up menu in the Print dialog box Print in Grayscale Selecting the Print in Grayscale option from the printer driver prints a document in black and white This optio
58. count e fuser kit count e serial number To initialize NVRAM 1 Turn the printer on and watch the control panel display 2 When the display begins showing the memory count press and hold W until all three lights on the control panel are lit 3 Press A 4 Press PAUSE RESUME The display should show SEIP DISE LOAD 5 Press AM until HURAM INIT is highlighted 6 Press amp The printer will initialize NVRAM and then continue its power on sequence Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 293 Hard disk initialization A hard disk initialization will erase and reformat the printer s hard disk Perform hard disk initialization only if an error code appears on the control panel indicating an EIO disk error Always try initializing the hard disk before replacing it To initialize the hard disk 1 Turn the printer on 2 As the printer performs its power on sequence press and hold the PAUSE RESUME button until all three lights on the control panel are lit Press amp The display should show IHITIHLIZE DISK Press C The printer will initialize the hard disk and continue its power on sequence Calibration bypass During certain diagnostic procedures you will need to bypass the automatic calibration that is performed whenever the printer is turned on To bypass calibration 1 Turn the printer on and watch the control panel display 2 When the display begins showing the memory count press and hold W until all three lights on the control pa
59. distinguish small sized paper Small size paper is too narrow to trip the lever When the lever is tripped the flag attached to the lever momentarilly blocks light from reaching the OHT detection sensor indicating that the media is full width The DC controller determines whether the media is an OHT or a sheet of paper based on whether the OHT sensor remains shaded from light as the media passes through If the lever is not triggered the DC controller determines the media to be small size paper Figure 5 36 illustrates this process DC Controller PCB Pick up PCB OHTS OHT sensor OHT sensor Small media paper K gt o Paper leading PA N edge sensor OHT detection lever Registration roller OHT detection lever Figure 5 36 Small size paper detection 130 Pickup feed system C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Feed mode Normal mode Feed speed control Media type plain paper Table 5 7 Feed speed according to media Print mode full color monochrome The type of media in the paper path dictates the speed at which it is fed The DC controller can change the feed speed according to type of media Table 5 7 shows the relationship between media type and feed speed Feed speed normal OHT mode overhead transparency full color 1 4 speed monochrome 1 2 speed Thick 1 mode thick paper full color monochrome 1 2 speed Thick 2 mode thick paper full col
60. drive grounding RB2 8255 000CN Plate developer disengagement RB2 8239 000CN Gear 17T RS7 0139 000CN Cable antenna RG5 6418 000CN Antenna memory PCB assembly RG5 6396 000CN Cable memory RG5 6420 000CN Arm test print RB2 8250 000CN Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 319 Internal components 2 of 5 Figure 8 5 C9660 90901 320 Illustrations and parts lists C9660 90901 Table 8 6 k Internal components 2 of 5 Description Lever cart pressure Quantity Part number RF5 3725 000CN Cassette frame right assembly RG5 6460 000CN Rod spring RB2 8213 000CN Arm link right RB2 8212 000CN Cassette frame left assembly RG5 6459 000CN Rod spring RB2 8213 000CN Arm link left RB2 8207 000CN Cable connector optional feeder RG5 6430 000CN 2 3 4 5 6 YA 8 9 Switch cassette paper size WC2 5452 000CN O Cable cassette size RG5 6430 000CN Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 321 Burie NG AG AN Y N Vo T 8 KN Y S S NS o 5 Internal components 3 of 5 Figure 8 6 C9660 90901 322 Illustrations and parts lists C9660 90901 Table 8 7 k Internal components 3 of 5 Description High voltage power PCB assembly Quantity Part number RG5 6395 000CN HVT terminal assembly RG5 6449 000CN Microswitch front cover
61. during certain tests in order to rotate and isolate certain components as well as to protect the cartridges and ETB Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 289 The following component tests can be executed 290 Diagnostics Transfer motors This test turns the components involved in the image transfer process the cartridge motors the ETB motor and belt if the ETB is closed and the connector is seated and the print cartridges if the ETB is closed You can remove or install print cartridges during this test Belt only This test turns only the ETB motor and belt The ETB must be closed and the connector seated The display prompts you to remove the cartridges because the ETB belt contacts the photosensitive drums and cannot turn without them rotating also Rotating the photosensitive drums could damage the belt or photosensitive drums If covers are removed you must manually cycle the door switch after removing the cartridges for the test to execute Cartridge motors This test rotates only the print cartridge drive motors The display prompts you to remove at least one cartridge for the same reason as stated for the Belt only test The engine rotates the cartridge motor s for only the cartridges that are removed To rotate all motors sequentially remove all cartridges to isolate one motor remove only that cartridge If covers are removed you must manually cycle the door switch after removing the cartridges for the test to execute Always start t
62. e Performs a reset lt esc gt E in PCL cntrl D in PostScript e Turns control over to PJL This command is also a valid HP GL 2 terminator The UEL command must be immediately followed by the PJL command prefix Characters or control codes other than PJL such as lt CR gt or lt LF gt enable the default language and process the print job in that language All jobs must begin and end with the UEL command Besides entering PJL the UEL command has the same effect as the lt esc gt E command However the lt esc gt E command should always be included to ensure backward compatibility 264 Interface troubleshooting C9660 90901 PJL COMMENT This command designates the current line as a comment which is ignored The syntax is PJL COMMENT lt words gt lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL INFO CONFIG This command solicits a response to describe the installed options and allows the printer to configure the installed options automatically as the applications require PJL INFO ID This command identifies the printer type to the host for reference when selecting printer drivers for automatic installation The command syntax is PJL INFO ID lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL INFO USTATUS This command queries the state of unsolicited JOB status PAGE and TIMED status are not supported The syntax is PJL INFO USTATUS lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL INFO PAGECOUNT This command returns the number of pages printed by the engine
63. eee eee eens 62 Peer to peer connection direct to network 0 0 0 ee eee 63 Peer to peer connection parallel cc 63 ETB total page count according to average job length anna 74 Location Of supplies 4 42 2 cioe ere x hee de hd epee de lom heehee ded aeos Ode ded dotem fob ans 15 Basic system OPCIAUOM ua god 36r WG Ak Lo SAEC LA Eh ee LI Hah ee VPE dad oa wee s daa 90 Engine control system eee ee eee eee eens 92 DG COMmOlel CWCUIE AA eee enews Boe suds s EE Na AA 93 Motors and fanS haah ane ma hb ewe edd ow hed dd Eh bee Sees oe et ee dini an 94 Fuser power SUDO CUCU sane sworo can BAL aet eee at p 399 99 9990979 hase eee a AN ee 96 Heater temperature control circuit na 97 Highsvoltage power supply circuit sacs veda ak e cope LA LN ek ee RKA EN ko es 98 Low voltage power supply circuit eee n 99 Formale r SyS leM m TT TRE 100 Laser scanner system 1 ee ee hh hans 104 Scanner Motor GOMUONMCINCUIE 0 sis sasaaa NAA a c Rp NAM SA eae REGE aes Fe PU 105 Image formation system ee hrs 106 image formation DEDOS nc AA ean odes Se ee 308 9 0 3p 2329 3 ale ana UC Deaf at oos ceo AN 107 Print Cartridge co 108 Mise ac none s 2100 Gen teed betwee done eee eee ot Tp ADM Kep Bakal Ges eee eee 109 Toner level detection 0 cc ee hrs 111 Developing cylinder disengaging iu usce xk doa Gi wb we Y dee ee MAMA KA nea NA 111 pmo P
64. envelopes see the section in the online user guide about loading envelopes into Tray 1 Adhering to the following guidelines will helo ensure proper printing on envelopes and help prevent printer jams Do not load more than 20 envelopes into Tray 1 The weight rating of envelopes should not exceed 105 g m 28 Ib Envelopes should be flat Do not use envelopes with windows or clasps Envelopes must not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged Envelopes with peel off adhesive strips must use adhesives that can withstand the heat and pressures of the printer s fusing process e Envelopes should be loaded face down and with the postage end feeding into the printer first To prevent severe printer damage do not use envelopes that have windows clasps snaps or synthetic materials Labels To print labels set the tray s media type to i EELS in the printer control panel When printing labels use the following guidelines e Verify that the label s adhesive material can tolerate temperatures of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Verify that adhesive material is not exposed between the labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause printer jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to printer components e Donotre feed a sheet of labels e Verify that labels lie flat e Donotuse labels that are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Preprinted forms and letterhead Observe the followin
65. exposure To prepare for primary charging light from the primary exposure LED strikes the photosensitive drum surface This eliminates any residual charge on the drum surface in order to avoid inconsistent charge density Figure 5 19 illustrates this step Primary charging roller Photosensitive drum Primary exposure Step 2 Primary charging To prepare for latent image formation a uniform negative potential is applied to the photosensitive drum surface The primary charging roller is made of a conductive rubber DC bias is applied to the primary charging roller to maintain uniform potential on the drum surface Figure 5 20 illustrates this step Primary charging a roller Photosensitive drum DC bias Primary charging Chapter 5 Theory of operation 113 Step 3 Laser beam exposure As the laser beam scans the drum surface it neutralizes the negative charge This is the electrostatic latent image The remaining areas where the laser beam has not struck retain a negative charge Figure 5 21 illustrates this step Unexposed area Figure 5 21 Laser beam exposure 114 Image formation system C9660 90901 Figure 5 22 C9660 90901 Development block The second part of the image formation process is the development block in which toner is transferred onto the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photosensitive drum creating a visible image This printer uses a contact develooment method that k
66. has Press to resume printing BUFFER OVERFLOW overflowed during a busy state For help press Note A loss of data will occur alternates with 22 PARALLEL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press 22 SERIAL I O The printer s serial buffer has Press to resume printing BUFFER OVERFLOW overflowed during a busy state To continue Note A loss of data will occur press D 40 BAD SERIAL A serial data error parity framing or Press cv to resume printing TRANSMISSION line overrun has occurred while the To continue printer was receiving data Note A loss of data will occur press 40 EIO X BAD A connection with the card in EIO slot 1 Press to resume printing TRANSMISSION X has been abnormally broken Note A loss of data will occur To continue Check that all cables are press D connected to the EIO ports and that the EIO board is seated properly If possible print to another network printer to verify the network is working properly 226 Printer error troubleshooting C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Message 41 3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY XX For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE For help press 41 5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY XX For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE For help press 41 X PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 41 X PRINTER ERROR To continue press Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Descript
67. image fuser kit Press 0 to continue printing Printing can continue until the fuser reaches end of life Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Order the image fuser kit Printing can continue until the fuser reaches end of life Press for detailed information Press A and y to step through instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Press to identify which supplies should be ordered Order the identified supplies Printing can continue until supplies reach end of life Press for detailed information Press A and y to step through instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 217 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message Deserpien Taen ORDER SUPPLIES For status press ORDER TRANSFER KIT XXXX PAGES LEFT To continue press amp ORDER TRANSFER KIT XXXX PAGES LEFT To enter menus press OUTPUT BIN FULL Remove all paper from bin Performing PAPER PATH TEST Printing PQ TROUBLESHOOTING Printing REGISTRATION PAGE Processing duplex job Do not grab paper until job completes RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready For menus press 218 Printer error troubleshooting More than one supply item is low and 1 the SUPPLIES LOW setting is set to STOP The number of pages remaining for
68. it is completely seated in the slot 6 Perform one of these steps Choose the correct port See the computer or operating system documentation for instructions Reinstall the software choosing the network installation this time 88 Printer memory C9660 90901 Theory of operation Chapter contents Basic operation su atte down AY 90 Operation SEQUENCE n nnana nnana 91 Engine control SysteM Wa 92 DC controller circuit ea Grae oy ERI dew beens o NG 93 Motors and IANS ens rack teow BAHAG AKA ons KKN BAKA des 94 Fuser power supply circuit 0 0 0 eee eee 96 Heater temperature control 2 0 0 0 cee eee ee 97 High voltage power supply aa 98 Low voltage power supply eee eee 99 Formatter system sono ena Ak X eee Oe cd are LA 100 POWOISQVO 5225505 xo m KAKA d oho 9495 EGR NAGANA 101 ADU Opa AN 101 Printer Memory so coco der E apos KINANG donee es 102 DIMM SO ana Bana Soe dm ee vend aves ea Se 102 PJL overview Wi 102 gj E 103 Control panel l l 103 Laser scanner SysteM Wa 104 Scanner motor control Wa 105 Image formation system cee eee 106 Image formation process 0 0 0 cece ees 107 Print cartridges AA 108 Toner level detection Wa 110 Electrostatic transfer transport belt ETB unit 112 Electrostatic latent image formation block
69. listed are self explanatory Status messages Status messages reflect the current state of the printer They inform you of normal printer operation and require no interaction to clear them They change as the state of the printer changes PENEN the printer is ready not busy and has no pending warning messages the status message Ezaci is displayed if the printer is online Warning messages d messages inform you of data and print errors These messages typically E d n Reach or with status area and remain displayed until the amp button is pressed If HE WHEHINGISsetto iii in the printer s configuration menu these messages are cleared D the next aint job Error messages Error messages communicate that some action must be performed such as adding paper or clearing a paper jam Some error messages are auto continuable if HT CONT INWUEsOH the printer will continue normal operation after displaying an auto continuable error message for 10 seconds Any button pressed during the 10 second display of an auto continuable error message will override the auto continue feature and the function of the button pressed will take precedence For example pressing the CANCEL JOB button will cancel the job Critical error messages Critical error messages inform you of a device failure Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the printer off and then on These messages are not affected by the auto continue setting If a critical error
70. of each job and configure itself to serve that personality e Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next For example if a print job is sent to the printer in landscape mode the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are formatted for landscape printing 102 Engine control system C9660 90901 PML The printer management language PML allows remote configuration and status readback through the I O ports Control panel The formatter sends and receives printer status and command data to and from a control panel board C9660 90901 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 103 Laser scanner system The laser scanner system receives a signal from the formatter and forms a latent image on the photosensitive drum in the print cartridge The printer has a separate laser scanner unit for each color Each of these has the same structure which is shown in Figure 5 10 Formatter PCB r L DC controller PCB VDATA NDATA PDOUT CNTRLO CNTRLI ACC DEC Sixfaced mirror Collimator lens Cylindrical lens Scanner driver Scanner motor Laser driver PCB page P di LA SIS es an SS Photosensitive drum Figure 5 10 Laser scanner system 104 Laser scanner system C9660 90901 Scanner motor control The scanner motor control rotates the scanner motor in order to place the laser beam at the proper position on the photosensitive drum Figure 5 11 shows
71. of the PCB 299 Fuser sensors and output bin full sensor cc ee eee ees 300 Location of solenoids 1 na 301 Solenoids on the paper pickup unit na 301 Location or motors and TANS ica tee dee ae heen hee ed dro occae Ped aec oa een eb 302 PEG CANON MERERI gee eee eee TII ITO sa ee et Sas cape cence ee et ae Ga tees ae 303 Location of DC controller PCB components eee eens 304 Loan OF CONNGCCIONS sou 2 a3 3 9 9 dons Lene d heed ade PA eee de be te Re ees Pee As 305 500 sheet paper feeder connectors Wina 306 General CICUN CIAGIAM asins ese uens AA 307 500 sheet paper feeder circuit diagram 0 0 eee eee ees 308 Assembly location diagram uu aie Ma EFE Saoirse oper earl KA enge GAPANG eae 315 PEDIOCAIONG dama sd manda MA eee AA bee he LAN LEAN eee bb gee daa od maana ede NG GD An 316 External covers and PANEIS s de uut EK AGA ANDA eee ee eee ee Bee age NA wee 2 317 Internal components 1 Of 5 2 0 naana naaa 318 Internal components 2 of 5 caceucsnwdwsi edid ando ngos d RE bea so Rem Erg urs eee ara ad 320 Internal components 3 Of 5 2 eee hrs 322 List of figures xiii Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure xiv List of figures 8 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 19 8 20 8 21 8 22 Internal components 4 of 5 iu iuc dca P AR
72. persists service is required Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 211 Alphabetical printer messages Note Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCB the ETB the formatter the drum drive motors the drum drive gears or a laser scanner unit After replacing one of these items you must access the Print Quality menu and select AL TEEATE HOL to ensure proper print quality after the repair See Calibrate Now on page 294 for instructions on calibrating the printer When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero See page 81 and page 83 for instructions Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages Message Deseripon amon Access denied An attempt has been made to modify Contact the printer administrator to menus locked a menu item while the control panel change settings security mechanism is enabled by the printer administrator The message will disappear shortly and the printer CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE For help press alternates with CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE To continue press amp CLOSE FRONT COVERS For help press CPR SENSOR OUT OF RANGE DATA RECEIVED To print last page press 212 Printer error troubleshooting will return to Ready state PJL encountered a request for a personality that did not exist in the printer The job is aborted and no pages will be printed Th
73. print servers HP Jetdirect print servers network cards can be installed in one of the printer s EIO slots These cards support multiple network protocols and operating systems HP Jetdirect print servers facilitate network management by allowing you to connect a printer directly to your network at any location HP Jetdirect print servers also support the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP which provides network managers with remote printer management and troubleshooting through HP Web Jetadmin software Note Installation of these cards and network configuration should be performed by a network administrator Configure the card either through the control panel or with HP Web Jetadmin software Note Refer to the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for information on which external devices or EIO network cards are supported Available enhanced I O interfaces HP Jetdirect print servers network cards provide software solutions for Novell NetWare Microsoft Windows and Windows NT networks Apple Mac OS Local Talk UNIX HP UX and Solaris Linux Red Hat and SuSE e Internet printing For a summary of available network software solutions refer to the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide or visit HP Customer Care online at http www hp com support net printing NetWare networks When using Novell NetWare products with an HP Jetdirect print server Queue Server mode provides improved printing performance over Rem
74. printer CAUTION Grasp the print cartridges by the blue handles to avoid accidentally touching the photosensitive drum inside each cartridge CAUTION Do not place any items on the ETB If the belt is punctured or otherwise damaged print quality problems will result For instructions on removing the print cartridges see page 76 For instructions on removing the ETB see page 79 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 143 Covers and external components Rear cover To remove the rear cover 1 Remove the two screws shown in callout 1 2 Pull out on the left side of the rear cover and slide it to the left to remove it Figure 6 2 Removing and replacing the rear cover 144 Covers and external components C9660 90901 Top cover To remove the top cover 1 Lift the top cover and remove the fuser See Replacing the fuser on page 82 for instructions on removing the fuser WARNING The fuser might be hot Wait 10 minutes for it to cool down before removing it 2 Using fingers or needle nose pliers pinch and release the white plastic clips shown in callout 1 on the damper arm on the left side of the cover It is easier to pinch these clips if you tip the top cover forward slightly Disengage the tab shown in callout 2 and remove the retaining block Push the cover to the left to release the hinge pin on the right side Then pull the cover to the right to release the hinge pin on the left side P abs z PME
75. printer Replace and tighten the eight screws removed in step 2 9 Reconnect the power cable and interface cables and turn the printer on 86 Printer memory C9660 90901 Enabling memory If you installed a memory DIMM set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory 1 a A C N On the Start menu point to Settings and click Printers or Printers and Faxes Select this printer and select Properties On the Configure tab click More In the Total Memory field type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed Click OK Enabling the language font DIMM If you installed a language font DIMM in the printer you must select the Font DIMM option in the printer driver for the font DIMM to work properly To enable fonts from the PCL 5c and PCL 6 printer drivers for Windows follow this procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 On the Start menu point to Settings and click Printers Select this printer and select Properties On the Configure tab click More Select the Font DIMM check box In the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box click Add to add the font file In the Add Font DIMM dialog box browse to the location of the font file select the font file and click OK In the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box select the installed DIMM Click OK Checking DIMM installation Check that the DIMMs are installed correctly and working 1 C9660 90901 Turn the printer on Check that the Ready light is on
76. printer systems and the basic theory of operation are found in Chapter 5 Do not perform any of these troubleshooting processes without fully understanding the function of each mechanism This chapter contains the following sections Troubleshooting process includes a pre troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flowchart These tools contain information about common printer errors that can inhibit proper operation or create print quality problems These tools also include recommendations for solving the cause of the error Printer error troubleshooting explains each control panel display message and suggests recommendations for clearing the cause of each message When the printer message indicates a failure for which the root cause is not obvious use the printer error troubleshooting section and the troubleshooting tools section found later in this chapter to solve the problem Paper path troubleshooting provides techniques to solve feed problems Explanations regarding print media checks troubleshooting jams and the differences between jams caused by media and those caused by the printer are discussed Image formation troubleshooting suggests methods for solving print quality problems Interface troubleshooting provides techniques for isolating communication problems to the printer hardware printer configuration network configuration or software application Control panel troubleshooting provides procedures for printing a menu
77. supply PCB RG5 6399 000CN 100 127 volt Figure 8 2 1 RG5 6400 000CN 220 240 volt Fuser power supply PCB assembly RG5 6399 000CN 110 volt Figure 8 8 5 RG5 6400 000CN 220 volt Gear 16T 128T RS7 0179 000CN Figure 8 11 3 Gear 17T RS7 0139 000CN Figure 8 4 15 Gear 2001 black and yellow RS7 0138 000CN Figure 8 4 11 Gear 2001 magenta and cyan RS7 0137 000CN Figure 8 4 10 Gear 29T RS7 0136 000CN Figure 8 8 8 Gear 30T RS7 0176 000CN Figure 8 10 3 Gear pressure RB2 8122 000CN Figure 8 8 10 German overlay C9660 40004 Greek overlay C9660 40019 Guide cable RB2 8532 000CN Figure 8 12 3 Guide cartridge right lower RB2 8146 000CN Figure 8 6 9 Guide cartridge right upper RB2 8147 000CN Figure 8 6 10 Hebrew overlay C9660 40020 High voltage power PCB assembly RG5 6395 000CN Figure 8 6 1 High voltage power supply PCB RG5 6395 000CN Figure 8 2 2 HP Jetdirect connectivity card J6057 69001 Hungarian overlay C9660 4001 4 HVT terminal assembly RG5 6449 000CN Figure 8 6 2 I O daughter card C9144 60001 Figure 8 2 11 344 Alphabetical parts list C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Table 8 22 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Reference Image fuser kit 110 volt C9660 69002 exchange C9660 67902 new Image fuser kit 220 volt C9660 69003 exchang
78. switch SW4 door switch shown in the photo below SW5 on off switch SW1001 Door switch test print switch C9660 90901 Sensors Figure 7 19 Location of sensors Figure 7 20 Sensors on the paper pickup unit sensors are on the back of the PCB cassette paper sensor multi purpose tray paper sensor paper leading edge sensor bo c N overhead transparency sensor C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 299 Figure 7 21 300 Diagrams Fuser sensors and output bin full sensor fuser inlet paper sensor PS11 fuser delivery sensor PS12 output bin full sensor PS13 Table 7 50 Sensors cassette paper present sensor multi purpose tray paper present sensor paper leading edge sensor overhead transparency sensor developing disengagement sensor cyan drum home position sensor yellow drum home position sensor magenta drum home position sensor black drum home position sensor ETB speed sensor fuser inlet paper sensor fuser delivery sensor output bin paper full sensor C9660 90901 Solenoids Figure 7 22 Location of solenoids Table 7 51 Solenoids cassette pickup solenoid paper pickup drive assembly SL2 multi purpose tray pickup solenoid paper pickup drive assembly Figure 7 23 Solenoids on the paper pickup unit C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 301 Figure 7 24 302 Diagrams Motors an
79. the paper pickup unit See page 156 Push in on the black tab shown in callout 1 on the right side of the paper pickup unit Remove the sensor cover Remove the three screws shown in callout 2 a fF c N Disconnect the connector shown in callout 3 and remove the sensor PCB Figure 6 20 Removing and replacing the paper pickup sensor PCB 1 of 2 Figure 6 21 Removing and replacing the paper pickup sensor PCB 2 of 2 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 157 Cassette Tray 2 paper pickup rollers To remove the paper pickup rollers 1 Remove the ETB and the print cartridges Remove the paper pickup unit See page 156 On the paper pickup unit from the bottom grasp the paper pickup rollers shown in callout 1 and firmly push down to remove them Figure 6 22 Removing the cassette pickup rollers Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the paper pickup rollers be sure to fit the pins on the pickup roller into the holes on the pickup roller shaft Bp Figure 6 23 Replacing the cassette pickup rollers 158 Internal components front C9660 90901 Paper pickup drive unit To remove the paper pickup drive unit 1 Remove the paper pickup unit See page 156 2 On the bottom of the paper pickup unit remove the screw holding the gear cover in place and then remove the gear cover Unhook the spring from the gear shown in callout 1 Using a flat bladed screwdriver push down on the tab in the cen
80. this printer This product qualifies for ENERGY STAR which is a voluntary program to encourage the development of energy efficient office products ENERGY STAR is a U S registered service mark of the U S Environmental Protection Agency As an ENERGY STAR partner Hewlett Packard Y Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Ug4L Guidelines for energy efficiency For more information see http www energystar gov Paper use This product s optional automatic duplex feature 2 sided printing can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams have markings according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the products life HP LaserJet Printing Supplies In many countries regions this product s printing supplies print cartridges fuser and transfer unit can be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program An easy to use and free takeback program is available in over 48 countries regions Multi lingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package 36 Environmental Product Stewardship Program C9660 90901 C9660 90901 HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program information Since 1990 the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program has colle
81. toner on the developing cylinder is returned to the toner case Figure 5 29 illustrates this process Primary charging roller To waste toner case Toner charging roller Developing cylinder Primary charging roller and toner charging roller cleaning Chapter 5 Theory of operation 121 Color plane registration calibration The diameter of the rollers in individual print cartridges or ETB units varies from one to another For this reason whenever a new print cartridge or ETB unit is installed the printer must adjust the rotational speed of the rollers in order to ensure good color plane registration Color misregistration occurs when the individual colors do not print directly on top of one another causing poor print quality This adjustment consists of two steps 1 Direct calibration The DC controller uses the color registration detection unit to measure the color registration range directly and calibrate the color registration 2 Indirect calibration The DC controller monitors the rotational speed of each feed roller and controls the speed to prevent color misregistration Figure 5 30 illustrates this process Formatter PCB DC controller PCB Pressure roller Fuser sleeve LEGS re Za detection unit DT Laser Scanner i gt L Units Fire ea Drum motors M1 M2 M3 M4 lt b Er KO Picku t ickup motor y TaS mS ETB belt Fuser motor I3 O M8 TA JAW home position Z tecti r etection senso O F
82. top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the right cover See page 150 Remove the high voltage power supply PCB See page 185 Remove the toner level detection PCB See page 187 Remove the screw shown in callout 1 Unthread the wires from their guides shown in callout 2 O ON O C FP c N Remove the high voltage contact block shown in callout 3 10 Repeat for each of the four high voltage contact blocks Figure 6 60 Removing and replacing the high voltage contact blocks cyan indicated 188 Internal components right side C9660 90901 Door switch To remove the door switch Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the right cover See page 150 Remove the screw shown in callout 1 Disconnect the connector shown in callout 2 N O OF FP C N Remove the door switch Li E i E a E y i z ag ri s Rew ll a t ETT gg j L LS F TE id Li pu 3 a LI 2 a E T put E a Figure 6 61 Removing and replacing the door switch C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 189 Internal components top Fuser power supply PCB To remove and replace the fuser power supply PCB Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Disconnect the connector J203 shown in callout 1 Unthread the cable shown
83. wait 10 minutes for it to cool down 2 Firmly lift the two green handles on either side of the fuser to disengage the fuser rollers 3 Pull media by both corners to remove it 4 _ Firmly press down on the two green handles on either side of the fuser to re engage the fuser rollers 13 12 00 JAM IN DUPLEX PATH During a duplex print job media was removed from the output bin before it entered the duplex path or media has entered the duplex path but it is stuck 1 Open the top cover and the front cover Do not open the ETB 2 Pull media by both corners to remove it 13 21 00 JAM IN PAPER PATH One of the covers is not completely closed Ensure both covers are closed before printing 1 Open the covers and the ETB 2 Pull media by both corners to remove it C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 235 Paper jam recovery This printer automatically provides paper jam recovery a feature that allows you to set whether the printer should attempt to automatically reprint jammed pages The options are e TG Printer will attempt to reprint jammed pages GFF Printer will not attempt to reprint jammed pages Note During the recovery process the printer may reprint several pages that were printed properly before the paper jam occurred Be sure to remove any duplicated pages To disable paper jam recovery Press to enter the MEHUS Press W to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press O to select COHFIGURE DEUICE
84. 0 If there is a remainder add 1 to the result This is the month 3 The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date Using the Service ID 12287 as an example the date conversion is as follows 1 1241990 2002 so the year is 2002 2 287 divided by 30 9 with a remainder of 17 Since there is a remainder add 1 to 9 to get 10 which represents October The remainder in step 2 is 17 so that is the date The complete date is 17 October 2002 Note A 6 day grace period is built into the date system Cold reset paper When you perform a cold reset the paper size stored in NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting If you replace a formatter board in a country region such as Europe that uses A4 as the standard paper size use this menu to reset the default paper size to A4 LETTER and 4 are the only available values 296 Service menu C9660 90901 Diagrams Main parts Figure 7 16 Location of main parts fuser sleeve pressure roller transfer charging rollers ETB belt separation pad multi ourpose tray pickup roller main thermistor sub thermistor O ON O C FP c N thermoswitch 10 cassette pickup rollers C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 297 Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 298 Diagrams Switches Location of switches Table 7 49 Switches SW1 Function cassette paper size detection switch SW2 cassette paper size detection switch SW3 cassette paper size detection
85. 0 onboard NVRAM 1 removable disk flash or hard A non volatile storage device is full Pressing the 7 button should clear the message Printing can continue but there may be unexpected behavior X Description 0 onboard NVRAM 1 removable disk flash or hard A non volatile storage device is failing to write Pressing the button should clear the message Printing can continue but there may be unexpected behavior X Description 0 onboard NVRAM 1 removable disk flash or hard A critical hardware error has occurred The EIO accessory card in slot X has encountered a critical error Turn the printer off and then back on Perform a cold reset See Cold reset on page 293 for instructions If the message persists replace the formatter or firmware DIMM Press amp to continue Turn the printer off and then back on Check the printer settings to determine which settings have been changed Press to continue For 68 0 errors turn the printer off and then back on If a 68 0 error persists execute an NVRAM inititialization See NVRAM initialization on page 293 For 68 1 errors use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive If a 68 1 errors persists reinitialize the hard disk See Hard disk initialization on page 294 Press to continue Turn the printer off and then back on If the problem persists initialize NVRAM See NVRAM initialization on page 29
86. 0 sheet paper feeder see page 199 and turn it upside down Remove the spring and the E ring indicated by callout 1 Unhook the tab in the center of the gear indicated by callout 2 and remove the gear Disconnect the three connectors indicated by callout 3 two of these connectors are on the paper feeder PCB Remove the cables from the cable clips Remove the two screws shown in callout 4 and slide the drive unit out Figure 6 72 mu Sat of mmm ACT Ta or PS icd TUS Wulf Figure 6 73 Removing and replacing the paper feeder drive unit side view 2 of 2 200 Optional 500 sheet paper feeder C9660 90901 Reinstallation tip When reassembling the drive unit the cam shown in callout 5 and the gear shown in callout 6 should be in the position shown Figure 6 74 Cam and gear alignment Paper feeder pickup rollers The procedure for removing the 500 sheet paper feeder pickup rollers is essentially the same as for the cassette Tray 2 pickup rollers See page 158 for instructions C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 201 Paper feeder PCB To remove the 500 sheet paper feeder PCB 1 Remove the top plate from the 500 sheet paper feeder see page 199 and turn it upside down Disconnect the five connectors shown in callout 1 Remove the screw shown in callout 2 Remove the paper feeder PCB Figure 6 75 Removing and replacing the 500 sheet paper feeder PCB 202 Opti
87. 000 is the maximum number of pages the transfer unit can print Allows you to reset the page count of the current transfer unit if the value is lost This item automatically resets to zero when the transfer unit is replaced and the user selects the choice to reset the transfer count FUSER KIT COUNT Range 0 9999999 150 000 is the maximum number of pages the fuser can print Allows you to reset the page count of the current fuser if the value is lost This item automatically resets to zero when the fuser is replaced and the user selects the choice to reset the fuser count SERIAL NUMBER XXXXXXXXXX Allows you to update the serial number if you replace the formatter SERVICE ID YYDDD If you replace the formatter this item allows you to set the date to the date the printer was first used rather than the date the new formatter was installed See Service ID on page 296 for information on the date format COLD RESET PAPER 274 Control panel troubleshooting LETTER A4 If the customer uses default paper size of A4 used in Europe this item allows you to reset the default if you replace the formatter C9660 90901 Tools for troubleshooting Note C9660 90901 Embedded Web server When the printer is directly connected to a computer the embedded Web server is supported for Windows 95 and later In order to use the embedded Web server with a direct connection you must choose th
88. 127 part numbers 332 pickup rollers locating 297 pickup solenoid locating 127 CD service parts information 46 circuit assemblies 44 capacity 24 DC controller 93 diagram 307 fuser power supply 96 heater temperature control 97 high voltage power supply 98 low voltage power supply 99 paper feeder diagram 308 scanner motor control 105 cleaning printer and accessories 72 spilled toner 72 clear event log 295 clothing toner on 39 coated media 31 cold reset 293 cold reset paper type 296 color adjusting 250 edge control 251 halftone options 251 HP ImageREt 2400 249 matching 249 neutral grays 251 options 250 PANTONE 249 print in grayscale 250 RGB 251 sRGB 249 variation 248 Color LaserJet 4600 series printer models 18 color registration calibration 122 detection unit removing and replacing 162 ETB feed speed 112 color selection process 248 color variations 248 colored paper 32 commands DOS 264 PJL 264 Commercial Service and Support Organization America CSSO A 45 Europe CSSO E 45 compact disc service parts information 46 component tests 289 components replacing 44 configuration page printing 279 viewing with embedded Web server 276 configuring network parameters 68 Novell NetWare 68 connectors locating 305 control panel installing a new overlay 154 locating 26 locking 69 overlays part numbers 312 removing and replacing 153 country region of origin determining 21 Index 355 356 covers cleaning 72
89. 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 35 6 36 6 37 6 38 6 39 6 40 6 41 6 42 6 43 6 44 6 45 6 46 6 47 6 48 6 49 6 50 6 51 6 52 Pickup feed system 4 uui adem anaa 127 Cassette paper size detection switches 0 0 eee eee 128 Overhead transparency detection inn 129 Small size paper detection 0 eee na 130 D plex switch back fj mw ee pa an 133 Additional 500 sheet paper feeder na 134 500 sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation cece eee 135 Phillips and Posidriv screwdriver comparison eee 140 Removing and replacing the rear cover a 144 Removing and replacing the top cover 1 of 2 usse aem e ibn RR cR sena ewe weed 145 Removing and replacing the top cover 2 of 2 ees 145 Removing and replacing the rear top cover removing screws 1 0f3 146 Removing and replacing the rear top cover releasing right side tab 2 of 3 147 Removing and replacing the rear top cover releasing left side tab 3 of 3 147 Removing and replacing the left cover 1 of 2 llle 149 Removing and replacing the left cover 2 of 2 0 llle 149 Removing and replacing the right cover llle 150 Removing and replacing the multi purpose tray ii 151 Removing and rep
90. 2 DC controller MAE PRU REPE Es L J205 02e PB 1 2 MAINTHI 4 16 SUBTHI 5 Fuser sleeve Thermo switch Relay drive circuit 3 3V RL201 Safety monitor circuit Constant Ms current control I a I current Figure 5 6 Heater temperature control circuit Current control Amperage circuit setting 5 ACLINEI 6i The two thermistors that are attached to the fuser sleeve TH1 and TH2 detect the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve The main thermistor TH1 controls the fuser temperature and the sub thermistor TH2 detects overheating at the end of the fuser sleeve When the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve increases resistance of the two thermistors is reduced and the voltage of the main thermistor detection signal MAINTH1 and the sub thermistor detection signal SUBTH1 drops The CPU IC1012 on the DC controller monitors the voltage of the MAINTH1 and SUBTH1 signals The CPU sends the fuser temperature control signal TMPCON according to the voltage level The CPU sends the amperage control signal PRANGE to control the amperage of the fuser sleeve C9660 90901 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 97 High voltage power supply The high voltage power supply circuit applies bias to the pri
91. 25A002CN Cable AC RG5 6427 000CN 110 volt Figure 8 8 4 RG5 6434 000CN 220 volt Cable antenna RG5 6418 000CN Figure 8 4 16 Cable cassette size RG5 6430 000CN Figure 8 5 10 Cable DC power supply RG5 6415 000CN Figure 8 8 17 Cable ETB RG5 6417 000CN Figure 8 16 3 Cable flat RH2 5471 000CN Figure 8 8 2 Cable interface RG5 6422 000CN Figure 8 8 1 Cable left plate RG5 6413 000CN Figure 8 6 11 Cable main drive RG5 6416 000CN Figure 8 10 5 Cable memory RG5 6420 000CN Figure 8 4 18 Cable paper feed RG5 6419 000CN Figure 8 15 5 Cable relay RG5 6414 000CN Figure 8 8 7 Cable sensor RG5 6423 000CN Figure 8 8 15 Cable upper crossmember RG5 6421 000CN Figure 8 12 2 Cable connector fuser RG5 6425 000CN Figure 8 8 6 Cable connector optional feeder RG5 6430 000CN Figure 8 5 8 Cam gear 66T RS7 0135 000CN Figure 8 8 11 Cap left RB2 8121 000CN Figure 8 7 8 Cap right RB2 8124 000CN Figure 8 7 6 Cartridge inlet assembly RG5 6450 000CN Figure 8 6 8 Cassette Tray 2 RG5 6476 000CN Figure 8 13 1 Figure 8 14 Cassette frame left assembly RG5 6459 000CN Figure 8 5 5 342 Alphabetical parts list C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Table 8 22 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Reference Cassette frame right assembly RG5 6460 000CN Figure 8 5 2 Cassette 500 sheet paper feeder R
92. 292 ENGINE TCSElS m TI TTE TT TT TCI T T TT ETC TET TTE 293 Cold reset ce eeweces cubes se eed naa LOR Goes APA 293 NVRAM initialization E AA eae abet Bere Soe ea 293 Hard disk initialization ee eens 294 Calibration bypass a guard dose dees aa d ba eae bana pabahay Gee temas 294 Calibrate NOW sau cetus iSAESRGG Seka See GOSH Owe ewe SPA 294 SEmi MENU as x oie ex aot are det AS mb eaten eee an dee eu aes AA 295 Accessing the Service Menu 1 eee 295 A C ace oe eee ee QD a GY AA AA 297 MAI DANS 244 Genoese PA eke eee 297 SE A e nat is does eg eu dues dna PANDA ss OST DIDIT TT 298 snc NS ahe parad tos ode bc deeds dbs 3 Sl ban Ga dee ddeientaes oben 299 DUlENOIGS ugs gaa eee ee eee NANA REQUE ERES NAGA na tea na 301 Motors and fans anna 302 aoc sonia ee ee ta De Down Da ie DR ena Ban TE 303 DC controller PCB i ad av an iii aeos ed bre ed ea Hee a t deo 304 CONTO CIO M P 305 500 sheet paper feeder connectors llli ees 306 General circuit diagram ua e naa xa ue aaa tees capes KG ee E UP PA Bed as 307 500 sheet paper feeder circuit diagram ees 308 8 Parts and diagrams inigeelieus Lr 310 Ordering DANS a xad asc AY 914 Supplies and accessories llli 311 Common fasteners 0 0 0 eee rs 314 Illustrations and parts lists llli RS 315 Alphabetical parts list 0 0 Ie 342 N mercal Pan Em 348
93. 3 Reinitialize the hard disk See Hard disk initialization on page 294 Turn the printer off and then back on If the problem persists reseat the firmware DIMM Reseat the formatter Replace the firmware DIMM Replace the formatter Calibrate the priner See Calibrate Now on page 294 Turn the printer off and then back on If the problem persists reseat the EIO card Replace the EIO card Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 233 Paper path troubleshooting Jams Jam error messages occur if paper fails to arrive at or clear the paper path sensors in the allowed time Dedicated paper sensors detect whether paper is present in the sensor and if paper is fed normally When the DC controller detects a jam it immediately stops the printing process and displays the appropriate jam message for the sensor that detects the jam Figure 7 19 on page 299 shows the locations of all the sensors in the printer Jam locations Jams occur in the areas shown in Figure 7 2 Jam messages correlate with these areas For instructions on clearing jams see the sections later in this chapter Figure 7 2 Jam locations top cover area duplex path
94. 3 23 EEC and carries the CE Marking accordingly 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two Conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 3 Product exhibits Class A operation when connected to Local Area Network LAN cables using print server accessories The model number may include an additional suffix letter R Hewlett Packard Company Boise Idaho USA April 1 2002 For regulatory topics only Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard Gmbh Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger StraBe110 140 D 71034 Boblingen FAX 49 7031 14 3143 USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise ID 83707 0015 Phone 208 396 6000 42 Safety information C9660 90901 Service approach Chapter contents Service approach a 44 Parts and supplies a 45 Ordering parts a 45 Ordering supplies sucum be oan dare Re e NGA e s 45 Exchange program ngawa acu ok boa AG ons cane ds IR
95. 4140 000CN Cassette 500 sheet paper feeder Figure 8 22 1 RG5 5469 000CN Memory tag antenna PCB assembly Figure 8 8 13 RG5 5469 000CN Memory tag antenna PCBs Figure 8 2 6 RG5 6380 000CN Laser scanner assembly Figure 8 7 12 RG5 6391 000CN DC controller PCB Figure 8 2 8 RG5 6391 000CN DC controller PCB assembly Figure 8 6 12 RG5 6392 000CN Paper sensor PCB assembly Figure 8 15 3 RG5 6392 000CN Pickup PCB Figure 8 2 4 RG5 6393 000CN Toner sensor PCB Figure 8 2 3 RG5 6393 000CN Toner sensor PCB assembly Figure 8 6 4 RG5 6394 000CN LED PCB assembly Figure 8 10 4 RG5 6395 000CN High voltage power PCB assembly Figure 8 6 1 RG5 6395 000CN High voltage power supply PCB Figure 8 2 2 RG5 6396 000CN Antenna memory PCB assembly Figure 8 4 17 RG5 6396 000CN Memory controller PCB Figure 8 2 7 RG5 6399 000CN Fuser power supply PCB Figure 8 2 1 RG5 6400 000CN 220 240 volt RG5 6399 000CN Fuser power supply PCB assembly Figure 8 8 9 RG5 6400 000CN RG5 6410 000CN Low voltage power supply PCB Figure 8 2 D RG5 6411 000CN 220 240 volt RG5 6410 000CN Low voltage power supply assembly Figure 8 8 18 RG5 6411 000CN RG5 6413 000CN Cable left plate Figure 8 6 11 RG5 6414 000CN Cable relay Figure 8 8 7 RG5 6415 000CN Cable DC power supply Figure 8 8 17 350 Numerical parts list C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Table 8 23 Numerical parts list continued
96. 500 sheet paper feeder internal components Description Paper feeder PCB assembly Quantity Part number RG1 4139 000CN Roller paper pickup RF5 3739 000CN Paper feeder drive assembly C9660 90901 RG1 4138 000CN Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 339 Figure 8 21 500 sheet paper feeder drive assembly Table 8 20 500 sheet paper feeder drive assembly 1 Paper feeder drive assembly RG1 4138 000CN 340 Illustrations and parts lists C9660 90901 500 sheet paper feeder cassette Figure 8 22 500 sheet paper feeder cassette Table 8 21 Part number Quantity 4 Description RG1 4140 000CN Cassette 500 sheet paper feeder Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 341 C9660 90901 Alphabetical parts list Table 8 22 Alphabetical parts list Description Part number Figure Reference 128 MB memory DIMM SDRAM C7850 67901 256 MB memory DIMM SDRAM C9653 67901 4 MB Flash DIMM C9665 67951 64 MB memory DIMM SDRAM C7848 67901 Antenna memory PCB assembly RG5 6396 000CN Figure 8 4 17 Arabic overlay C9660 40018 Arm link left RB2 8207 000CN Figure 8 5 7 Arm link right RB2 8212 000CN Figure 8 5 4 Arm paper size RB2 8349 000CN Figure 8 13 4 Arm pressure RB2 8151 000CN Figure 8 6 6 Arm test print RB2 8250 000CN Figure 8 4 19 Black print cartridge 6825A001CN Black print cartridge Europe 68
97. 60 90901 Locating supplies Figure 4 2 illustrates the location of each supply item Figure 4 2 Location of supplies 1 fuser 2 print cartridges 3 transfer unit ETB C9660 90901 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 75 Replacing supply items Changing print cartridges Replace a print cartridge when the printer control panel displays a E COLOR CAR TR EDGE message The control panel display will also indicate the color that Soul bs ecd Tune a genuine HP cartridge is not currently installed 1 Open the top cover Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down The front cover will open as you pull down the transfer unit CAUTION Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open If the transfer unit is punctured print quality problems may result 2 Remove the used print cartridge from the printer 3 Remove the new print cartridge from the bag Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling 76 Replacing supply items C9660 90901 4 Grasp both sides of the cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the cartridge from side to side 5 Remove the tape from the orange shipping lock Remove and discard the orange shipping lock 6 Remove the inside sealing tape by pulling the orange loop on the end and pulling the tape completely out Discard the tape C9660 90901 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 77 7 Grasp the blue handles on the sides of the print cartridge Align the prin
98. 60 90901 Table 8 23 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Figure Reference C9660 40023 Thai overlay C9660 40024 Simplified Chinese overlay C9660 40025 Traditional Chinese overlay C9660 69001 exchange Formatter simplex Figure 8 2 9 C9660 67901 new C9660 69002 110 volt Fuser Figure 8 7 1 C9660 69003 220 volt C9660 69002 110 volt Fuser assembly Figure 8 17 1 C9660 69003 220 volt C9660 69002 exchange Image fuser kit 110 volt C9660 67902 new C9660 69003 exchange Image fuser kit 220 volt C9660 67903 new C9660 69004 ETB assembly Figure 8 7 5 C9660 69004 ETB assembly Figure 8 16 1 C9660 69004 exchange Image transfer kit C9660 67904 new C9661 69001 exchange Formatter duplex Figure 8 2 9 C9661 67901 new C9665 67951 4 MB Flash DIMM J6054 61013 Printer hard disk J6057 69001 HP Jetdirect connectivity card RB1 2155 000CN Roller oblique Figure 8 16 4 RB2 8121 000CN Cap left Figure 8 7 8 RB2 8122 000CN Gear pressure Figure 8 8 10 RB2 8124 000CN Cap right Figure 8 7 6 RB2 8146 000CN Guide cartridge right lower Figure 8 6 9 RB2 8147 000CN Guide cartridge right upper Figure 8 6 10 RB2 8151 000CN Arm pressure Figure 8 6 6 RB2 8207 000CN Arm link left Figure 8 5 7 RB2 8212 000CN Arm link right Figure 8 5 4 RB2 8213 000CN Rod spring Figure 8 5 3 RB2 8213 000
99. 9 EMI Statement Korea aa acek was Kata OW awa ow ar RE eg Men an t o ROA wk 39 VCCI statement JAPAN sent kaawa angen Er draw d KALAN oes Dam bees E ws 40 Laser statement for Finland Wa 41 Declaration of Conformity csse RR Rm bana RR er mew kuwa eds 42 Contents v 2 Service approach Service approach s 2 odio xp eee ork nan ye dH do Lena x ce dd 44 Parts and supplies llli rn 45 Ordena Dans ess a mam per EUR Eod OUR RS Rot eee APAPAP 45 Ordering supplies llleelele hn 45 Exchange DEOOESETL cy keane qtu moda ae bn BOE Hs a Poa ore eee wd 46 sg CT 46 World Wide WED 6 pamana pro E bdo m dv de s xo ete RUE CR ba eds 46 HP Service Parts Information Compact Disc 0 000 c eee sss 46 HP Support Assistant Compact Disc a 46 Customer care reseller sales and service support center 46 Ordering related documentation and software 47 Warranty statemoefib a us ava dowd Seaton ex ORA Rx mr d KEREN Po Kec AREE ROI e 48 Hewlett Packard warranty statement llle 48 Limited warranty for print cartridge life llle 49 Transfer unit and fuser warranty llle 49 HP maintenance agreements llle 50 On site service agreements a 50 3 Installation and configuration Unpack the PINE a c e rarus ceeeadasadeue 3 SERO REO PE OPE YEH euues chee 52 Unp
100. AN eiie ow ewe na BNG Ow e 96 Heater temperature control 0 00 ccc eee eee eens 97 High voltage power supply 0 0 0 ee eee eee 98 Low voltage power supply Wa 99 Formatter system scu asa decir ona od ene stays EP eran Op eu RE Vr AINA MAKA oc 100 PONG NG aes Loe ease S Naga Erg RI E Ead E NGA AHA AINA do ERREUR 101 jyovuswo sora due dud ame ee ee eee KA WU aed Oe a Ogee ana 101 Printer Memory AA eae ee ow os Oa Coe Bea At ee oe 102 DIVING SOS 15 8 oar 8 SUP Dd ensue sures Ooo aon BONGA AMAIN 102 PUL overvieW em da KAG cmt e Bac pad qois quic G6 una ee we ote dus d Br gos 102 seo ee a Gane a en ee me av ere oe Gone wer esi eo APA 103 COMMOMOANC le anid soc eis ee AA APA oC 103 Laser scanner SYSt EM 1 a 104 Scanner motor control MEE 105 Image formation system s us oua qd m baba e GG eS MG C CR DAG o d wa e Ga 106 Image formation process Wa 107 xinWe gas C RITTTPMT 108 Toner level detection llli 110 Electrostatic transfer transport belt ETB unit 0 112 Electrostatic latent image formation block 113 Bale eee EE PRA AA S Nd 115 IONSENDIOEK ae a WANG um uox wis d IO obs cu abt aa sub de S haahaha E 116 FUSING DIOCK 2 mine ti AN Yana KS Gn KAPA KE NG ard A ween na 118 Cleaning block AA 118 Calibration and cleaning edenda ne ge spe aem gae SURE ETE REG EGRE ans 119 Color plane registration calibrati
101. C 12345XGPJL JOB PJL DEFAULT PASSWORD numeric password O to 65535 PJL EOJ EC c12 545X To lock or unlock the control panel if the password has been set send the following ASCII sequence to the printer EC3 12345X PJL JOB PASSWORD numeric password PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK NONE or MINIMUM MODERATE or MAXIMUM PJL EOJ ECS 12345X 70 Setting network security on the printer C9660 90901 Printer maintenance Chapter contents Cleaning the printer and accessories 72 Cleaning spilled toner a 72 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items 73 ETB life under different circumstances 74 Locating supplies ia aus ANAN oie Kon wan DO OES OSE EE ades Reus d 75 Replacing supply itemMS 2 0 00 ce ee 76 Changing print cartridges 0 cc eee 76 Replacing the transfer unit ik 79 Replacing the fuser 0 cece ee eee 82 Printer Memory aa GATE MAA ae TTL TE OIL 84 Installing memory and font DIMMs 85 Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card 88 C9660 90901 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 71 Cleaning the printer and accessories WARNING CAUTION CAUTION Clean the outside surfaces with a water dampened cloth Observe the warning and caution below Before you begin these steps turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard Be careful when cleaning aroun
102. C O He wI a6puueo xg SHI 7 sae T SS oC o oooO Ke gz T Od 18I041002 DG Rs a z coo22228 3 z Zmz 4423332 592245455 ba m m b 22582325 B EPPEIEEPEE L IIIIIIII 0 00000000000 01k o oo I 6n BA oo no L90vr 82d 1eAug 49p924 Joded WAbet voov voaq ANDd Ager Lrag GNDS Lyd LO 07T1HLO YIYdOON v1VdOGA S yun J9UUBIS J9SET 4g AS vinoadd WAvet E0OW 03G ANDd Ager Leda GNDS Le TULO 06 1HL0 EIVdOGN E J 93WMd 1VdOGA 3 HOA os pun Jeuugog 1ese7 IN E J INDd Lnodd PI 93s2 PI NTOlds PI dadvo fJ snsala PI anos PJ Ac et lt 5 WAve ZDOV 203G ANDd Ager Leag GNOS L2THLO 021410 Z1YV4OGN ecIVdOGA p yun Jjeuueog 1ese A elnoadd E ax1iNoL E auos VWAvet P SNSNOL LOOW E SNSNOL L030 E ZSNSNOL aN9d FI ISNSNOL Ae et E GNOS LLag Ey Ast GNOS FE VIVGAH LETHLO E J 4IOVGAH OLTHIO FE GIVdAH LIVGOGN E L3S3HAH LIVGOGA 2 AT PNS yun 13uue sg se 9 F J SLIY LINOGd E TDAH E IINMdLIV E 410AH PI aAvet E auod o 5 5 Oo0 3 2 4On DO rt mmo 288828 22323825 BOHGAZR GDOVRKHG lt CLIII AAAOAAAA A kuli e2 o 5 Kan DS Koo D Kop Oz E gt Ken DS bad ON Oe ba bad LO O 6707 6707P AJOJN e n Li IN Of ojo KA I INYO M O op B eo 100000000 jaued jo u09 JopeeJ jeded LIII it diagram Ircul General c Figure 7 29 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 307 C9660 90901 500 sheet paper feeder circuit d
103. CB assembly RG1 4139 000CN Figure 8 20 1 Paper pickup assembly RG5 6468 000CN Figure 8 7 4 Paper pickup assembly RG5 6468 000CN Figure 8 15 1 Paper pickup drive assembly RG5 6469 000CN Figure 8 9 1 Paper pickup drive assembly RG5 6469 000CN Figure 8 15 4 Paper sensor PCB assembly RG5 6392 000CN Figure 8 15 3 Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Figure 8 8 9 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 345 Table 8 22 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Reference Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Figure 8 8 16 Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Figure 8 11 2 Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Figure 8 12 4 Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Figure 8 16 5 Pickup PCB RG5 6392 000CN Figure 8 2 4 Plate developer disengagement RB2 8239 000CN Figure 8 4 14 Plate drive grounding RB2 8255 000CN Figure 8 4 13 Plate drive interlock RB2 8225 000CN Figure 8 4 6 Plate separation RF5 3749 000CN Figure 8 13 3 Polish overlay C9660 40015 Portuguese overlay C9660 4001 1 Printer hard disk J6054 61013 Rear cover RB2 8592 000CN Figure 8 3 6 Rear top cover assembly RG5 6464 000CN Figure 8 3 7 Right cover RB2 8591 000CN Figure 8 3 1 Rod spring RB2 8213 000CN Figure 8 5 3 Rod spring RB2 8213 000CN Figure 8 5 6 Roller oblique RB1 2155 000CN Figure 8 16 4
104. CN Rod spring Figure 8 5 6 RB2 8225 000CN Plate drive interlock Figure 8 4 6 RB2 8239 000CN Plate developer disengagement Figure 8 4 14 RB2 8246 000CN Spring scanner support Figure 8 8 3 RB2 8250 000CN Arm test print Figure 8 4 19 RB2 8255 000CN Plate drive grounding Figure 8 4 13 RB2 8349 000CN Arm paper size Figure 8 13 4 RB2 8498 000CN Sensor flag Figure 8 18 2 RB2 8532 000CN Guide cable Figure 8 12 3 RB2 8590 000CN Left cover Figure 8 3 5 C9660 90901 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 349 Table 8 23 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Figure Reference RB2 8591 000CN Right cover Figure 8 3 1 RB2 8592 000CN Rear cover Figure 8 3 6 RB2 8596 000CN Filter left side Figure 8 3 9 RB2 8597 000CN Filter rear Figure 8 3 8 RF5 3725 000CN Lever cart pressure Figure 8 5 1 RF5 3739 000CN Roller paper pickup Figure 8 15 2 RF5 3739 000CN Roller paper pickup Figure 8 20 2 RF5 3749 000CN Plate separation Figure 8 13 3 RF5 3773 000CN Static eliminator Figure 8 7 2 RF5 3774 000CN Fuser cover left Figure 8 18 3 RF5 3775 000CN Fuser cover right Figure 8 18 4 RG1 4138 000CN Paper feeder drive assembly Figure 8 20 3 RG1 4138 000CN Paper feeder drive assembly Figure 8 21 1 RG1 4139 000CN Paper feeder PCB assembly Figure 8 20 1 RG1 4140 000CN Cassette 500 sheet paper feeder Figure 8 19 2 RG1
105. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 258 Image defects C9660 90901 Smearing Table 7 34 Causes for smearing Poor contact in the printer ground and cartridge Clean each printer cartridge ground contact and the ground contacts printer ground contact If they are still dirty after cleaning or if they are damaged replace the cartridge or replace the printer ground contact Fuser inlet guide is dirty or has debris Clean the fuser inlet guide Cartridge shutters are not opening Make sure the cartridge shutter bar is operating properly Misplaced image Table 7 35 Causes for a misplaced image Paper is skewed See Table 7 15 on page 245 to resolve the reason for the skew Oblique rollers are worn Applies to duplex printing Replace the oblique rollers only DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 259 Repetitive defects troubleshooting Note CAUTION Note Defects on printer rollers can cause image defects to appear at regular intervals on the page Use the repetitive defects ruler on the next page Figure 7 3 to measure the distance between defects that recur on a page Use Table 7 36 to determine which roller is causing the defect To resolve the problem try cleaning the r
106. ENSION dimensions Y DIMENSION DUPLEX OFF Allows you to enable or disable the duplex function ON on models with duplexing capability OVERRIDE A4 LETTER NO Allows you to set the printer to print an A4 job on YES letter size paper when no A4 paper is loaded MANUAL FEED ON Allows you to manually feed media OFF COURIER FONT REGULAR Allows you to select a version of the Courier font DARK WIDE A4 NO Allows you to change the printable area of A4 paper YES so that eighty 10 pitch characters may be printed on a single line PRINT PS ERRORS Allows you to select to print PS error pages ON FORM LENGTH Allows you to configure settings for the printer control ORIENTATION language FONT SOURCE FONT NUMBER FONT PITCH SYMBOL SET APPEND CR TO LF C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 269 Print quality menu The Print quality menu allows you to adjust all aspects of print quality including calibration registration and color halftone settings Table 7 41 Print quality submenu Menuitem vaes esenpton ADJUST COLOR CYAN DENSITY Allows you to modify the halftone settings for each MAGENTA DENSITY color YELLOW DENSITY BLACK DENSITY RESTORE COLOR VALUES SET REGISTRATION PRINT TEST PAGE Allows simplex and duplex image alignment SOURCE ADJUST TRAY 1 ADJUST TRAY 2 ADJUST TRAY 3 PRINT MODES A list of available modes Allows you to associate each media type with a appears specific print mode OPTIMIZE REDUCE Allows y
107. ETB rollers or gears are worn or defective Replace the ETB if they are Check the duplex feed guide which is part of the control panel crossmember assembly If the guide is worn or damaged replace the crossmember assembly Press for detailed information about clearing the jam Press A and W to step through the instructions Check the registration shutter and make sure it is in place Replace the paper pickup assembly if the shutter is damaged Check the paper pickup feed rollers and replace them if they are worn or damaged Check the connectors gears solenoids motors and PCB on the paper pickup assembly Replace the paper pickup assembly if necessary Press for detailed information about clearing the jam Press 4 and W to step through the instructions If paper is folding into an accordion shape check whether the shutter on each print cartridge opens as you close the ETB and if each cartridge is turning properly Replace defective print cartridges or drive motors Clean the attaching roller at the bottom of the ETB and make sure the spring is holding it in place If the attaching roller gears are defective replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now on page 294 Replace the paper pickup PCB Replace the ETB if it is not moving paper properly Calibrate the printer Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller
108. G1 4140 000CN Figure 8 19 2 Cassette 500 sheet paper feeder RG1 4140 000CN Figure 8 22 1 Color registration detection assembly RG5 6454 000CN Figure 8 7 3 Connector drawer WS3 5746 000CN Figure 8 6 7 Contact pin assembly RG5 6492 000CN Figure 8 4 3 Control panel assembly RG5 6432 000CN 100 127 volt Figure 84 1 RG5 6433 000CN 220 240 volt Control panel crossmember assembly RG5 6510 000CN Figure 84 2 Cyan print cartridge 6824A001CN Cyan print cartridge Europe 6824A002CN Czech overlay C9660 40013 Damper assembly RG5 6446 000CN Figure 8 7 10 Danish overlay C9660 40007 DC controller PCB RG5 6391 000CN Figure 82 8 DC controller PCB assembly RG5 6391 000CN Figure 8 6 12 Developing disengaging drive assembly RG5 6507 000CN Figure 8 7 9 Developing drive assembly RG5 6508 000CN Figure 8 10 2 cyan magenta Developing drive assembly RG5 6509 000CN black yellow Disengaging drive assembly RG5 6507 000CN Figure 8 11 1 Drum drive assembly black RG5 6505 000CN Figure 8 4 9 Drum drive assembly cyan magenta RG5 6504 000CN Figure 8 10 1 Drum drive assembly black RG5 6505 000CN Drum drive assembly yellow RG5 6506 000CN Drum drive assembly magenta and RG5 6504 000CN Figure 8 4 7 cyan Drum drive assembly yellow RG5 6506 000CN Figure 84 8 Drum grounding assembly RG5 6474 000CN Figure 84 4 black and yellow Drum grounding assembly RG5 6475 000CN Figure 8 4 5 magenta and cyan Dutch overlay C9660 40008 Engli
109. GURBTION Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 59 Using PowerSave The adjustable PowerSave Time feature reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for an extended period YOUG can set LINE buic e Br time before the oa a into PowerSave mode to a LML im 12 MIMOTES SB MIN Orto i HEIR HOURS Or 4 HOUR The default setting is 33 MINUTES Note The printer display dims when the printer is in PowerSave mode PowerSave mode does not affect printer warm up time To set PowerSave Time Press C to enter the MEHUS Press Ww to highlight CONFIGURE DELICE Press C to select CONFIGURE DENICE Press Ww to highlight SYSTEM SETUR Press Oto select SYSTEM SETUP Press Ww to highlight PFOWERSHUE TIME Press to select POMERZaGUE TIME Press A or Y to select the appropriate time period O ON Oo OF BP CQ N Press to set the time period mk Press PAUSE RESUME To disable enable PowerSave Press C to enter the HEMUS Press W to highlight CONFIGURE DEUICE Press to select COMEIGUBE DELICE Press W to highlight RESETS E Press C to select Press Ww to highlight FOWERSAME Press O to select POWlERSRUE Press or Y to select OH or OFF O ON O C FP C N Press to set the selection 10 Press PAUSE RESUME 60 Installation C9660 90901 Connecting to a computer Figure 3 3 Note Note C9660 90901 The HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer supports network and parallel connections at the
110. K print cartridge Printer message REPLACE BLACK CARTRIDGE Page counts 9 000 pages Approximate time period 2 7 months To install See page 76 Cyan C print cartridge REPLACE CYAN CARTRIDGE 8 000 pages 2 7 months See page 76 Magenta M print cartridge REPLACE MAGENTA CARTRIDGE 8 000 pages 2 7 months See page 76 Yellow Y print cartridge REPLACE YELLOW CARTRIDGE 8 000 pages 2 months See page 76 Image transfer kit ETB REPLACE TRANSFER KIT 120 000 pages 40 months See page 79 Image fuser kit REPLACE FUSER KIT 150 000 pages Approximate lives are based on 3 000 pages per month The approximate average A4 Letter size page count is based on 5 coverage of individual colors Page counts 50 months are only estimations usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary Page counts are only estimations usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary See page 74 See page 82 Hewlett Packard recommends the use of HP products in this printer Use of non HP products can cause problems that require service not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements C9660 90901 Print cartridges and ETB It is recommended that you remove the print cartridges and ETB when servicing internal printer components Place the print cartridges and ETB in a safe place while they are out of the
111. L universal exit language 264 universal exit language UEL 264 usage page printing 281 V vacuuming 72 variation color 248 ventilation 23 voltage operating 22 power consumption 24 W warranty fuser 49 print cartridge 49 statement 48 transfer unit 49 waste toner container 108 transfer plate 108 Web Jetadmin software 68 websites HP 19 HP Web Jetadmin software 68 Material Data Safety Sheet MSDS 39 printer specifications 24 product and support information 46 service part information 46 weight media 29 printer 23 25 width printer 25 wrinkled paper 244 Index 361 362 Index C9660 90901 nvent copyright 2002 Hewlett Packard Company www hp com C9660 9090
112. M position This warning appears after the printer has detected an overhead transparency in the paper path when the tray is configured for another type resulting in a 41 5 Unexpected Type in Tray XX error The user did not reconfigure the tray after the error message appeared so the printer determines that the type of media is not what the tray is configured to hold A job cannot be stored because of a memory disk or configuration problem The printer is offering a selection of alternate media to use for the print job Description Action To change media type press Use A and yj to highlight the type then press to select To change the media size to Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal set the tray switch to the STANDARD position and adjust the media guides to the correct positions To change the media size to other sizes leave the tray switch in the CUSTOM position adjust the media guides against the media and close the tray Select the paper handling menu from the control panel Configure the size for the tray To change media type press amp Use AA and vy to highlight the type then press to select Install additional memory in the printer or install a disk drive into the printer If a disk drive is installed delete previously stored print jobs Highlight the media with A and W Press to select a choice Not all messages are described in the tables those messages th
113. Ms You can install more memory for the printer and you can also install a font DIMM to allow the printer to print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet CAUTION Static electricity can damage DIMMs When handling DIMMs either wear an antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the printer 1 Turn the printer off and disconnect all power and interface cables Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer 2 Remove the eight screws holding the board in place and set them aside 3 Slide out the formatter board and set it on a clean flat grounded surface 4 Release the locks on each side of the DIMM slot 5 Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package Locate the alignment notches on the bottom edge of the DIMM C9660 90901 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 85 6 Holding the DIMM by the edges align the notches on the DIMM with the bars in the DIMM slot Note If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM or closing the latches make sure the notches on the bottom of the DIMM are aligned with the bars in the slot If the DIMM still does not go in make sure you are using the correct type of DIMM 7 Firmly press the DIMM straight into the slot Close the locks on each side of the DIMM until they snap into place 8 Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot and slide the board back into the
114. N CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU 48 Warranty statement C9660 90901 Limited warranty for print cartridge life This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship during its useful life end of life is indicated by a printer control panel low life message This warranty does not cover products that have been modified refurbished remanufactured misused or tampered with in any way This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may have other rights which vary from state to state province to province and country region to country region THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED THE HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL INDIRECT PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS FROM ANY BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE In the event that your product proves to be defective please return to place of purchase with a written descrip
115. NW a E 5 s e 5 5 2 2 oubis TOYINOD YOLOW NISN a e 2 n ee 3 agg ea Lcx 6 w gt C 922 3 454438 puis 2 C SS OLLO313Q YIdVd LIINI Y3SN S E T OF AG pubis re SS AJ Ss Se 5 O I Ko LNOdva ou6 gt gf PS I ud s 9 5 Bin E NOILO3I3Q AYIANAG N3S0d 9 9 Le Xp ol gt of ID of 9 o 9 ae Ri EE SD 85 fe 5 NG 5 NG 5 s 0 2 n3 28 Is 5 18 Is 5 8 IE a TINdd jpubis NOILDIL3G ne Is 8 qs 8 fy 8 o e TINA 3i3dvd AWAL AYIANIG si SAI 82W 2 5 5 a Q a a 5 lt 6 5 Im Q E 7 dy IK IdOL jpu amp is NOWDILIA 3943 a AD fg a jo jou amp is JOYINOD YOLOW dNYDI x gt o O JOUBIS TOHINOD YOLOW dNAD W O jouBis TOYINOD YOLOW dfbiOld A F oubis TOYINOD YOLOW dNYDId D joubis JOYINOD YOLOW dNYDId 2 1815 JouBIS SAIN GIONITOS dNYIId ILLISSYI bb NO SISD oubis NOILDAL3G 33dvd ILLISSVO s sjoubis NOII2313Q AZIS 33d vd 3113SSVO Pickup feed system Figure 5 32 C9660 90901 126 Pickup feed system The pickup feed system has the following physical components PS1 cassette paper sensor PS2 multi purpose tray paper sensor PS3 paper leading edge sensor top of page PS4 OHT sensor PS11 fuser inlet paper sensor PS12 fuser delivery sensor PS13 output bin full sensor SW1 cassette paper size detection switch SW2 cassette paper size detection switch SW3 cassette paper size detection switch M1 cyan drum motor M2 yellow drum motor M3
116. Now on page 294 C9660 90901 Jams in the top cover Table 7 10 Causes for jams in the top cover Fuser paper sensor or sensor lever is defective Make sure the fuser paper sensor lever moves smoothly and is set in place Replace the lever if it is damaged Replace the sensor if it is defective Fuser sleeve or pressure roller does not rotate If the fuser drive gears are worn or damaged smoothly replace the fuser Fuser inlet guide is dirty or has built up toner Clean the fuser inlet guide Fuser sleeve or pressure roller is dirty worn or Clean the fuser sleeve or pressure roller If it is damaged damaged replace the fuser Fuser delivery sensor or sensor lever is defective Make sure the fuser delivery sensor lever moves smoothly and is set in place Replace the lever if it is damaged Replace the sensor if it is defective Fuser delivery roller is worn Replace the fuser Fuser delivery roller drive gears are worn or Replace the fuser damaged Face down delivery roller is defective Replace the fuser DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Jams in the duplex path Table 7 11 Causes for jams in the duplex path cuss SiS otto OYO Oblique rollers are worn or damaged Replace the oblique rollers Oblique roller drive gears are worn or damaged Replace the ETB unit Calibrate the printer af
117. O gw NG ON E EA m Bo ON Ga z TE W 9 55 Q rp ng p E DC controller PCB Ly Toner level detection Developing cylinder disengaging control Whenever the developing cylinder is in contact with the photosensitive drum toner is passed onto the drum At certain times such as during ETB cleaning or during monochrome printing toner should not pass onto the drum and the developing cylinder should not be in contact with the drum The bottom half of the print cartridge can pivot up and down causing the developing cylinder to either come in contact with or move away from the photosensitive drum A small block inside the printer causes each cartridge to pivot When the block is pushed up the rear of the cartridge is pushed up and the front of the cartridge swings down The developing cylinder disengages from the drum Figure 5 17 illustrates this process Axis Photosensitive drum Cartridge Developing cylinder Developing disengaging block Developing cylinder engaged Developing cylinder disengaged Developing cylinder disengaging The developing cylinders are disengaged only during monochrome printing or during ETB cleaning During monochrome printing the developing cylinder in all cartridges except black is disengaged During ETB cleaning the developing cylinders in all cartridges are disengaged Chapter 5 Theory of operation 111 Electrostatic transfer transport belt ETB unit The ETB unit feeds the paper t
118. PJL JOB This command informs the printer of the start of a PUL job and synchronizes the job status information The printer counts print jobs including nested jobs incrementing the job counter for the PJL JOB command and decrementing it for PJL EOu The printer accepts the NAME parameter and returns the name string in the unsolicited JOB start status message if unsolicited job status is enabled The printer transmits the unsolicited JOB status message to every I O channel that has enabled this function This message s format is PJL USTATUS JOB lt CR gt lt LF gt START lt CR gt lt LF gt NAME lt job name gt lt CR gt lt LF gt FF The printer resets the nested job counter whenever it switches the source to a different I O channel This prevents a corrupt job on one channel from disrupting the activities on another channel PJL EOJ This command identifies the end of a print job and is a hint for the I O switching algorithm The printer counts nested jobs and recognizes job boundaries when the counter decrements to zero The printer ignores isolated EOJ commands Each EOJ must be preceded by a JOB command C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 265 PJL ECHO This printer supports the ECHO command which transmits its parameters over the I O channel to the host that issued the command PJL USTATUS JOB ON OFF This command enables or disables the JOB status for the I O channel that delivers the command PJL USTATU
119. PMA sehen 281 Event CP 282 DIAGMOSIES AA AA AS 283 Diagnostics TNOWChAN s 0240 4 MAGA ME XLI OW MAA 3 E ee Gee be 283 Engine diagnostics oot dans sur deu E vri RP eed Sora da does d 285 Individual diagnostic tests 2 0 cee eee 287 TeS PAJOS s aiaia Hen Hn Sp ara a ee ee Gi S7 ee es 292 Engine lest page ios ie m ER dd ER EEG e 292 Formatter test page 0 ccc ees 292 Engine resetS unnan ccc eee ete eee 293 Sali METTRE 293 NVRAM initialization llle 293 Hard disk initialization 5224 a2 Rata FA 9er Pa mE RE ERE 294 Calibration bypass 1 0 eee ene 294 Callbicie NOW PP PP POE 294 Service MENU aaa 295 Accessing the Service menu ii 295 Diagrams or iw kek LD bawa 0 onar he how AA 297 Man Dar MC 297 Switches na 298 OBHSDIS 6 245494 2029 2 20 4 E471 Rost PA gad eect a ess 6 299 sez qq 301 Molor Ang fans togauostengedercacee si verses veuaecansa 302 PCBS FT 303 DC controller PCB a uario dea Pena AAP 304 Connectors rusa y 39 BANG wa a ha qon door sd dod o n dan de 305 500 sheet paper feeder connectors 306 General circuit diagram llle 307 500 sheet paper feeder circuit diagram 308 C9660 90901 Introduction C9660 90901 This troubleshooting chapter assumes the reader has a basic understanding of the color laser printing process Explanations of each mechanical assembly
120. Press to enter the FEHLIS Press W to highlight ZHFORIPSEBRT ION Press O to select HFOEMAT ION Press W to highlight PEIHMT OOF TGUEAT ION oa fF c NYO 292 Test pages C9660 90901 Engine resets CAUTION C9660 90901 Cold reset A cold reset unlocks menus that have been locked and resets variables in the control panel However it does not clear the values in the Service menu such as the serial number and page counts To perform a cold reset 1 Turn the printer on 2 As the printer performs its power on sequence press and hold C until all three lights on the control panel are lit 3 When SELECT LAHGUGGE appears on the display press A until 2 0 RESET appears on the display 4 Press The printer will perform a cold reset and then continue its power on sequence NVRAM initialization Initializing NVRAM will reset the serial number the event log the page counts the calibration settings and the EIO card Use the Service menu to restore the serial number and page counts You will also need to reconfigure any computers that print to this printer to recognize the printer Initialize NVRAM only when absolutely necessary In most situations use a Cold reset to reset printer variables but still retain the needed values in the Service menu Before initializing NVRAM print a configuration page and a supplies status page to gather the following information e total page count and color page count e transfer kit
121. R CE aos 46 vel xang Men aad nts eo en on co Re ag aera eae UNG 46 World Wide Web 2 0 0 0c cc eee 46 HP Service Parts Information Compact Disc 46 HP Support Assistant Compact Disc 46 Customer care reseller sales and service support center 46 Ordering related documentation and software 47 Warranty statement ee ee eee 48 Hewlett Packard warranty statement 48 Limited warranty for print cartridge life 49 Transfer unit and fuser warranty 00 000 ce eee eee 49 HP maintenance agreements 000 cee eee ee ee 50 On site service agreements 0 0 00 ee eee 50 C9660 90901 Chapter 2 Service approach 43 Service approach Printer repair normally begins by using the printer s internal diagnostics and the three step process below Step 1 Isolate the problem to the major system for example the host computer the network or server or the printer system Step 2 Determine if the problem is located in the accessories or in the printer engine Step 3 Troubleshoot the problem using the procedures in Chapter 7 Once a faulty part is located the printer can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing field replaceable units FRUs Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly level Hewlett Packard does not support replacement of components on the printer circuit assembles 44
122. R gt CARTRIDGE alternates with XXXX PAGES LEFT ORDER FUSER KIT XXXX PAGES LEFT To continue press amp ORDER FUSER KIT XXXX PAGES LEFT To enter menus press ORDER SUPPLIES For menus press Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message Desorpton Tan The identified print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in the SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to STOP Override by pressing c The identified print cartridge is near end of life The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages indicated The fuser is near end of life and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in the SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to STOP The fuser is near end of life The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages indicated More than one supply item is low Order the identified print cartridge Press 0 to continue Press for detailed information Press A and y to step through instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Order the identified print cartridge Estimated pages remaining is based upon historical page coverage of this printer Printing will continue until REPLACE lt COLOR gt CARTRIDGE is shown Press for detailed information Press A and y to step through instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Order the
123. RECO edem addo eoe dr dr aede idu dodo 324 intemal components 5 0f 5 mamam 4 rend oo capra ica ose acier aad og eek ar eee hese ee es 326 Paper pickup drive assembly cc 328 Drum drive assembiy A aged ea AGA BAWAL KN eee ao he ene NG at 2 ip ah 329 Disengaging drive assembly na 330 Fuser drive assembly uencd www as eat Kea Redan eee Oat EN Oks Shee wes eee en 331 Cassette 1 of 2 AA 332 Case ZOE Aoa aan de Gane Ka ea an a Bana ences Anew aes ete aa AA 333 Paper pickup assembly amar os BAR BIR wht PRR HAS eee a CRA ee aS bas a 334 BIB ASCOM menata eee oot on eed hee ee Bebe eee Ghee eee Bene eee ee Es 335 Fuser assembly 1 of 2 waa ied aren de dee rr ACD wane ee weed PEK PARA a ee Da 336 Fuser assembly 2 of 2 220 AA AG KB Ak one NAG APR PAGG GG AL a 337 500 sheet paper feeder assembly location diagram ees 338 500 sheet paper feeder internal components Wa 339 500 sheet paper feeder drive assembly 0 ccc eee ees 340 500 sheet paper feeder cassette eee eet eens 341 C9660 90901 C9660 90901 List of tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 1 7 Table 1 8 Table 1 9 Table 1 10 Table 2 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 7 7 Table 7 8 Table 7
124. SOFF This command disables the unsolicited JOB status for the I O channel that delivered the command For this printer it duplicates the function of PJL USTATUS JOB OFF AND PJL USTATUS DEVICE OFF Note All commands not supported by this printer s PJL command set are returned with the message P JL KKN OR IPS SORE 266 Interface troubleshooting C9660 90901 Control panel troubleshooting When you press to enter the menus the high level menus are displayed in the following order SETRIEUE JOB this menu displays only if a hard disk is installed A menu map shows how individual items are configured within each of these menus Figure 7 6 shows a sample of one page of the menu map The menu map prints on six pages The last page gives instructions on how to use the control panel buttons Printing a menu map Press to enter the MEHUS Press V to highlight ZHPFORBHEBRTTOH Press CO to select iHF OREBMET ION Press Y to highlight FRIHT MENU MAF a A c N Press to select FRINT MENU MAR Figure 7 6 HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printer menu map C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 267 Information menu Use the Information menu to access and print specific printer information Table 7 38 Information menu Menu item Description 0 PRINT MENU MAP Prints the control panel menu map which shows the layout and current settings of the control panel menu items PRINT CONFIGURATION Prints the printer configuration page
125. T FUNCTIONAL For help press FLASH DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready For menus press A tray has been loaded with paper 1 that is a standard size and the switch 2 in the tray is set to custom A device failure has occurred on the specified drive The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system but was unsuccessful because the file system is full The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it The EIO disk in slot X is not working correctly Press for detailed information Press a and Y to step through instructions Printing may continue for jobs that do not require access to the disk drive To clear the message turn the printer off and then back on If the message persists remove and re install the EIO disk drive If the message persists replace the EIO disk drive Printing may continue Turn the printer off and then back on If the message reappears there may be a problem with the software application Use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the EIO disk drive and try again To remove this message from the display turn the printer off and then back on To enable writing to the disk turn off write protection using HP Web Jet
126. WC4 5169 000CN Toner sensor PCB assembly RG5 6393 000CN Spring tension RS6 2511 000CN Arm pressure RB2 8151 000CN Connector drawer WS3 5746 000CN Cartridge inlet assembly RG5 6450 000CN 2 3 4 5 6 YA 8 9 Guide cartridge right lower RB2 8146 000CN O Guide cartridge right upper RB2 8147 000CN Cable left plate RG5 6413 000CN NO DC controller PCB assembly RG5 6391 000CN O Fan cartridge RH7 1490 000CN D Fan formatter RH7 1491 000CN C1 ETB latch assembly RG5 6456 000CN Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 323 CEN V VAN Naa SQ KEI G EL SSS WIT NPA 555 E EN gt IFS i UN NO KY AA a YET EL Namn OD 7 o0 S ng ie M aT o po hee MET ASI AN CT A T P o PA ig 2 2 on Ie N KAKAK DE Lf AN 1 V IN PINA N NM SX SX US S5 EN FS O 9 LL Ie OF re 7 J ASJ AS B L 2 ah N NA NON A Internal components 4 of 5 Figure 8 7 C9660 90901 324 Illustrations and parts lists C9660 90901 Table 8 8 Internal components 4 of 5 Description Fuser Quantity Part number C9660 69002 110 volt C9660 69003 220 volt Static eliminator RF5 3773 000CN Color registration detection assembly RG5 6454 000CN Paper pickup assembly RG5 6468
127. a Safety Sheet MSDS 39 media feed speed 131 maximum size 20 non supported 31 part numbers 311 selecting 28 sizes 29 special 31 storing 33 type 20 weight 20 weights 29 memory 19 access location 27 adding 84 clearable warnings 102 DIMMs 102 enabling 87 part numbers 312 random access 102 read only 102 upgrading 102 memory controller PCB locating 303 removing and replacing 173 memory tag function 109 locating 109 memory tag antenna PCB locating 303 removing and replacing 170 menu map printing 267 menus locking 69 messages alphabetical list 212 critical error 211 error 211 numerical list 223 Printer Status and Alerts 278 Index status 211 warning 211 model numbers 21 models 18 monitors affect on color 248 motors function 94 locating 94 302 MS DOS commands 264 MSDS Material Data Safety Sheet 39 multifeeds 244 multipart forms avoiding 31 multi purpose tray jams 240 paper pickup rollers removing and replacing 160 paper sensor locating 127 pickup roller locating 297 pickup solenoid locating 127 pickup solenoid removing and replacing 161 removing and replacing 151 N networks AppleTalk 65 configuring parameters 68 configuring with embedded Web server 277 I O interfaces 64 LocalTalk 65 Novell NetWare 64 68 security 69 troubleshooting 263 UNIX Linux 65 Windows 65 noise printer 25 Novell NetWare configuring 68 numbers model 21 serial 21 NVRAM initialization 293 overview 102 O OHT defe
128. acing the 500 sheet paper feeder PCB 202 Troubleshooting flowchart owe agahan a aNG ADAN ue unt cece dens eek At see E ES 208 Jam locations 0 0 ee WWW Wa 234 Repetitive defects ruler 1 Of 2 ii 261 Repetitive defects ruler 2 of 2 ii 262 HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printer configuration page n naasa aeaaea 263 HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printer menu map ees 267 Printer configuration Page Hamak dart 3 9 3 973 1 29 dt Ke ba ng PA aid pose new eda ae GAS 279 Supplies status page ee eee eee rrr 280 Usage Dade seer gay YG ee se oes Lego ceed ees eee ee eee es NG eee te weeds 281 mua 282 IJISCIHOSICS NOWCNAM as sos dca ci cee Sra du ade sce REL ERES ha he oe Peg M kem dd Neg a OR 283 rormate PLE Leto ba mtus dahon EZWES dd Os dae bd demde bbs de ped d 284 Door switch and ETB COMNCCIOl 44 sss aaro io oet wea Ge riet wan ee eee lr ttr ct es 286 Tray 2 paper size switch arrangement Wa 288 TEST Dade SNUG 7 33 4 3 332 9 eng bade FA wood ere oper edie Ges PAPEL Ue QE 292 Location or main pans 1252 4 AG eoo 0 cx eedem eei dd d n ooa Pod rece eta didit fh A 297 LOCAICHVOl SWINGS MEME PETOREETO E T TO TT seh ee NA oe eee eal KA GA NA 298 Bhog IA AA a aan 298 LOCAUONONSENSONS wit mam KA wars BAG MAG NAAN a od AG a S DE tes eke Ai 299 Sensors on the paper pickup unit sensors are on the back
129. acing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 172 Internal components left side C9660 90901 Memory controller PCB To remove the memory controller PCB 1 Remove the DC controller PCB See page 172 Remove the three screws shown in callout 1 2 3 Disconnect the five connectors shown in callout 2 4 Remove the memory controller PCB p 2 a 2 s gt cane put Ch incor 1 he Ya ne p 3 a OP u S 4 ER UM E A LI l udo 2 ue eee 1 E Figure 6 41 Removing and replacing the memory controller PCB T1 LAE E C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 173 Cassette paper size detection switch To remove the cassette paper size detection switch Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the left cover See page 148 Remove the DC controller shield See page 155 Disconnect the connector shown in callout 1 Oo OG FP CQ N a Squeeze the two tabs shown in callout 2 and remove the cassette paper size detection switch Figure 6 42 Removing and replacing the cassette paper size detection switch 174 Internal components left side C9660 90901 Internal components rear Formatter To remove the formatter 1 Remove the eight screws shown in callout 1 2 Grasp the black disk drive lock shown in callout 2 and pull the formatter out of the printer EE kiti Ti pj Fi r
130. acking the printer 0 0 III 99 Asta NO meMP 56 Installing the media tray Wan 56 Connecting Power apnea mg MAT ous LA ena Oo ab Nenen ta eno ana 57 Installing the print cartridges nananana aaa ees 57 Installing a new overlay optional 0 0 eee ees 59 Testing the printer operation Wa 59 Using POWER NG s uou soo momok Poo toe O NI AMA ANG DADANG ING 1 6 60 Connecting to a computer Wa 61 Parallel CONMCCHONS i s a acaso cowo ee beta amel a GA eed e NAKAGAWA 61 Network connections Wan 62 Enhanced LO EIO configuration 260400 20 KA ANAN EDNA MEI Nenen ea Gene TES 64 HP Jetdirect print servers eee nes 64 Available enhanced I O interfaces llli eee 64 NetWare networks 0 a 64 Windows and Windows NT networks 00 0c eee eee eee 65 AppleTalk networks Wan 65 Local Tale configuration 3c uc eta di 3 26d ed ee D e i DER RR KA 65 LocalTalk network configuration llle 65 UNIX Linux networkS serbe qua oke Ue SETS EP STIS IHSS GA 65 ginis P m 66 Available drivers 025 ombes GAT KAGANAPAN PERO Horne PAG APA ANAKAN 66 Additional drivers am od shee DAD KABA ek He ROSE oH DUNG Rd EUR 67 Network configuration 9 4 2 rac arx ow oye KLANG deed and NAKA BIG LAGING OHS ax 68 Configuring the printer for th
131. admin To remove this message from the display turn the printer off and then back on Remove the EIO disk from the slot indicated and replace with a new ElO disk drive A device failure has occurred on the specified drive Printing may continue for jobs that do not require the Flash DIMM To remove this message from the display turn the printer off and then back on If the message persists remove and re install the Flash DIMM If the message persists replace the Flash DIMM Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 213 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message FLASH FILE OPERATION FAILED alternates with Ready For menus press amp FLASH FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with Ready For menus press FLASH IS WRITE PROTECTED alternates with Ready For menus press amp INCORRECT lt COLOR gt CARTRIDGE alternates with For status press Incorrect PIN INCORRECT SUPPLIES For status press amp INSERT OR CLOSE TRAY XX For help press 214 Printer error troubleshooting command that attempted to perform an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system but was unsuccessful because the file system is full The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to It An incorrect cartridge is installed ina slot and the cover
132. after the printer has gone through the startup sequence If an error message appears a DIMM may have been incorrectly installed Print a configuration page Check the Installed Personalities and Options section on the configuration page and compare it with the configuration page printed before the DIMM installation If the amount of recognized memory has not increased e he DIMM may not be installed correctly Repeat the installation procedure e The DIMM may be defective Try a new DIMM Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 87 Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card You can install an HP Jetdirect print server card in the base model printer which comes with an open EIO slot 1 Turn the printer off and disconnect all power and interface cables 2 Locate an empty EIO slot Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the EIO slot onto the printer and then remove the cover You will not need these screws and cover again 3 Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card Connect the network cable Reconnect the power cable and turn the printer on Print a configuration page In addition to a printer configuration page an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information should also print If it does not print uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that
133. age in which to display the embedded Web server information 276 Tools for troubleshooting C9660 90901 Networking tab This tab allows the network administrator to control network related settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP based network This tab will not appear if the printer is directly connected to a computer or if the printer is connected to a network using anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server card Other links This section contains links that connect you to the Internet You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links If you use a dial up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server you must connect before you can visit these websites Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it e HP Instant Support connects you to the HP website to help you find solutions This service analyzes your printer error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information specific to your printer e Order Supplies connects to the HP website and order genuine HP supplies such as print cartridges and paper e Product Support connects to the support site for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer where you can search for help regarding general topics C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 277 Printer Status and Alerts software Printer Status and Alerts is supported only for Windows 95 and later versions The P
134. al and replacement 177 Formatter case To remove the formatter case Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the left cover See page 148 Remove the DC controller shield See page 155 Remove the right cover See page 150 At the rear of the printer remove the eight screws shown in callout 1 O N O C FP N On the DC controller PCB release the brown tab covering the formatter ribbon cable and disconnect the cable callout 2 CAUTION When removing the formatter ribbon cable be careful not to tear it Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection Do not pull on the ribbon cable without releasing this tab 9 Disconnect the connector shown in callout 3 and remove the formatter case 178 Internal components rear C9660 90901 E 1 J 4 HOJE Jha ri 1 Figure 6 47 Removing and replacing the formatter case 1 of 2 i E p LF H Lee TAR N14 4 Figure 6 48 Removing and replacing the formatter case 2 of 2 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 179 CAUTION Figure 6 49 CAUTION Laser scanner units To remove the laser scanner cover plate Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the left cover See page 148 Remove the DC controller shield See page 155 Remove the right cover See page 150
135. an overlay C9660 40015 Polish overlay C9660 40016 Russian overlay C9660 40017 Turkish overlay C9660 40018 Arabic overlay C9660 40019 Greek overlay C9660 40020 Hebrew overlay C9660 40021 Japanese overlay C9660 40022 Korean overlay C9660 40023 Thai overlay C9660 40024 Simplified Chinese overlay C9660 40025 Traditional Chinese overlay Reference materials 5963 7863 HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide 5021 0330 PCL PJL Technical Reference Package Supplies C9720A 6825A001CN Black print cartridge 6825A002CN Black print cartridge Europe 312 Ordering parts C9660 90901 Note C9660 90901 Table 8 1 Supplies and accessories continued Product number C9721A Part number 6824A001CN Description Cyan print cartridge 6824A002CN Cyan print cartridge Europe C9722A 6822A001CN Yellow print cartridge 6822A002CN Yellow print cartridge Europe C9723A 6823A001CN Magenta print cartridge 6823A002CN Magenta print cartridge Europe C9724A C9660 69004 exchange C9660 67904 new Image transfer kit C9725A C9660 67902 new Image fuser kit 110 volt C9726A C9660 69003 exchange C9660 67903 new C9660 69002 exchange Image fuser kit 220 volt The only difference between the print cartridg
136. and 1x to step through the instructions INSTALL TRANSFER The transfer unit is either not installed Insert the transfer unit or make UNIT or not correctly installed in the printer sure the installed transfer unit is For help press fully seated Press for detailed information Press A and vy to step through the instructions If the error persists verify that the ETB connectors J4017 on the ETB and J1014 on the DC controller PCB are good Replace connectors as necessary Replace the ETB Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 215 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message Deser on Tan LOAD TRAY XX lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE To use another tray press D LOAD TRAY XX TYPE SIZE For help press MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE For help press alternates with MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE To continue press If no paper in tray MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE For help press alternates with MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE To use another tray press D NON HP CARTRIDGE DETECTED NON HP CARTRIDGE IN USE alternates with Ready For menus press 216 Printer error troubleshooting Tray XX is either empty or configured 1 2 for a type and size other than
137. any colors present in incandescent light and the color range of natural light is broader than any artificial light When comparing color choose a standard light source for reference and understand that the perceived color will change as the light changes e Long term color variations occur as paper ages Use high quality paper and protect the paper from sunlight to help minimize discoloration e Environmental changes can cause color variation The development process places a high potential across an air gap to attract toner to the imaging drum Changes in relative humidity vary the point at which the toner travels to the imaging drum e All consumable components have a finite life span As these components reach the end of their useful life their ability to produce consistent print quality diminishes e Paper roughness can cause colors to look different Use standard paper Color selection process The user selects the color in the application but the operating system might convert or modify some characteristics of the color before sending the information to the printer driver The printer driver might also modify color characteristics depending upon the selected output mode Any color characteristics not addressed by the printer driver or applications are set to the printer default The default color might not match the color the user selected 248 Image formation troubleshooting C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Matching colors PANTONEE
138. aper The paper feeder pickup solenoid SL4001 turns on The pickup roller makes one rotation and picks up paper in the paper feeder 4 Separation tabs eliminate any multiple fed sheets and a single piece of paper enters the feed path i LA o6 Q O MAIN MOTOR CONTROL signals CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signals CASSETTE PAPER DIRECTION signal CSTS PAPER PICKUP SOLENOID signal CSTSL SL4001 Wi ee SWA001 O O 9 s400ic E SWA002 eee Paper feeder SW4003 _ _ Cassette pickup roller Cassette feed roller Figure 5 39 500 sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation C9660 90901 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 135 136 500 sheet paper feeder C9660 90901 Removal and replacement Chapter contents Inti oto Koi oli AP TE 139 Removal and replacement strategy 139 Repair noticeS na 139 Caution regarding electrostatic discharge ESD 139 Required toolS aus KN AA de OHS Kab man aa d 140 Types of screws 0 cette 141 DUDONCS mama IRA ROS bee ehed acerca PRO nes NES E d 142 Print cartridges and ETB 0 0 cee eee 143 Covers and external components 144 Rear COVEN MERCEDES 144 TOO COVER Pr 145 Rear top cover AA AA 146 PCM COVE PT 148 RIOM COVEI cate EX sd dea aed eh Grea ek Pa beban he Sik 150 Multi purpose
139. as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation Using controls making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in this guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation Material Safety Data Sheet Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS can be obtained by contacting the HP LaserJet Supplies website at http www hp com go msds Toner safety Hewlett Packard encourages responsible disposal of HP LaserJet printer supply items through its Environmental Collection Program For details on this program see the recycling instruction guide enclosed with each supply item In case of toner spills skin and clothing are best cleaned by removing as much toner as possible with a dry tissue then washing with cold water Hot water causes toner to permanently set into clothing Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements Conforme a la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilit lectromagn tiques CEM EMI statement Korea AFER Stu Gu 0 3215 uleijze9z AIN ABE NAE SAAS OAS FE GE M APES e ASUL EMI statement for Korea Chapter 1 Printer d
140. at are not listed are self explanatory 222 Printer error troubleshooting C9660 90901 Note C9660 90901 Numerical printer messages Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCB the ETB the formatter the drum drive motors the drum drive gears or a laser scanner unit After replacing one of these items you must access the Print Quality menu and select ALIERATE NOW to ensure proper print quality after the repair See Calibrate Now on page 294 for instructions on calibrating the printer When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life access the Resets menu and reset the counter to zero See page 81 and page 83 for instructions Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages Message Deseripion laton 10 XX YY SUPPLIES The printer cannot read or write to at ERROR least one print cartridge memory tag For help press or at least one memory tag is missing 2 NOTE The printer cannot Description always determine whether memory error on supply item the error lies with the memory tag missing cartridge or with the printer reader writer Description black print cartridge cyan print cartridge magenta print cartridge yellow print cartridge 13 XX YY DUPLEX A duplex job was interrupted by JOB INTERRUPTED interference as media passed through For help press the output bin during duplexing alternates with Turn the printer off and then back on Swap the cart
141. ating 127 inlet paper sensor removing and replacing 194 locating 26 motor component test 290 motor locating 127 operation 132 part numbers 336 power supply 96 power supply PCB locating 303 power supply PCB removing and replacing 190 replacing 82 replacing before end of life 83 sleeve function 96 sleeve locating 297 fuser drive unit part numbers 331 fuser kit count resetting 83 295 life span 73 fusing process 118 temperature specifications 32 G general circuit diagram 307 glossy film supported sizes 29 30 glossy paper printing 32 supported sizes 29 30 grayscale printing 250 H hard disk adding 101 initialization 294 heavy paper printing 32 height printer 25 high voltage contact blocks removing and replacing 188 high voltage power supply circuit 98 function 98 locating 303 removing and replacing 185 HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printer models 18 HP Distribution Center 47 HP ImageREt 2400 249 HP Jetdirect print server card adding 88 configuring 277 function 64 HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide 28 HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh 68 HP Support Assistant 46 HP Toner Cleaning Cloth 72 HP Web Jetadmin software 68 humidity site requirements 23 24 storing supplies 25 I O expanded 101 flash 101 hard disk 101 parallel interface 101 printer management language 103 processor 101 image density calibration DMAX 123 halftone calibration DHALF 123 stabilization control 123 image formation o
142. ation COMPONENT TEST Activates individual parts independently to isolate noise leaking and other hardware issues PRINT STOP TEST Isolates print quality faults more accurately by stopping the printer in mid print cycle Stopping the printer in mid cycle allows you to see where the image begins to degrade C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 273 Service menu The Service menu is PIN protected for added security Only authorized service people have access to the service menu When you select SESI IE from the list of menus you are prompted to enter your 8 digit PIN number The PIN for this printer is 04460002 A c N Press 4 or W until the first digit of the PIN is displayed Press to save the digit The display will replace the digit with an asterisk Hepeat steps 1 and 2 until all eight digits are entered Press amp at any time to move to the previous digit Use the Service menu to reset counts clear the event log enter the serial number enter the date the printer was first used and reset the default paper size Table 7 46 Service menu Menu item CLEAR EVENT LOG Values Description Allows you to clear the printer s internal event log TOTAL PAGE COUNT Range 0 9999999 Allows you to reset the page count after replacing the formatter The page count should reflect the number of pages printed on the print engine rather than the formatter TRANSFER KIT COUNT Range 0 9999999 120
143. atter fan is the horizontal rear most fan Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the left cover See page 148 Remove the DC controller shield See page 155 Remove the cartridge fan and holder See page 197 Disconnect the connector J1003 on the DC controller See page 304 Remove the two screws shown in callout 1 O ON O C FP c N Remove the fan holder and the fan from the printer 10 Remove the fan from the fan holder Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the formatter fan be sure that the arrow marked on the fan holder and the arrow marked on the fan are pointing in the same direction j i E LT Figure 6 70 Removing and replacing the formatter fan 198 Internal components top C9660 90901 Optional 500 sheet paper feeder Paper feeder top cover plate To remove the 500 sheet paper feeder top cover plate 1 Remove the two screws shown in callout 1 and remove the front cover from the 500 sheet paper feeder 2 Remove the six screws shown in callout 2 and remove the top plate Note The internal components of the 500 sheet paper feeder are mounted on the underside of the top plate Figure 6 71 Removing and replacing the 500 sheet paper feeder top plate C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 199 Paper feeder drive unit To remove the 500 sheet paper feeder drive unit 1 Remove the top plate from the 50
144. bers 332 334 removing and replacing 156 paper size detection 128 130 detection switch removing and replacing 174 supported 29 parallel interface 101 port locating 27 parameters network 68 part numbers accessories 311 alphabetical list 342 cables 311 cassette 332 control panel overlays 312 covers 317 developing disengaging assembly 330 drum drive unit 329 ETB 335 fuser 336 fuser drive unit 331 internal components 319 326 media 311 memory 312 numerical list 348 paper feeder 339 paper feeder cassette 341 paper feeder drive unit 340 paper pickup drive unit 328 paper pickup unit 334 PCBs 316 reference material 312 supplies 312 parts compact disc information 46 ordering 45 311 passwords network 276 setting 69 PCBs locating 303 part numbers 316 perforations 31 phone numbers Commercial Service and Support Organizations 45 HP Distribution Center 47 photosensitive drum locating 108 pickup feed system overview 125 pickup feed unit overview 128 PIN 295 PJL Printer Job Language commands 264 overview 102 Technical Reference Manual 70 placement requirements 23 postcards printing 32 power connection locating 27 consumption 24 rating information 22 power supply fuser 96 high voltage 98 low voltage 99 power switch locating 26 27 PowerSave disabling 60 overview 101 power consumption 24 preprinted forms loading 33 pressure roller locating 297 pressure atmospheric 25 primary charging roller locating 108
145. black or solid colored image Poor contact in the drum ground primary charging bias and developing bias contacts of the high voltage PCB and the print cartridge Solution Clean the contacts on the cartridge for the affected color If they are still dirty after cleaning or if they are damaged replace the cartridge Primary charging roller is defective Replace the print cartridge for the affected color High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Dots in vertical lines Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Table 7 23 Causes for vertical lines of white dots Transfer charging roller is worn or damaged Solution Replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now on page 294 High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 255 Dirt on back of paper Table 7 24 Causes for dirt on the back of the paper Rollers are dirty See Table 7 36 on page 260 for information on identifying the roller s that might be dirty Clean the indicated roller If the roller is still dirty after cleaning replace the appropriate roll
146. can also receive messages indicating the print cartridge is low You can set alert options for a single printer that supports Printer Status and Alerts or you can set alert options for all printers that support Printer Status and Alerts For networked printers these alerts only appear for your jobs Note that even if you are setting alert options for all printers not all options you select will apply to all printers For example when selecting the option to notify you when the print cartridges are low directly connected printers that support Printer Status and Alerts will generate a message when the print cartridges are low However none of the networked printers will generate this message unless it affects a user specific job To choose which status messages appear 1 Open Printer Status and Alerts in one of these ways Double click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon which is near the clock in the Tray Manager e On the Start menu point to Programs point to Printer Status and Alerts and click Printer Status and Alerts Click the Options icon in the left pane In the For field select the printer driver for this printer or select All Printers Clear the options for the messages you do not want to appear and select the options for the messages you do want to appear 5 Under Status check rate select how frequently you want the software to update the printer status information that the software uses to generate the messages
147. connect the printer to a Macintosh computer on a LocalTalk network use the HP LocalTalk Cable Kit You will need a kit for each printer and an additional kit for each Macintosh computer on the network UNIX Linux networks Use the HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX utility to set up the printer on HP UX or Sun Solaris networks For setup and management on UNIX or Linux networks use HP Web Jetadmin To obtain HP software for UNIX Linux networks visit HP Customer Care online at http www hp com support net printing For other installation options supported by the HP Jetdirect print server see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrators Guide included with printers equipped with the HP Jetdirect print server Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 65 Printer drivers The optimal way to control the printer is through settings in a software application or through the printer driver Changing print settings via a software application affects only that particular print job Most software applications allow you to choose print settings from menus within the application Software application settings and printer driver settings override the settings on the printer control panel For best print quality always select the paper or media type in the printer driver Different media types use different printer settings For example selecting transparencies in the driver causes the printer to use a different color table one designed for maxim
148. cted more than 47 million used LaserJet printer cartridges that otherwise might have been discarded in the world s landfills The HP LaserJet printer cartridges and supplies are collected and bulk shipped to our resource and recovery partners who disassemble the cartridges After a thorough quality inspection selected parts are reclaimed for use in new cartridges Remaining materials are separated and converted into raw materials for use by other industries to make a variety of useful products e U S returns For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies HP encourages the use of bulk returns Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the single pre paid and pre addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package For more information in the U S call 1 800 340 2445 or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies website at http www hp com go recycle e Non U S recycling returns Non U S customers should call the local HP Sales and Service Office or visit the http www hp com go recycle website for further information regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Recycled paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the Print Media Guide This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to DIN 19309 Material restrictions This product does not contain batteries This product does not contain added merc
149. cts 247 detection 129 sensor locating 127 on off switch locating 26 27 operation basic 90 engine control system 92 image formation system 106 laser scanner system 104 major systems 90 paper feeder 134 pickup feed system 125 timing sequence 91 ordering documentation 47 drivers 47 parts 45 software 47 supplies 45 output bin full sensor locating 127 removing and replacing 196 output bin locating 26 27 overhead transparency defects 247 C9660 90901 C9660 90901 detection 129 sensor locating 127 P pages maximum per month 25 paper non supported 31 part numbers 311 preprinted 33 recycled 34 selecting 28 supported sizes 29 paper feeder additional 134 circuit diagram 308 drive unit part numbers 340 drive unit removing and replacing 200 jams 241 paper path 135 part numbers 338 339 PCB removing and replacing 202 pickup rollers removing and replacing 201 paper handling 20 paper jams avoiding 237 duplex path 243 paper path 242 persistent 238 recovery 236 top cover 243 Tray 1 240 Tray 2 240 Tray 3 241 troubleshooting 234 paper leading edge sensor locating 127 paper path 500 sheet paper feeder 135 jams 242 overview 125 paper path test 287 paper pickup drive unit locating 127 part numbers 328 removing and replacing 159 paper pickup rollers cassette 158 multi purpose tray 160 paper feeder 201 paper pickup sensor PCB locating 303 removing and replacing 157 paper pickup unit overview 128 part num
150. d fans Location of motors and fans Table 7 52 Motors and fans Function M1 cyan drum motor M2 yellow drum motor M3 magenta drum motor M4 black drum motor M5 paper pickup motor M6 ETB motor M7 developing disengaging motor M8 fuser motor FAN1 formatter fan FAN2 cartridge fan C9660 90901 PCBs Figure 7 25 PCB locations fuser power supply PCB high voltage power supply PCB toner level detection PCB paper pickup sensor PCB low voltage power supply PCB antenna PCBs memory controller PCB DC controller PCB formatter PCB 10 firmware DIMM PCB 11 I O daughter card PCB O ON O C FP WO N C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 303 Figure 7 26 304 Diagrams DC controller PCB J1012 J1030 J1033 J1027 J1034 J1026 u J1003 J1004 J1002 SW1001 C LED1001 J1015 J1023 Cam J1006 J1019 En 7 J1013 MA ea J1007 J1014 J1018 Location of DC controller PCB components C9660 90901 Connectors NG 5 J4034 x J204 Q J4012 ah LO INS as E t D 6 1 v l S Re 4027 Ns YY NG Sh Figure 7 27 Location of connectors C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 305 500 sheet paper feeder connectors Figure 7 28 500 sheet paper feeder connectors 306 Diagrams C9660 90901 it diagram IFCUI General c Josuag Jedeg 1esn oe EN 5338 axunoa sd ar NOS ANOS E axvs48 zLovr youmg uojjoajag azi
151. d the fuser area It might be hot To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge do not use ammonia based cleaners on or around the printer If toner gets on your clothes wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric Table 4 1 Cleaning the printer Component Cleaning Method Outside covers Use an HP Toner Cleaning Cloth part number 5090 3379 or a water dampened cloth Do not use solvents or ammonia based cleaners Inside general With a dry lint free cloth wipe any dust spilled toner and paper particles from the paper path area the registration roller and the print cartridge cavity ETB attaching roller Clean with lint free paper If dirt cannot be removed dampen the paper with alcohol Paper pickup rollers Clean with lint free paper If dirt cannot be removed dampen the paper with alcohol Color registration Clean with lint free paper If dirt cannot be removed detection unit dampen the paper with alcohol Cleaning spilled toner Defective print cartridges can develop leaks Also after a paper jam has occurred some toner might remain on the rollers and guides inside the printer The pages that print immediately after the jam can pick up this toner When cleaning the printer do not touch the ETB with the damp cloth or with your fingers Vacuum specifications Do not vacuum the printer or any spilled toner using a conventional vacuum T
152. disable and enable PowerSave and update the printer after new supplies are installed Table 7 44 Resets submenu ea item vatues Deserpton RESTORE FACTORY Allows you to clear the page buffer remove all SETTINGS perishable personality data reset the printing environment and return all default settings to factory defaults POWERSAVE ON Allows you to enable and disable PowerSave OFF RESET SUPPLIES NEW TRANSFER KIT Allows you to inform the printer that a new transfer kit NEW FUSER KIT or new fuser kit has been installed 272 Control panel troubleshooting C9660 90901 Diagnostics menu The Diagnostics menu allows you to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with the printer Table 7 45 Diagnostics menu Menuitem Description PRINT EVENT LOG Prints an event log that displays the last 50 entries in the printer s event log starting with the most recent SHOW EVENT LOG Displays the last 50 events on the control panel display starting with the most recent PQ TROUBLESHOOTING Prints a series of print quality assessment pages that help troubleshoot any print quality problems DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK Allows you to remove a print cartridge to help determine which cartridge is the source of the problem PAPER PATH TEST Used for testing the paper handling features of the printer such as the configuration of the trays SENSOR TEST Allows you to test the paper path sensors and switches for correct oper
153. e C9660 67903 new Image transfer kit C9660 69004 exchange C9660 67904 new ltalian overlay C9660 40005 Japanese overlay C9660 40021 Korean overlay C9660 40022 Laser scanner assembly RG5 6380 000CN Figure 8 7 12 LED PCB assembly RG5 6394 000CN Figure 8 10 4 Left cover RB2 8590 000CN Figure 8 3 5 Lever cart pressure RF5 3725 000CN Figure 8 5 1 Low voltage power supply assembly RG5 6410 000CN 110 volt Figure 8 8 18 RG5 6411 000CN 220 volt Low voltage power supply PCB RG5 6410 000CN 100 127 volt Figure 8 2 5 RG5 6411 000CN 220 240 volt Magenta print cartridge 6823A001CN Magenta print cartridge Europe 6823A002CN Memory controller PCB RG5 6396 000CN Figure 8 2 7 Memory tag antenna PCB assembly RG5 5469 000CN Figure 8 8 13 Memory tag antenna PCBs RG5 5469 000CN Figure 8 2 6 Microswitch front cover WC4 5169 000CN Figure 8 6 3 Motor M6 ETB DC 24 volt brushless RH7 1495 000CN Figure 8 16 2 Motor M7 developing disengaging RH7 1494 000CN Figure 8 11 4 stepping Motor M8 fuser DC brushless 24 volt RH7 1495 000CN Figure 8 12 5 Multi purpose tray assembly RG5 6467 000CN Figure 8 3 3 Multi purpose tray pickup roller RG9 1529 000CN Figure 8 14 5 assembly Norwegian overlay C9660 40010 Optional 500 sheet paper feeder and 5781A001AA Figure 8 19 1 Tray 3 assembly Paper feeder drive assembly RG1 4138 000CN Figure 8 20 3 Paper feeder drive assembly RG1 4138 000CN Figure 8 21 1 Paper feeder P
154. e Custom installation option when you install the printer driver Select the option to load Printer Status and Alerts The proxy server is installed as part of the Printer Status and Alerts software When the printer is connected to the network the embedded Web server is automatically available You may access the embedded Web server from Windows 95 and later The embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the printer control panel Below are examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server view printer control status information set the type of paper loaded in each tray determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones view and change tray configurations view and change the printer control panel menu configuration view and print internal pages receive notification of printer and supplies events view and change network configuration To use the embedded Web server you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 and later or Netscape Navigator 4 and later The embedded Web server works when the printer is connected to an IP based network The embedded Web server does not support IPX based printer connections You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server To access the embedded Web server In a supported Web browser on your computer type the IP address for the printer To find the IP address p
155. e Device menu including all submenus Diagnostics menu Service menu locked with factory set PIN CANCEL JOB button Use HP Web Jetadmin software HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh or an ASCII escape sequence to set security HP software which comes on the software CD ROM is easier to use than an ASCII escape sequence For instructions about locking the control panel by using either HP Web Jetadmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh go to the online Help for that software C9660 90901 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 69 Note Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set network security If you decide to use the ASCII escape sequence you must use an MS DOS or Windows ASCII editor to create the commands The commands must also be sent to the printer by using a DOS COPY command or an ASCII file download utility The PUL Technical Reference Manual is located on CD ROM part number 5961 0976 Order a copy of this manual from the HP website http www hp com Inthe following examples EC represents the escape character For more information on using escape characters see the PJL Technical Reference Manual e To lock or unlock the printer control panel if a password has not been set send the following ASCII sequence to the printer EC 12345X PJL JOB PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK NONE or MINIMUM MODERATE or MAXIMUM PJL EOJ EC 12345X To set the password send the following ASCII sequence to the printer E
156. e Table 8 1 1 Approximate lives are based on 3 000 pages per month 2 The approximate average A4 Letter size page count is based on 5 percent coverage of individual colors Page counts are only estimations usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary 3 Usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary See Figure 4 1 on page 74 for more information Hewlett Packard recommends the use of HP products in this printer Use of non HP products can cause problems that require service not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 73 ETB life under different circumstances Depending on the printer workload the customer will need to replace the ETB once or twice in the life of the printer In order to help plan supplies purchases the HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer calculates an estimated remaining number of pages that can be printed on the ETB and displays this on the Supplies Status page under Transfer Kit HP Part Number HP C9724A You can view the Supplies Status page by printing it from the printer s control panel If the printer is connected to the network you can also view the page in your Web browser or through the HP Web Jetadmin software The number of pages an ETB can print is a function of two factors e the number of times the belt goes from a stationary to a rotating state spins up e the number of pages printed on the belt Unless print jobs are qu
157. e a full page of print image data before the data is sent to the print engine Memory Capacity can be increased by adding DIMMs to the formatter Note that adding memory DIMMs might also increase the print speed for complex graphics DIMM slots The DIMM slots can be used to add memory fonts or firmware upgrades Firmware DIMM To upgrade printer firmware insert a new firmware DIMM in the slot marked J1 See page 85 for more information Nonvolatile memory The printer uses nonvolatile memory NVRAM to store I O and information about the print environment s configuration The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is turned off or disconnected PJL overview Printer job language PJL is an integral part of configuration in addition to the standard printer command language PCL With standard cabling PJL allows the printer to perform functions such as e Two way communication with the host computer through a bidirectional parallel connection The printer can tell the host about such things as the control panel settings and it allows the control panel settings to be changed from the host e Dynamic I O switching allows the printer to be configured with a host on each O The printer can receive data from more than one I O simultaneously until the I O buffer is full This can occur even when the printer is offline e Context sensitive switching allows the printer to automatically recognize the personality PS or PCL
158. e assembly Figure 8 9 1 RG5 6469 000CN Paper pickup drive assembly Figure 8 15 4 RG5 6471 000CN Separation pad assembly Figure 8 13 2 RG5 6474 000CN Drum grounding assembly Figure 8 4 4 black and yellow RG5 6475 000CN Drum grounding assembly Figure 8 4 5 magenta and cyan RG5 6476 000CN Cassette Tray 2 Figure 8 13 1 Figure 8 14 RG5 6492 000CN Contact pin assembly Figure 8 4 3 RG5 6504 000CN Drum drive assembly magenta and Figure 8 4 7 cyan Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 351 Table 8 23 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Figure Reference RG5 6504 000CN Drum drive assembly cyan magenta Figure 8 10 1 RG5 6505 000CN Drum drive assembly black RG5 6506 000CN Drum drive assembly yellow RG5 6505 000CN Drum drive assembly black Figure 8 4 9 RG5 6506 000CN Drum drive assembly yellow Figure 8 4 8 RG5 6507 000CN Developing disengaging drive assembly Figure 8 7 9 RG5 6507 000CN Disengaging drive assembly Figure 8 11 1 RG5 6508 000CN Developing drive assembly Figure 8 10 2 cyan magenta RG5 6509 000CN Developing drive assembly black yellow RG5 6510 000CN Control panel crossmember assembly Figure 8 4 2 RG5 6512 000CN Fuser drive assembly Figure 8 7 11 RG5 6512 000CN Fuser drive assembly Figure 8 12 1 RG5 6522 000CN Sensor bracket assembly Figure 8 8 14 RG9 1529 000CN Multi purpose tray pickup r
159. e attaching roller pushes it against the ETB The attaching roller has a positive DC bias and it creates a positive charge on the paper Figure 5 23 illustrates this step Attaching roller N ETB belt DC bias ETB feed roller Print paper Figure 5 23 Attaching the paper to the ETB 116 Image formation system C9660 90901 Figure 5 24 Figure 5 25 C9660 90901 Step 7 Transfer A positive bias is applied to the transfer charging roller which is directly opposite the photosensitive drum As the ETB passes the transfer charging roller it picks up a positive charge The negatively charged toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the positively charged paper Figure 5 24 illustrates this step This process is repeated for each color as the ETB carries the paper from the bottom cartridge to the top C Y M K In four color printing as four colors of toner are piled up on the paper the holding force of the toner weakens as the transfer process progresses To counteract this effect the DC controller increases the positive DC bias applied to the transfer charging roller for each successive color Print paper ETB belt Photosensitive drum a charging roller Toner transfer Step 8 Separation The paper s elasticity causes it to separate from the ETB as the ETB reaches the top of its path Figure 5 25 illustrates this step ETB belt NN ETB feed roller Print paper
160. e covers need to be closed The CPR Sensor is not behaving properly The printer received data and is waiting for a form feed When the printer receives another file the message should disappear 1 2 Press for detailed information Press A and W to step through the instructions Press for more information Close front covers Note This message might also appear if the fuser is missing or incorrectly installed Ensure that the fuser is correctly installed Force a calibration by selecting Calibrate Now from the Print Quality menu See Calibrate Now on page 294 If the message persists verify the cables are seated properly and the connector J1024 is making good contact with the DC controller Replace the color registration detection unit If the message still persists replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller Press to continue C9660 90901 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message Deserpien Tan DETECTABLE SIZE IN TRAY XX For help press alternates with DETECTABLE SIZE IN TRAY XX Recommend move switch to STANDARD DISK DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready For menus press DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED alternates with Ready For menus press DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with Ready For menus press DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED alternates with Ready For menus press EIO DISK X NO
161. e interlock arm from the interlock lever callout 2 ul en Li sa AA L d 1 m a I i f P Figure 6 35 Removing and replacing the interlock cover Figure 6 36 Removing and replacing the interlock arm 168 Internal components left side C9660 90901 Lift the cartridge shutter bar shown in callout 3 up and out of the printer Remove the four screws shown in callout 4 In the picture below the screw in the upper left corner is hidden by the gear Disconnect the connector for each drum drive motor from the DC controller PCB 7 Remove the drum drive motors ES J sa Figure 6 37 Removing and replacing the drum drive motors cyan motor shown Note Calibrate the printer after removing or replacing the drum drive motors See page 294 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 169 Memory tag antenna PCBs To remove the memory tag antenna PCBs 1 Remove the drum drive unit See page 164 Remove the screw shown in callout 1 and remove the grounding plate shown in callout 2 Remove the white retainer shown in callout 3 Disconnect the connector shown in callout 4 from the memory controller PCB oa A O N Remove the memory tag antenna PCB which is inside the slot Figure 6 38 Removing and replacing the memory tag antenna PCB cyan is shown 170 Internal components left side C9660 90901 Developing disengaging motor assembly To remove the developing disengaging motor assembly R
162. e network 000 cee eee ees 68 Configuring Novell NetWare frame type parameters 68 Setting network security on the printer aa 69 Locking the control Pang oo oi na erm SEE NG ee BA ANG EO RES REO 69 Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set network security c tatanan io ew KUNG EORR WG dE Sn en 70 vi Contents C9660 90901 C9660 90901 4 Printer maintenance Cleaning the printer and accessories eee eee 72 Cleaning spilled toner eee eee eae 72 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items 73 ETB life under different circumstances 000 cece eee eee 74 Locating SUD ON CS c AA Bee Ran hn ee Es DAA 75 Replacing supply items nnn naana 76 Changing print cartridges n noaa a 76 Replacing the transfer unit aa 79 Replacing the fuser 0 nannaa 82 Printer Memory acu ga canon ed eo Eben qud d m Ra GH ROSA RTRESEESG LAG ADA Rani 84 Installing memory and font DIMMs eene 85 Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card 88 5 Theory of operation wies ON AA AA AA 90 Operation SEQUENCE s ccs su caw ad ABG NAGA Seed BNG See Aa ERA ad Euer 91 Engine control S VOLO c x ua aa WG cip Sa a es ws dp or S Bh Be KA a Bri em radit eh KA 92 DC controller CNCUNG AA oud eas es Hele 0100 APA 93 Motors and TANS ses aden hw oh ae Eee Bae AA Oe 94 Fuser power Supply circuit uuu ma K
163. e registered in certain jurisdictions True Type is a U S trademark of Apple Computer Inc UNIX is a registered trademark of the Open Group Windows MS Windows and Windows NT are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Conventions Note CAUTION WARNING C9660 90901 This manual uses the following conventions COLOR is used to emphasize items that are important to the material under discussion Bold is used for menu items to click and for emphasis particularly in situations where italic type would be confusing Italic type is used to indicate related documents or emphasis DISPFLBEY type indicates text as seen on the printer control panel display Commands you use on a computer keyboard or on the printer control panel are shown in KEYCAP Two examples are PAUSE RESUME and CANCEL JOB COURIER type indicates text that you type on a computer keyboard exactly as shown Notes contain important information set off from the text Caution messages alert you to the possibility of damage to equipment or loss of data Warning messages alert you to the possibility of personal injury C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Contents 1 Printer description Printer features Kana ae ewe Sar de Roe geek Gon CR ed ae ie 3 AD ae 18 ferreus TP r 21 Model and serial numbers n n nannaa naaa 21 Power and regulatory information llle 22 Site requirements ee hrs 23 Space req
164. e the pickup motor Replace the paper pickup assembly Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 225 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message besorpton Jaen 13 XX YY JAM IN A page is jammed in Tray 3 Press for detailed information TRAY 3 about clearing the jam For help press Press A and W to step through the instructions Clean the pickup roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Clean the feed roller If it is worn or damaged replace it Replace the Tray 3 pickup solenoid Replace the Tray 3 pickup motor Replace the Tray 3 paper feeder PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 20 INSUFFICIENT The printer has received more data 1 Press to resume printing MEMORY from the computer than fits in Note A loss of data will occur For help press available memory Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error alternates with Adding memory to the printer may allow printing of more complex 20 INSUFFICIENT pages MEMORY To continue press D 22 EIO X The printer s EIO card in slot X has Press v to resume printing BUFFER OVERFLOW overflowed its I O buffer during a busy To continue state Note A loss of data will occur press D 22 PARALLEL I O The printer s parallel buffer
165. e the printer transfers an image in four colors in line onto the paper small changes in the rotational speed of the motor are likely to cause color misalignment The DC motors used for image formation are precisely controlled to account for rotational speed fluctuation Figure 5 4 Motors and fans 94 Engine control system C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Table 5 2 Function of motors and fans M5 Pickup motor M6 ETB motor M7 Developing disengaging motor M8 Fuser motor FAN1 Formatter fan FAN2 Cartridge fan Type Speed switching Stepping motor 4 speed full 1 2 1 3 1 4 Drives the photosensitive drum 4 speed full 1 2 1 3 1 4 Drives the pickup roller and feed roller Drives the ETB 4 speed full 1 2 1 3 1 4 Stepping motor DC motor 4 speed full 1 2 1 3 1 4 Separates the photosensitive drums and the developing cylinders Drives the pressure roller and delivery roller Exhausts heat around the formatter and low voltage power supply unit 2 speed full during printing 1 2 during standby No full soeed during printing only Exhausts heat around the fuser and cartridges Chapter 5 Theory of operation 95 Fuser power supply circuit This printer uses an induction heating method to heat the fuser Figure 5 5 shows the configuration of the fuser power supply Main thermistor TH1 Sub thermistor TH2 Fuser power DC controller Print paper Fuser sl
166. eatedly use the information in this section to diagnose the root cause of the problem The tables in this section list possible causes and recommended solutions for jams in each area of the paper path Items are listed in the order you should investigate In general items at the beginning of the list are relatively minor repairs Items at the end of the list are more significant repairs Basic troubleshooting for paper jams The basic troubleshooting process for paper jams consists of the following 1 Gather data 2 Identify the cause of the problem 3 Fix the problem Data collection To troubleshoot paper jams gather the following information the exact paper jam error code displayed on the control panel the location of the leading edge of the paper in the paper path whether paper is in the paper path when the jam occurs or if paper is stuck in the input tray whether the jam occurs at power up or while paper is moving whether the paper is damaged and if it is where the damage occurs on the paper and where in the paper path the paper stops whether the jam occurs when feeding from one particular tray whether the jam occurs only when duplex printing whether a particular type of paper is jamming or not jamming whether any of the supplies are non HP non HP supplies are known to cause paper jams whether the customer is storing the paper correctly overloading the trays damaging the edge of the paper during loading or using pap
167. ect the connector shown in callout 3 O N O CI FP WO N Remove the high voltage power supply PCB m ep U aa E a P i a Figure 6 57 Removing and replacing the high voltage power supply PCB C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 185 Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the high voltage power supply PCB be sure to align the white markings on the left side of the PCB with the hooks on the printer then snap in the PCB You can verify that the PCB is aligned correctly by observing the 12 holes shown in callout 5 When the PCB is aligned correctly you will be able to see part of the contact springs as shown in callout 6 Figure 6 58 Aligning the high voltage power supply PCB 186 Internal components right side C9660 90901 Toner level detection PCB To remove the toner level detection PCB Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the right cover See page 150 Remove the high voltage power supply PCB See page 185 Remove the three screws shown in callout 1 Disconnect the connector shown in callout 2 O N O A FPF WO N Remove the toner level detection PCB callout 3 Figure 6 59 Removing and replacing the toner level detection PCB C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 187 High voltage contact blocks To remove the high voltage contact blocks Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the
168. ectional interface controlling the PowerSave mode The formatter monitors the printer continuously through the video interface When the printer is ready to print the formatter sends a signal to the DC controller which turns the laser on or off based on the signal Figure 5 9 shows the formatter system Formatter DC Controller PCB PCB TUT oe TA Bk laser scanner VIDEO signal VIDEO INTERFACE VIDEO signal signal M laser scanner External device II host computer etc VIDEO signal Y laser scanner C laser scanner VIDEO signal Coed Figure 5 9 Formatter system 100 Engine control system C9660 90901 Note C9660 90901 PowerSave This feature conserves power after the printer has been idle for an adjustable length of time Set the time length in the Configure Device menu under System Setup When the printer is in PowerSave mode the control panel backlight is turned off but the all retains i Pune settings downloadable fonts and macros The default setting is SSHUEZ DM with a 30 minute idle time You can turn PowerSave off in the Configure Device menu minder esels The printer exits PowerSave mode and enters the warm up cycle when any of the following occurs e A print job valid data or a PML or PUL command is received at the parallel port serial port FIR port or EIO card A control panel button is pressed The top cover is opened A paper tray is opened The engine test button is pressed
169. ee Calibrate Now on page 294 Press to continue Turn the printer off and then back on Reseat the connectors between the laser scanner and DC controller PCB J1009 J1012 Replace the defective laser scanner assembly Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now on page 294 Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Press to continue Turn the printer off and then back on Reseat the connectors between the laser scanner and DC controller PCB J1009 J1012 Replace the defective laser scanner assembly Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now on page 294 Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Press to continue Turn the printer off and then back on Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 229 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message besorpton Acton 53 XY ZZ PRINTER ERROR To continue press CANCEL JOB 53 10 05 PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 54 X PRINTER ERROR 230 Printer error troubleshooting An error occurred on some memory of the printer X DIMM Type 1 RAM Y Device Location 1 DIMM Slot 1 2 DIMM Slot 2 3 DIMM Slot 3 4 DIMM Slot 4 ZZ Error Number 0 unsupported memory 1 unrecognized memory 2 unsuppor
170. eeps the developing cylinder in contact with the drum pushing the toner against the drum surface for development The toner is non magnetic and consists of resins This block consists of two steps e toner charging e development Figure 5 22 shows a cross section of a print cartridge and illustrates the development block Toner charging roller Print cartridge vy 7 N Developing cylinder Toner stirring blade 2s DC bias Toner feed roller L Development block Step 4 Toner charging As the toner stirring blade turns inside the cartridge the friction creates a negative potential on the toner A negative voltage is applied to the toner charging roller and creates a uniform negative potential on the toner Step 5 Development The areas on the photosensitive drum that have been exposed to the laser beam have a higher potential are less negatively charged than the toner particles on the developing cylinder As the photosensitive drum rotates the toner adheres to the exposed areas on the photosensitive drum At this point the image is visible on the drum surface Chapter 5 Theory of operation 115 Transfer block The third part of the image formation process is the transfer block in which the toner image is transferred from the photosensitive drum to the paper This block consists of three steps e attaching e transfer separation Step 6 Attaching After the paper is picked up from the input tray th
171. eets from feeding 4 The registration shutter corrects any skew in the paper and the paper is fed at a specified speed according to the size and type of the paper 5 As the ETB carries the paper past each print cartridge toner is transferred onto the paper Cassette detection and cassette paper size detection The printer can sense whether the cassette Tray 2 is installed correctly and it can sense the size of the paper in the cassette Paper size detection switches at the back of the cassette send this information to the DC controller The DC controller is able to determine which size is loaded by reading the state of the various switches according to the Table 5 6 Figure 5 34 shows how the switches are stacked Table 5 6 Cassette paper size detection Paper size Paper size detection switch SW2 A4 B5 A5 Letter Legal Executive Custom No cassette Although the cassette determines paper size by reading the switches it is possible that the user can select a different size than what is loaded creating an error in paper size detection The paper leading edge sensor detects when the leading edge and the trailing edge of a sheet of paper pass it By measuring the time between the leading edge and trailing edge passing the sensor can determine the actual size of the paper If this measured size differs from the size specified by the formatter or the switch combination the DC controller determ
172. eeve Current control circuit CURRENT CONTROL signal FUSER SLEEVE TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal Safety monitor circuit me E E e Thermoswitch Figure 5 5 Fuser power supply circuit The fuser power supply has three main components e Fuser sleeve A high frequency current flows through an induction heating coil in the fuser sleeve causing the metal sleeve to heat e Thermistors Two thermistors are in the fuser sleeve one in the center and the other at the end Each thermistor monitors the temperature in the fuser sleeve e Thermoswitch The thermoswitch is located at the bottom center of the fuser sleeve When the fuser is overheating the switch opens and power to the induction heating coil is shut off Table 5 3 Fuser temperatures Temperature Engine speed plain 190 C 374 F full speed overhead transparencies 172 C 342 F color 1 4 speed 185 C 365 F monochrome 1 2 speed thick 185 G 965 F gloss 167 O 333 F envelopes 190 C 374 F 1 2 speed 1 3 speed full speed 96 Engine control system C9660 90901 Heater temperature control The heater temperature control detects the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve and controls the current flowing to the induction heating coil The heater temperature control circuit is shown in Figure 5 6 Fuser sleeve unit Thermistor 1 TH Thermistor 2 TH
173. efore the toner level reaches its low level Toner sensor For the first 75 percent of the cartridge life toner depletion within the cartridge is calculated by pixel counting An optical toner level sensor then tracks the final 25 percent of toner The toner is measured and then reported on the toner gas gauge on the control panel or on the supplies status page The transition from pixel counting to optical toner level sensing causes no fluctuations on the toner gas gauge Some toner might remain in the fresh toner hopper due to other cartridge components reaching their end of life Photosensitive drum rotations Photosensitive drum rotations are also tracked on the cartridge s memory tag Similar to the developer roller tracking these rotations enables the printer to signal that a print cartridge is low or out before the photosensitive drum is actually worn out when print quality defects would occur The photosensitive drum might cause a low message when low coverage documents are printed frequently Tracking drum life is essential because of drum wear and the potential for overflow from the waste toner hopper if the photosensitive drum life is extended past its useful life Figure 5 16 illustrates the toner level detection system 110 Image formation system C9660 90901 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 C9660 90901 Toner level detection PCB C Light receiver Light emitter QU a wW z3 8 o8 8 Ro gt Light guide E du CT Gg AA
174. embly RG5 6410 000CN 110 volt RG5 6411 000CN 220 volt Fuse 125 volt 6 3 amp Fuse 250 volt 4 amp VD7 0216 301CN 110 volt VD7 0644 001CN 220 volt Fuse 250 volt 20 amp Fuse 250 volt 8 amp VD7 1731 502CN 110 volt VD7 1838 001CN 220 volt Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 327 Figure 8 9 Paper pickup drive assembly Table 8 10 Paper pickup drive assembly Description Paper pickup drive assembly Quantity Part number RG5 6469 000CN Solenoid 328 Illustrations and parts lists 2 RH7 5319 000CN C9660 90901 Figure 8 10 C9660 90901 Drum drive assembly Drum drive assembly Description Drum drive assembly cyan magenta Drum drive assembly black Drum drive assembly yellow Quantity Part number RG5 6504 000CN RG5 6505 000CN RG5 6506 000CN Developing drive assembly cyan magenta Developing drive assembly black yellow RG5 6508 000CN RG5 6509 000CN Gear 30T RS7 0176 000CN LED PCB assembly RG5 6394 000CN Cable main drive RG5 6416 000CN Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 329 Figure 8 11 Disengaging drive assembly Table 8 12 Disengaging drive assembly Description Disengaging drive assembly Quantity Part number RG5 6507 000CN Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Gear 16T 128T RS7 0179 000CN Motor M7 developing disengaging stepping
175. emove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the left cover See page 148 Remove the DC controller shield See page 155 Remove the developing disengaging rod See page 164 Remove the three screws shown in callout 1 Disconnect the two connectors shown in callout 2 O ON O C FP C N Remove the developing disengaging motor assembly T LA PAA i ial Ew e M om ni ya ML Um ET ia e T E Figure 6 39 Removing and replacing the developing disengaging motor assembly C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 171 DC controller PCB To remove the DC controller PCB Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the left cover See page 148 Remove the DC controller shield See page 155 Remove the four screws shown in callout 1 JO OF FP Cc N ma Disconnect all the connectors on the DC controller PCB including the formatter ribbon cable shown in callout 2 CAUTION When removing the formatter ribbon cable be careful not to tear it or to damage the connector Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection Do not pull on the ribbon cable without releasing this tab 8 Remove the DC controller PCB Figure 6 40 Removing and replacing the DC controller PCB Note Calibrate the printer after removing or repl
176. en the spring tension making the rods easier to remove 3 Press outward on the tray near the spring rods and remove the tray Figure 6 12 Removing and replacing the multi purpose tray Reinstallation tip Make sure the rods are inserted through their guides in the printer frame callout 2 when reinstalling the multi purpose tray 152 Covers and external components C9660 90901 Control panel To remove the control panel Open the top cover if you have not already removed it Remove the three screws shown in callout 1 Lift the right side of the control panel to access the connector underneath the left side Disconnect the connector shown in callout 2 and unwind the wires from the stay callout 3 ao HR c N Remove the control panel Figure 6 14 Removing and replacing the control panel 2 of 3 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 153 Figure 6 15 Removing and replacing the control panel 3 of 3 To install a new control panel overlay 1 Position the new overlay over the top of the control panel 2 Insert the left tab of the overlay into the slot on the printer face callout 1 Line up the tab on the right side of the overlay with the slot on the right side of the control panel callout 2 Set the overlay in place by pushing down on the overlay near the right side Figure 6 16 Installing a new control panel overlay 154 Covers and external components C9660 90901 Internal components DC contro
177. ensity sensor abnormality warning to the formatter DC controller PCB oa Zo e Oz ae LLI p Ww Sule ec z a iy 5 o Ti Z zZ VE xU 2E LLI Oa Sensor L A N 2 o VON Light Emitter lt gt Detection pattern ETB belt Figure 5 31 Image density detection 124 Image formation system C9660 90901 Pickup feed system C9660 90901 The pickup feed system picks paper from the input trays and carries it along the paper path The printer has one multi purpose tray Tray 1 and one 500 sheet cassette Tray 2 A second 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 is available for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4600n models it is standard on the 4600dn 4600dtn and 4600hdn models Sensors detect the presence of paper in each of these trays Three switches detect the size of the paper Three motors and two solenoids drive the various feed rollers Three photo sensors are able to detect the progress of paper along the paper path If paper does not reach or pass one of these sensors within a specified time the DC controller determines there is a paper jam and notifies the formatter Figure 5 32 on the next page illustrates this system Chapter 5 Theory of operation 125 DC controller PCB KO Es SdW JOUBIS NOII2313Q 33dvd AVAL ISOSANGILINW S s oubis TOY INOD YOLOW 413 5 N Q TSANYA pubis 3A 2 gr a 1SdMd PUBIS JAINA 2 6 GIONITOS dNYIId AYAL ISOJANGILI
178. ents to the formatter so it can perform halftone calibration Image density calibration must always be performed prior to image halftone calibration Image halftone calibration control consists of three steps 1 Using the optimum developing bias determined during image density calibration the DC controller forms density patterns on the photosensitive drum in each color cartridge 2 These density patterns are transferred to the ETB and the color registration detection unit measures the image density of these patterns Image data is returned to the formatter 3 The formatter uses the image data to perform a halftone calibration in order to obtain an ideal halftone image Chapter 5 Theory of operation 123 Image density detection Each of the image stabilization controls described above uses the color registration unit at the top of the ETB unit to measure image density To measure image density the DC controller emits a light from sensors located above the density detection patterns on the ETB The light reflected off the patterns is returned to the sensor and the data is returned to the DC controller Figure 5 31 illustrates this process When the values detected by the density sensor are outside the specified range the DC controller resets the image density and issues an image density sensor out of guaranteed range warning to the formatter If the sensor receives no reflected light the DC controller stops the printer and issues a d
179. er and 160 MB of SDRAM The HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn printer is the base model with an HP Jetdirect 610N print server network card automatic 2 sided printing additional 500 sheet paper feeder a hard disk and 160 MB of SDRAM Figure 1 1 HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printers 1 2 HP Color LaserJet 4600 4600n and 4600dn printers HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn and 4600hdn printers This printer series combines the quality and reliability of Hewlett Packard printers with the features listed in Table 1 1 18 Printer features C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Table 1 1 Feature Performance Memory User interface Supported printer personalities Storage features Environmental features Fonts Printer features Description 17 pages per minute ppm on letter sized paper 16 ppm on A4 sized paper Prints on transparencies and glossy paper 96 megabytes MB of synchronous dynamic random access memory SDRAM 160 MB in the HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn and 4600hdn printers Can be expanded to 512 MB Optional hard disk drive included with the HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn printer Graphic display on control panel Enhanced Help with animated graphics Embedded Web server to access support and order supplies network connected printers HP PCL 6 HP PCL 5c PostScript 3 emulation Automatic language switching Job retention for printers with hard disks Fonts and forms
180. er cartridge or assembly Pickup roller is dirty Clean the roller If the roller is still dirty after cleaning replace the pickup roller assembly Poor contact in the attaching bias contacts between the ETB and the high voltage PCB Clean the contacts Replace them if they are still dirty or are damaged High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Dirt on front of paper Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Table 7 25 Causes for dirt on the front of the paper Rollers are dirty See Table 7 36 on page 260 for information on identifying the roller s that might be dirty Clean the indicated roller If the roller is still dirty after cleaning replace the appropriate roller cartridge or assembly Pickup roller is dirty Clean the roller If is still dirty after cleaning replace the pickup roller assembly Poor contact in the attaching bias contacts between the ETB and the high voltage PCB Clean the contacts Replace them if they are still dirty or are damaged High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Vertical lines Table 7 26 Causes for vertical lines Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294
181. er feeder 134 pickup feed system 125 thermistors function 96 locating 297 thermoswitch function 96 locating 297 toner cleaning spilled 72 fusing 118 tranferring to paper 116 transferring to drum 115 washing off clothing 39 toner cartridge structure 108 toner charging roller locating 108 Toner Cleaning Cloth HP 72 toner level detection PCB removing and replacing 187 toner level detecting 110 toner stirrer locating 108 toner level detection PCB locating 303 tools required for service 140 top cover jams 243 locating 26 removing and replacing 145 total page count resetting 295 transfer charging rollers locating 112 297 transfer kit life span 73 resetting count 79 295 transfer motor component test 290 transfer unit locating 26 replacing 79 resetting count 73 295 transparencies defects 247 detection 129 HP supported 30 31 printing 31 supported sizes 29 30 Tray 1 capacity 29 jams 240 locating 26 removing and replacing 151 special media handling 32 supported media 29 Tray 2 capacity 30 jams 240 locating 26 supported media 30 Tray 3 capacity 30 jams 241 locating 26 27 supported media 30 trays input capacity 29 locating 26 supported media 29 troubleshooting general process 208 image formation 246 overhead transparencies 247 paper jams 238 paper path 234 paper transport 244 power on 210 print quality 246 printer errors 211 repetitive defects 260 U UE
182. er that has already been fed through the printer 238 Paper path troubleshooting C9660 90901 Note C9660 90901 General paper path troubleshooting Use the following suggestions to isolate the cause of the problem Once you have identified the cause use the tables that follow to find a recommended solution Use the paper path test in the Diagnostics menu to print pages while troubleshooting See page 287 for information about the paper path test e View or print the event log and determine if a particular jam error occurs more often than others Try to identify a pattern From the event log determine the frequency of a particular jam If a jam occurs repeatedly around the same page count consider this a single jam that the customer tried to clear e Try printing from all available input trays to identify whether the problem is isolated to one tray e Print the job in both simplex and duplex modes to identify if the problem occurs only in one mode or the other e Try printing on paper from an unopened ream that has been stored correctly If the jam does not occur with this media then the customer s media might be causing the problem If the jam occurs from when the printer is turned on check the paper path for small torn pieces of paper Also check for broken sensors or flags and check for loose or defective connections e If the paper is torn folded or wrinkled typically along the leading edge inspect the paper path f
183. es continued Message Desorpton Tan TRAY XX CONTAINS UNKNOWN MEDIA TRAY XX EMPTY TYPE SIZE alternates with Ready For menus press TRAY XX OPEN For help press alternates with Ready For menus press TRAY XX SIZE lt XXXX SIZE gt For help press alternates with TRAY XX SIZE lt XXXX SIZE gt To change move Switch in tray XX TRAY XX TYPE SIZE Size detected by tray alternates with TRAY XX lt TYPE gt SIZE To change type press D The media type in the specified tray cannot be determined To change media type press Use A and y to highlight the type then press to select To change the media size to Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal leave the tray switch in the STANDARD position To change the media size to other sizes move the tray switch to CUSTOM adjust the paper guides against the paper and close the tray Use A and 15 to highlight the media size then press 7 to select The specified tray is empty and needs Refill the tray at a convenient time to be filled but the current job does not need this tray to print correctly The specified tray is open or not closed completely A non detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD positio
184. es listed above is that the Europe only print cartridges have different languages on the instruction sheet inside the box Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 313 Common fasteners Table 8 2 Common fasteners Illustration Description Part number Screw machine XA9 1276 000CN To hold plastic to metal with washer example the skins Screw self tapping To hold plastic to plastic Screw truss head XA9 1275 000CN Sheet metal to sheet metal example formatter pan Retaining Ring To hold gears into place e type 6mm 8mm 10mm 12mm M3 M4 oi kk hi 0 O 14 mm 16 mm 25 mm 314 Ordering parts C9660 90901 Illustrations and parts lists Figure 8 1 C9660 90901 The following illustrations and parts tables list the field replaceable units FRU for this printer At the end of this chapter are two tables listing all of the parts shown in this chapter Table 8 22 on page 342 lists the parts in alphabetical order and Table 8 23 on page 348 lists the parts in numerical order by part number Both tables list the appropriate figure in this chapter where the part can be found 11 1 10 2 9 8 7 3 Assembly location diagram O O N O OF FP CQ N ra Fuser assembly see Figure 8 17 on page 336 ETB assembly see Figure 8 16 on page 335 Paper pickup assembly see Figure 8 15 on page 334 Cassette see Figure 8 13 on page 332 Paper pickup drive assembly see Figure 8 9 on page 328 Disengaging drive a
185. escription 39 VCCI statement Japan COR a bA SA Hila VC C I OEE AK OS AB TRAE Cd COR SERCH Scc ARIEL Cod d Quizas aL za SE ELT PAG hat Sob ee deng Ad EJ B MBA cit TIEL ORY Fava Fel Figure 1 8 VCCI statement for Japan 40 Safety information C9660 90901 Laser statement for Finland LASERTURVALLISUUS Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP Color LaserJet 4600 4600n 4600dn 4600dtn 4600hdn laserkirjoitin on k ytt j n kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa kaytossa kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estaa lasersateen paasyn laitteen ulkopuolelle Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on maaritetty standardin EN 60825 1 1994 mukaisesti VAROITUS Laitteen kayttaminen muulla kuin kayttoohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa kayttajan turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittavalle nakymattomalle lasersateilylle VARNING Om apparaten anvands pa annat satt an i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anvandaren utsattas for osynlig laserstralning som verskrider gr nsen for laserklass 1 HUOLTO HP Color LaserJet 4600 4600n 4600dn 4600dtn 4600hdhn kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole k ytt j n huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilo Tallaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota variainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita kayttajan kasikirjassa lueteltuja kayttajan tehtavaksi tarkoitettuja yllapitotoimia jotka voidaa
186. et long with 25 pin male micro 36 pin male c type connector 92215S Macintosh DIN 8 printer cable 92215N HP LocalTalk cable kit Media C2934A HP Color LaserJet Transparencies letter 50 sheets HP Color LaserJet Transparencies A4 50 sheets C2936A C4179A C4179B HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper letter 200 sheets HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper A4 200 sheets HP LaserJet Tough paper A4 HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper letter HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper A4 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 311 Q1298B HPU1132 CHP410 Q1298A YY HP LaserJet Tough paper letter Table 8 1 Supplies and accessories continued HPJ1124 HP LaserJet paper letter CHP310 HP LaserJet paper A4 Memory J6054B J6054 61013 Printer hard disk C9665A C9665 67951 4 MB Flash DIMM C7848A C7848 67901 64 MB memory DIMM SDRAM C7850A C7850 67901 128 MB memory DIMM SDRAM C9653A C9653 67901 256 MB memory DIMM SDRAM Panel overlays C9660 40002 English overlay C9660 40003 French overlay C9660 40004 German overlay C9660 40005 Italian overlay C9660 40006 Spanish overlay C9660 40007 Danish overlay C9660 40008 Dutch overlay C9660 40009 Finnish overlay C9660 40010 Norwegian overlay C9660 40011 Portuguese overlay C9660 40012 Swedish overlay C9660 40013 Czech overlay C9660 40014 Hungari
187. etter Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Custom Minimum size 148 by 210 mm 5 8 by 8 2 in Maximum size 216 by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 in 15 g m to 120 g m 20 Ib to 32 Ib Limit of 200 sheets Duplex printing Paper Glossy Paper A4 Letter Legal Executive JIS B5 Custom paper sizes are not supported for 2 sided printing 75 g m to 105 g m 20 Ib to 28 Ib Trays 2 and 3 do not support the range of custom sizes available in Tray 1 Trays 2 and 3 use custom size specifically for B5 ISO Note 30 Media requirements Use only HP supported transparencies HP part number C2934A Letter size C2936A A4 size C9660 90901 CAUTION C9660 90901 Media to avoid This printer can handle many types of media Using media outside the printer s specifications will cause a loss of print quality and increase the chance of paper jams occurring e Do not use paper that is too rough Do not use paper with cutouts or perforations other than standard 3 hole punched paper Do not use multipart forms Do not use paper that has already been printed on or fed through a photocopier or printer Do not use paper with a watermark if you are printing solid patterns Media that may cause damage to the printer In rare circumstances media can damage the printer To prevent possible damage do not use the following media e Donotuse paper that is embossed or coated unless it is specifically recommended for use in this
188. eued back to back each print job will require the belt to spin up Think of the ETB as having a limited number of wear units It has 200 000 wear units when it is new Each time the belt spins up it uses two wear units Each time it prints a page the belt uses one wear unit Since most print jobs are not queued the average number of pages per job or job length is a factor in how fast the ETB will wear out The shorter the average job the faster the ETB will wear out Figure 4 1 shows how many pages an ETB will print given various average job lengths 250000 200000 553081196078 31818 Average Job Length Figure 4 1 ETB total page count according to average job length The printer assumes an average print job length of three pages to estimate how many pages are remaining on the ETB For an average job length of three pages the ETB will print 120 000 pages If all print jobs are exactly three pages long for each page printed the number of estimated pages remaining would decrease by one beginning with the maximum 120 000 pages If the job s length is less than three pages the estimated pages remaining number decreases more quickly than the rate at which the number of pages actually printed increases If the job s length is greater than three pages the number of pages remaining decreases less quickly than the rate at which the actual number of pages printed increases 74 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items C96
189. front 152 left 148 part numbers 317 rear 144 rear top 146 right 150 top 145 CPU type 101 crooked images 245 CSSO A Commercial Service and Support Organization America 45 CSSO E Commercial Service and Support Organization Europe 45 cutouts 31 D DC controller circuit 93 components 304 function 93 locating 303 removing and replacing 172 shield removing and replacing 155 Declaration of Conformity 42 depth printer 25 Deskjet transparencies avoiding 31 developing cylinder disengaging 111 locating 108 developing disengaging assembly part numbers 330 motor component test 290 motor removing and replacing 171 rod removing and replacing 164 DHALF 123 diagnostics engine 285 mode 285 procedure 283 tests 286 using 44 dimensions printer 25 DIMMs adding 84 font 85 disable cartridge check 287 DMAX 123 documentation ordering 47 door switch locating 298 removing and replacing 189 DOS commands 264 drivers printer 47 drum drive gears removing and replacing 166 motors locating 127 motors removing and replacing 168 drum drive unit part numbers 329 removing and replacing 164 drum home position sensors removing and replacing 167 duplex path jams 243 duplex unit operation 133 duty cycle maximum 25 Index E ElO connections locating 27 troubleshooting 263 electrical specifications 24 surface resistivity 32 electrostatic discharge 139 electrostatic latent image forming 113 electrostatic transfer tran
190. g guidelines for best results with preprinted forms and letterhead e Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat resistant inks that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer s fusing temperature of approximately 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Inks must be non flammable and should not adversely affect any printer rollers e Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage e Before you load preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off of preprinted paper e When duplex printing load preprinted forms and letterhead into Tray 2 and Tray 3 with the front of the page facing down and the top edge of the page towards the back of the printer Load preprinted forms and letterhead into Tray 1 with the front of the page facing up and the bottom edge feeding into the printer first Chapter 1 Printer description 33 Recycled paper This printer supports the use of recycled paper Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as standard paper refer to the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide available through HP Direct See the online user guide for ordering information Hewlett Packard recommends that recycled paper contain no more than 5 percent groundwood 34 Media requirements C9660 90901 Weight equivalence table Table 1 10 shows equivalent weight
191. g methods for each media size It also lists the average percentage of page coverage for each color 1 2 3 4 5 Press to enter the HEHUES Press Y to highlight 1HFORHMATIOH Press C to select IMFOEMATION Press W to highlight PRINT USAGE Press CO to select PRINT USAGE The message FRIHTIBHG t appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the usage page The Danar returns to ine 3 Ready state after printing the usage page Usage page 1 2 3 printer identification information usage totals percent of coverage broken down by color Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 281 Event log The event log lists the printer events including printer jams service errors and other printer conditions Press CO to enter the MEMES Press W to highlight G5sHOsTICS Press C to select i inHOSTICS Press W to highlight FR INT EVENT LOG oa fF c N Press CO to select FRIHT EVENT LOG The message FRIHTIHG EVEN LOG appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the event log The hier returns to he Ready state after printing the event log Figure 7 10 Event log current page count and printer serial number event number the most recent is at the top of the list error code page count at which the event occurred ao HB c NYO description of the event 282 Tools for troubleshooting C9660 90901 Diagnostics Diagnostics flowchart Use this flowchart to help identify the cause of high level p
192. gistration sub roller 57 mm defect on front of paper paper pickup assembly fuser delivery roller 38 mm defect on back of paper fuser face down delivery roller 49 mm defect on back of paper fuser cassette pickup roller see note below defect on front of paper paper pickup rollers multi purpose tray pickup roller see note below defect on back of paper MP tray pickup roller assembly Defects on the cassette pickup roller or the multi purpose tray pickup roller do not cause a repetitive defect Defects on these rollers cause a defect to appear only on the leading edge of the image 260 Repetitive defects troubleshooting C9660 90901 Scale A B C D E F G H J O Oo 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 20 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 NO NO Figure 7 3 Repetitive defects ruler 1 of 2 C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 261 First occurrence of print detect 14 mm 0 5 inches 33 mm 1 3 inches 38 mm 1 5 inches 39 mm 1 52 inches 63 mm 2 5 inches 75 mm 2 9 inches 94 mm 3 7 inches 107 mm 4 2 inches Figure 7 4 Repetitive defects ruler 2 of 2 262 Repetitive defects troubleshooting C9660 90901 Interface troubleshooting Note CAUTION Figure 7 5 C9660 90901 Communications checks Communication problems are normally the customer s responsibility Time spent attempting to resolve these proble
193. h hist Mal i dcr d ij F A et if Tipi h a O X L al iF M r t lil is Le fH IR B oe raed Lem NA LIP i i Ta Figure 6 43 Removing and replacing the formatter Note C9660 90901 Calibrate the printer after replacing the formatter See Calibrate Now on page 294 for instructions Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 175 Low voltage power supply To remove the low voltage power supply N O OFF FP c N ma 9 Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the left cover See page 148 Remove the DC controller shield See page 155 Remove the right cover See page 150 Remove the five screws shown in callout 1 See the figures on the next page for the locations of four of the screws Disconnect the connecting rod shown in callout 2 See the next page Disconnect the three connectors shown in callout 3 10 Remove the low voltage power supply CAUTION When removing the low voltage power supply be sure that elements do not touch sheet metal Figure 6 44 Removing and replacing the low voltage power supply left side of printer 1 of 3 176 Internal components rear C9660 90901 PG Figure 6 45 Removing and replacing the low voltage power supply rear of printer 2 of 3 Figure 6 46 Removing and replacing the low voltage power supply 3 of 3 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Remov
194. he gauges on the control panel is a combination of all three of these components The lowest remaining percent is the number reported to the customer However information about which of these components is low or out is not reported During the life of a print cartridge the customer receives three different control panel messages e OK The cartridge has between 15 and 100 percent life remaining e Order cartridge The cartridge has 15 percent life remaining In typical printing situations this represents about 2 weeks of use e Replace cartridge One of the three components listed above has reached its end of life The printer stops and printing cannot continue until the cartridge is replaced Developer rotations The developer rollers rotations are tracked on the print cartridge s memory tag e label Tracking rotations enables the printer to signal that a print cartridge is low or out before the developer and or toner is actually worn out which would result in print quality defects Over time the toner loses its required properties due to excessive stirring and re charging Although the cartridge will correctly signal LOW or OUT because of wear some toner might remain in the fresh toner hopper In addition to toner wear the developer roller experiences wear during its life so developer life tracking is necessary In situations where low coverage documents are printed frequently the developer rotations might cause a LOW message b
195. he motors solenoids clutches and the high voltage power supply circuit e 5 V goes to the laser driver PCB the beam detect PCB and the formatter e 3 3 V goes to the formatter the sensors and the ICs in the DC controller PCB 24 V is divided into 24 VA which is constantly sent from the low voltage power supply circuit and 24 VB which stops power supply when the top cover or the front cover is opened 24 VB goes to the fuser power supply circuit high voltage power supply circuit and the motors and solenoids 24 VB also functions as the door open detection signal DOPEN The CPU detects the door open with the signal E Fuse Noise Fuser power aa F002 filter supply PCB Door open detection switch 24VA a 24VB SW4 Laser scanner unit E DC controller PCB LI lo ee CA NEGRA controller High voltage pou D Solenoids Motors Lu Options Figure 5 8 Low voltage power supply circuit C9660 90901 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 99 Formatter system The formatter PCB is responsible for the following receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces monitoring control panel inputs and relaying printer status information through the control panel and the bidirectional I O developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine storing font information communicating with the host computer through the bidir
196. he registration shutter is worn or damaged replace the paper pickup assembly Feed roller or registration roller is dirty or defective Replace the paper pickup assembly Paper path has foreign substances or dirt Remove any foreign substances or dirt from the paper path If the feed guide is damaged replace the paper pickup assembly Cartridge shutter open close mechanism is damaged The shutters in each print cartridge should open as This applies to jams in which paper is crumpled into you close the ETB If a shutter does not open an accordion fold somewhere on the ETB belt replace that print cartridge Also check for a damaged shutter mechanism in the printer Table 7 14 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper part two paper path exit Fuser inlet guide is dirty Clean the fuser inlet guide Fuser pressure roller is dirty or damaged Clean the pressure roller If the pressure roller is damaged replace the fuser Fuser sleeve is dirty or damaged Clean the fuser sleeve If the fuser sleeve is damaged replace the fuser Fuser delivery roller is dirty Clean the fuser delivery roller 244 Paper transport troubleshooting C9660 90901 Paper is skewed Table 7 15 Causes for skewed paper Paper dust or dirt has accumulated in the cassette Clean the rollers feed roller or registration roller Cassette feed roller and registration roller are worn Replace the paper pickup assembly irregularly
197. heck it for jam debris Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 239 Jams in Tray 1 Table 7 6 Causes for jams in Tray 1 Pickup roller is dirty worn or damaged Clean the pickup roller If it is still dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the pickup roller Separation pad is defective Clean the separation pad If it is still dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the separation pad Drive gears are damaged Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged Multi purpose tray pickup solenoid is defective Disconnect the connector J1020 for the multi purpose tray pickup solenoid from the DC controller PCB Measure the resistance between the cable side connectors J1020 11 and J1020 10 If the measured resistance is NOT about 160 ohms replace the multi purpose tray pickup solenoid Pickup motor is defective Replace the paper pickup drive assembly Paper pickup assembly is defective Replace the paper pickup assembly DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Jams in Tray 2 Table 7 7 Causes for jams in Tray 2 Separation tabs in the paper cassette are deformed Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray or replace the cassette Pickup roller is worn or damaged Replace the pickup roller Feed roller is d
198. his test with all cartridges installed and cycle the door switch so the printer recognizes the configuration Then proceed with the test removing one or more cartridges Black Magenta Yellow Cyan laser scanners These four tests allow you to rotate each scanner motor individually Fuser motor This test rotates the fuser motor and drive gears Alienation motor also called the developing disengaging motor This test moves the developing disengaging rod clutches and plates through their three positions e Clean Home middle position all cartridges disengaged used during cleaning cycle Color top position no cartridges disengaged used during color printing e Black lowest position C M and Y cartridges disengaged black engaged used during black only printing Tray1 Tray 2 solenoids This test activates and releases the Tray 1 and Tray 2 solenoids The Tray 1 solenoid is the lower solenoid Tray 2 is the upper solenoid You can remove the two securing screws and rotate the paper pickup unit to get a better view of the solenoids C9660 90901 Note C9660 90901 Print Stop test This diagnostic test can be used to isolate the cause of problems such as image formation defects and jams within the engine This test allows you to stop the paper anywhere along the printer s paper path The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position The test can also
199. hrough the printer and helps transfer toner onto the paper Figure 5 18 illustrates the ETB unit DC controller PCB ETBSNS ETB MOTOR 3 CONTROL signal ETB SPEED DETECTION signal ETB belt ETB feed roller N PS10 Transfer charging roller ETB driven roller Attaching roller Figure 5 18 ETB unit The physical components of the ETB unit are the following ETB belt ETB feed roller attaching roller transfer charging rollers four e ETB driven rollers three The ETB motor drives the ETB feed roller causing the belt to rotate All other rollers are driven by the belt rotation A sensor at the top of the ETB unit detects the ETB s speed The DC controller maintains a constant ETB feed speed to ensure good color registration 112 Image formation system C9660 90901 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 C9660 90901 Electrostatic latent image formation block The image formation process begins with the electrostatic image formation block in which an electrostatic latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum This block consists of three steps e primary exposure primary charging e laser beam exposure After the last step is completed areas of the drum surface that have not been exposed to the laser beam retain a negative charge The areas exposed to the laser are neutralized This neutralized image is called an electrostatic latent image because it is invisible to the eye Step 1 Primary
200. ia uae detto doe non dem etos e ee hen 263 EIO troubleshooting as uudesmesubcsuedesriseeieeutseadseressEeeckr 263 AUTOEXEC BAT standard configurations llle 264 Printer Job Language PUL commands 0000 cee eee 264 Control panel troubleshooting Wa 267 Printing a menu map scx seek deen eee n 3px AUR E LR ABAKA KAREN NAKA oe 267 Information MENU o Kama Redon RG Se ee MG DALE KALAT GE riw AA he Oe dc qued s 268 Paper handling menu a 268 Configure device menu eee ees 269 Diagnostics menu M rm 273 Service MENU iesca radai qo onm doe ghee Ge a pd aa OE SS a 274 Tools for troubleshooting 0 ee eee eens 275 Embedded Web server cece eee eee eee tenes 275 To access the embedded Web server 0 00 c cece eee eee 275 Printer Status and Alerts software ccc eee eee 278 Printer configuration page eee es 279 Supplies status page AA 280 Usage page APP AA 281 zs 3 ame BAG E ee E A EE E E Gas 282 Contents Ix x Contents DIAGNOSUCS sresti tee eee re eee AA 283 Diagnostics OWENA nba 6 aot KA MA eee eh ge ee ee ee TIT TE 283 Engine diagnostics ccc na 285 Individual diagnostic TESIS s uu naw oid ddd eke hemes Oat ee eee 287 Tesi PAGES cee m 292 Engine test page siei end ee dea iE Ee ges gar deardovu dane PA d E eee ees 292 Formatter test page eee eee eens
201. iagram PS4001 Cassette Paper Sensor Pickup Solenoid L4001 m m 1 1 o 2 2 o 2 O 2 o O D D N c o 588 12 j 2 yaaa o D is 3 229 56 he VION dd o avos 3 sss ais Am cuc 2 Inn i Sh nan oz 2 r3 8 LOW Jd n es 3 25 o V L v O O o O Uik o d O ig va6rorf gderovr Y Y Vievorr 916107 Y Y T N CO st No T N 2 LO O ZOOL 16700 Printer Od 19 04 U09 9q Paper Feeder Figure 7 30 500 sheet paper feeder circuit diagram 308 Diagrams C9660 90901 Parts and diagrams Chapter contents POGUCHON 2 218564 sh Lead Hamas AE 310 Ord rng DAMS AA AA 911 Supplies and accessories 311 Common fasteners ee ees 314 Illustrations and parts IiStS ee 315 Alphabetical parts list na nn anaana 342 Numerical parts list aaa 348 C9660 90901 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 309 Introduction The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts A table materials list follows each exploded assembly diagram Each table lists the reference designator item number the associated part number and the description of each part Note When looking for a part number pay careful attention to the voltage listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct printer model Note In this manual the abbreviation PCB stands for printed c
202. igned for proper toner adhesion Use only transparencies designed for HP Color LaserJet printers The moisture content of the paper is uneven too high or too low Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper Some areas of the paper reject toner Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper The letterhead you are using is printed on rough paper Use a smoother xerographic paper If this solves your problem consult with the printer of your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets the specifications for this printer The paper is excessively rough Use a smoother xerographic paper 246 Image formation troubleshooting C9660 90901 Note C9660 90901 Overhead transparency defects Overhead transparencies may display any of the image quality problems that any other type of media will cause as well as defects specific to printing on transparencies In addition because transparencies are pliable while in the print path they are subject to being marked by the media handling components Allow transparencies to cool at least 30 seconds before handling them e Inthe printer driver s Paper tab select Transparency as the media type Also make sure that the tray is correctly configured for transparencies e Check that the transparencies meet the specifications for this printer See Supported media specifications on page 29 For more information consult the HP LaserJet Printer Fam
203. igure 5 30 Color registration calibration Drum phase calibration The drum phase calibration aligns all four cartridge motors and their drive gears 122 Image formation system C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Image stabilization control As the print cartridge ages the toner and the photosensitive drum begin to deteriorate which can cause fluctuations in image density The printer accounts for this with image stabilization control There are two kinds of image stabilization control e image density calibration control e image halftone calibration control Each control operates as necessary Image density calibration control DMAX This control stabilizes image density by calibrating the values of the developing bias whenever one of the following events occurs when the printer is turned on e when a print cartridge is replaced e after a set number of pages have printed when the formatter sends an operation command Image density calibration consists of three steps 1 The DC controller forms density patterns for each color on the ETB using varying levels of developing bias 2 The color registration detection unit measures the image density of the density patterns formed on the ETB 3 The DC controller uses the density measurements to adjust the developing bias to obtain proper image density Image halftone calibration control DHALF This control measures halftone density output from the formatter and returns the measurem
204. ily Print Media Guide e Handle transparencies by the edges Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots and smudges Small random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages may be caused by transparencies sticking together in the output bin Try printing the job in smaller batches e The selected colors are undesirable when printed Select different colors in the software application or printer driver e Ifyou are using a reflective overhead projector use a standard overhead projector instead Print quality problems associated with the environment e The printer is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions Verify that the printing environment is within specifications See Environmental specifications on page 24 Print quality problems associated with jams Make sure that all media is cleared from the paper path e The printer recently jammed Print two to three pages to clean the printer e The media does not pass through the fuser causing image defects to appear on subsequent documents Print two to three pages to clean the printer However if the problem persists see the next section Print quality troubleshooting pages Use the built in print quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print quality problems 1 Press C to enter the MEHUS 2 Press W to highlight P asHOzTICs 3 Press to select PinsHosTICs 4 Press Y to highlight PG TROUBLESHOOTING 5 Press C to pr
205. in callout 2 from the fuser power supply cover oO 0 fF c N Remove the screw shown in callout 3 and then remove the fuser power supply cover callout 4 7 Remove the two screws shown in callout 5 and using needle nose pliers remove the four clips shown in callout 6 8 Disconnect the four connectors shown in callout 7 and remove the fuser power supply PCB 190 Internal components top C9660 90901 Figure 6 63 C9660 90901 Removing and replacing the fuser power supply PCB 2 of 2 Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the fuser power supply PCB connect the J203 connector last Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 191 Fuser drive unit To remove the fuser drive unit Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the left cover See page 148 Remove the control panel See page 153 O 0 fF W N From the left side of the printer at the top and front of the printer frame unhook the white tab that holds the hinge cover in place and remove the hinge cover This tab is located above and to the right of the black drum drive unit 7 Onthe DC controller disconnect the three connectors J1002 J1030 and J1034 See page 304 Remove the three screws shown in callout 1 Disconnect the connector shown in callout 2 this connector is hidden in the picture it is on the rear left side of the fuser drive unit 10 Remove the fuser drive unit f
206. in the printer causing damage to the printer Chapter 1 Printer description 31 Table 1 9 Printing on transparencies Description Specifications Electrical surface 2 0 to 15 by 10 ohms per square inch resistivity Fusing compatibility Materials must not discolor melt offset or release hazardous emissions when heated to 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second Caliper thickness 0 12 mm 0 0048 in to 0 13 mm 0 0052 in Glossy paper In either the software application or the driver select Glossy as the media type for media lighter than 105 g m 28 Ib bond select Heavy Glossy for media heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib bond or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper e You can also use the printer control panel to set the media type to 45 for the input tray you are using e Because this setting affects all print jobs it is important to return the printer to its original settings once your job has printed See the section in the online user guide on configuring input trays Note Hewlett Packard recommends using HP Color LaserJet Soft Gloss paper with this printer HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results If HP Color LaserJet Soft Gloss paper is not used with this printer print quality may be compromised Colored paper e Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper e Pigments used must be able to withstand the printer s fusing temperatu
207. in the printer frame 148 Covers and external components C9660 90901 Figure 6 8 Removing and replacing the left cover 1 of 2 Figure 6 9 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 149 Right cover To remove the right cover Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Open the front cover Remove the screw shown in callout 1 Disengage the two tabs shown in callout 2 JO OF FP Cc N a Tilt the top of the right cover away from the printer and remove it Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the right cover be sure to insert the two hooks that are along the bottom edge of the cover into the holes in the printer frame mi Figure 6 10 Removing and replacing the right cover 150 Covers and external components C9660 90901 Multi purpose tray Tray 1 To remove the multi purpose tray Remove Tray 2 from the printer and set it aside Open the front cover Unhook the two link arms shown in callout 1 A c N Flex the cover inward near the two link arms and remove the cover Figure 6 11 Removing and replacing the multi purpose tray C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 151 Front cover To remove the front cover 1 Remove the multi purpose tray See page 152 2 Unhook the two spring rods shown in callout 1 CAUTION The rods are under spring tension Use caution when removing them Tilt the tray up slightly to less
208. ines there is a mis match The current sheet of paper is ejected from the printer and the printer stops SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 Figure 5 34 Cassette paper size detection switches 128 Pickup feed system C9660 90901 Overhead transparency detection In order to prevent print quality problems the printer prints on overhead transparencies OHT at a slower speed than on plain paper The printer has a sensor above the paper leading edge sensor that detects an OHT and signals the DC controller to slow the motors accordingly The OHT sensor uses a light transmitter and receiver to detect the presence of plain paper When plain paper passes through the sensor the light is blocked and the OHT signal changes from low to high Consequently when the signal is not blocked but paper is detected by the paper leading edge sensor the DC controller determines the media to be an OHT Figure 5 35 illustrates this process OHT sensor OHTS um Vel shutter LO a 3 PT aen Paper leading edge detection sensor TOPI Sub r ller Registration roller Figure 5 35 Overhead transparency detection C9660 90901 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 129 Small size paper detection Because the printer s overhead transparency detection sensor is installed at the end of the feed path small size paper that does not pass the edge of the feed path can be mistaken for an OHT To avoid this problem the printer has a lever in front of the OHT detection sensor to
209. information Table 1 2 Model names and numbers Model name Model number HP Color LaserJet 4600 C9660A HP Color LaserJet 4600n C9692A HP Color LaserJet 4600dn C9661A HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn C9662A HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn C9663A C9660 90901 Chapter 1 Printer description 21 Power and regulatory information The identification labels on the rear of the printer also contain power rating and regulatory information as shown in Figure 1 3 CAUTION Converting the voltage on the printer can damage the printer Do not use any voltage other than the operating voltage Any attempt to convert operating voltages will void the product warranty for example attempting to change a 110V printer to a 220V printer Figure 1 3 Sample label 22 Identification PUER RATH za HAN GS CE Ge A Tanka Tn Onani FOR HOME DA OFFICE UBE Thee pia ona Wih LURIH eid then paloma dana rd i ERA chaptar 1 mub chapar J Dati em ml Canadan FRA mr GE eee MAM UF ALTAR ED August 87 aEMIIT FALRREN nz CR MOF hi m im RIES HO HITH IFA Sera Ma JPAE12945E biade in Japan Eg ERE 35 B C9660 90901 Site requirements The printer must be kept in a proper location to maintain the performance level that has been set at the factory In particular be sure that the environment adheres to the specifications listed in this chapter Below are recommendations for the printer location and placement Make sure
210. ing on special media Wan 31 Weight equivalence table 0 0 cee ee eee 35 Environmental Product Stewardship Program 36 Protecting the environment a 36 Regulatory statements ccc eee 38 FCC RegulatiOnS o oo oo wo co Wo cow nana anne aka 38 Safety information on ce Lae KANG deen ERE Red art d 39 Laser safety statement Wa 39 Material Safety Data Sheet 39 Toner Safety co co mocomocoXooWor cd combo sana 39 Canadian DOC regulationS Wa 39 EMI statement Korea ee ene 39 VCCI statement Japan aa 40 Laser statement of Finland 0 0 0 c eee aes 41 Declaration of Conformity 0 0 00 cece ee eee 42 C9660 90901 Chapter 1 Printer description 17 Printer features The HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printer pictured in Figure 1 1 has five models The HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer is the base model it contains 96 MB of SDRAM The HP Color LaserJet 4600n printer is the base model with an HP Jetdirect 610N print server this model is available only in Europe The HP Color LaserJet 4600dn printer is the base model with an HP Jetdirect 610N print server network card and automatic 2 sided printing The HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn printer is the base model with an HP Jetdirect 610N print server network card automatic 2 sided printing additional 500 sheet paper feed
211. ings tab Settings tab This tab allows you to configure the printer from your computer The Settings tab can be password protected If this printer is networked always consult with the printer administrator before changing settings on this tab The Settings tab contains the following pages Configure Device Allows you to configure all printer settings from this page This page contains the traditional menus found on printers using a control panel display These menus include Information Paper Handling Configure Device and Diagnostics Alerts Network only Allows you to set up to receive e mail alerts for various printer and supplies events E mail Network only Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up incoming and outgoing e mail as well as to set e mail alerts Security Allows you to set a password that must be entered to gain access to the Settings and Networking tabs Enable and disable certain features of the EWS Other Links Allows you to add or customize a link to another website This link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages These permanent links always appear in the Other Links area HP Instant Support Order Supplies and Product Support Device Information Allows you to name the printer and assign an asset number to it Enter the name and e mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer Language Allows you to determine the langu
212. int the pages The printer returns to the REAG state after printing the print quality troubleshooting pages Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 247 Understanding color variations The printed output might not match the computer screen and the colors printed on successive pages might not match While color variations are inherent in this printing method they can indicate changes in the printing environment print media or printer components Common causes of color variation The following list outlines the major causes of color variations between computers applications and output devices e Halftone patterns produced on monitors and the types of patterns used in the print jobs are different and might cause variations in the printed output e The printed output differs from the image on the monitor because the monitor and the print media have different reference values of black and white The monitor screen has charcoal gray for the black level and the white on the monitor screen is actually blue Black on the print media is limited only by the fill capability of the printer and most good quality paper has a very high white level In addition phosphor used in color monitors and toner have entirely different spectra characteristics and different color rendering capabilities Differences between output are common Blues generally match better than reds e The color of the ambient light changes the perception of color Fluorescent light lacks m
213. into Tray 2 or Tray 3 the media might skew Print media is binding or sticking together Remove media flex it rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over Reload media into the input tray Do not fan media Print media is removed before it settles into the output Reset the printer Wait until the page completely bin settles in the output bin before removing it When duplexing the print media is removed before Reset the printer and print the document again Wait the second side of the document is printed until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it Print media is in poor condition Replace the print media Print media is not picked up by the internal rollers Remove the top sheet of media If the media is from Tray 2 or Tray 3 heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib it may not be picked from the tray Print media has rough or jagged edges Replace the media Print media is perforated or embossed This media does not separate easily You might need to feed single sheets from Tray 1 Printer supply items have reached the end of their Check the printer control panel for messages useful life prompting you to replace supplies or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies Media was not stored correctly Replace the print media Media should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 237 Persistent jams If jams occur rep
214. ion Action o Media is loaded which is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size configured for the tray The printer senses a different media type in the media path than configured in the tray A printer error has occurred X Description O ND O RON unknown misprint error beam detect misprint error media feed error size no VSYNC error media feed error type ETB detection error feed delay error noise VSREQ If the incorrect size was selected cancel the job or press to access help Press A and W to step through the instructions If the incorrect type was selected cancel the job or press to access help Press A and W to step through the instructions Press 0 to continue or press for more information If the message persists turn the printer off and then back on Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 227 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message Deserpion laton 49 XXXX A critical firmware error has occurred Press CANCEL JOB to clear the PRINTER ERROR that caused the processor on the print job from the printer memory To continue formatter to abort operation This type 2 Turn the printer off and then back turn off then on of error can be caused by invalid print on commands corrupt data or invalid Try printing a job from a different operations In some cases electrical software application If the job noise in the cable can corrupt data prints go back to the first d
215. ion CD 46 Index service menu accessing 295 PIN 295 settings embedded Web server 276 locking 69 network security 69 site requirements 23 skewed images 245 small size paper detecting 130 software ordering 47 Printer Status and Alerts 278 Web Jetadmin 68 solenoid cassette pickup 127 component test 290 locating 301 multi purpose tray pickup 127 removing and replacing 161 sound intensity level 25 space requirements 23 special media printing 31 specifications electrical 24 environmental 24 media 29 preprinted paper 31 printer 25 site requirements 23 space requirements 23 spilled toner cleaning 72 washing off clothing 39 standby mode acoustic emissions 25 power consumption 24 status and alerts software 275 278 status e mail alerts 276 storing media 33 printer 24 supplies 25 subassemblies 44 supplies HP 73 locating 75 ordering 45 311 part numbers 312 replacing 73 142 status 276 status page 276 storing 25 supplies status page printing 280 Support Assistant HP 46 surface resistivity electrical 32 switch boxes 263 switches locating 298 technical reference guides 47 temperature heater control 97 ink requirements 31 maximum change rate 25 site requirements 23 24 storing supplies 25 test page printing 292 C9660 90901 C9660 90901 switch 298 theory of operation basic 90 engine control system 92 image formation system 106 laser scanner system 104 pap
216. ion fold somewhere on the ETB belt Cartridge drive motor assembly is damaged Attaching roller is defective Make sure the shuiter is clean moves smoothly and that the spring is in place If the shutter is damaged replace the paper pickup assembly Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged Clean the registration roller or registration sub roller if it is dirty If it is still dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the paper pickup assembly Check if the attaching roller is damaged If it is damaged replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now on page 294 The shutters in each print cartridge should open as you close the ETB If a shutter does not open replace that print cartridge Also check for a damaged shutter mechanism in the printer Inspect the cartridge drive assembly in each print cartridge If any are damaged replace the assembly for that print cartridge Make sure the attaching roller is clean and the spring is in place If the roller is damaged replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now on page 294 Paper leading edge sensor is defective Replace the pickup PCB DC controller PCB is defective 242 Paper path troubleshooting Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate
217. ion page 68 Network configuration C9660 90901 Setting network security on the printer This printer features control panel locking which allows network administrators to prevent users from changing certain printer control panel settings When a menu is locked unauthorized users trying to change settings in the printer control panel will receive the following message You can use HP Web Jetadmin software the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh or an ASCII escape sequence to perform this procedure For instructions on locking the printer control panel using either the HP Web Jetadmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh see the online Help for these utilities Locking the control panel You can prevent users from changing printer control panel settings by establishing a password and locking the printer control panel You can choose from multiple levels of security You can lock certain control panel menus allowing users to change the rest of the menus or you can lock all of the menus and you can even lock the CANCEL JOB button Levels of security Table 3 2 Printer security levels Lock setting Control panel items locked Service menu locked with factory set PIN LOW I O submenu System setup submenu Resets submenu Service menu locked with factory set PIN Configure Device menu including all submenus Diagnostics menu Service menu locked with factory set PIN Information menu Paper Handling menu Configur
218. ircuit board assembly Components described as a PCB may consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts such as cables and sensors 310 Introduction C9660 90901 Ordering parts Note Note C9660 90901 All standard part numbers are stocked and can be ordered from Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A or Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E For information about contacting HPCS A or HPCS E see page 45 Parts that have no reference designator or part number are not field replaceable and cannot be ordered Supplies and accessories The items listed in Table 8 1 are available through your local authorized HP dealer To find a dealer near you or if your local dealer is temporarily out of stock call the HP Customer Information Center at 800 752 0900 See page 47 for documentation part numbers Supplies and accessories are available directly from Hewlett Packard at the following numbers e U S 800 538 8787 e Canada 800 387 3154 Toronto 416 671 8383 e United Kingdom 0734 441212 Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone numbers Table 8 1 Supplies and accessories Accessories J6057A J6057 69001 HP Jetdirect connectivity card C4103A FIR pod C9667A Printer cabinet stand C9664A R96 5023 000CN Optional 500 sheet paper feeder and Tray 3 assembly Cables C2946A IEEE 1284 compliant parallel cable 3 m approximately 10 fe
219. irty worn or damaged Clean the feed roller If it is still dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the feed roller Drive gears are damaged Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged Cassette pickup solenoid is damaged Disconnect the connector for the cassette pickup solenoid from the DC controller PCB Measure the resistance between the cable side connectors J1020 13 and J1020 12 If the measured resistance is NOT about 160 ohms replace the cassette pickup solenoid Pickup motor is defective Replace the paper pickup drive assembly Paper pickup assembly is defective Replace the paper pickup assembly DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 240 Paper path troubleshooting C9660 90901 Jams in Tray 3 Table 7 8 Causes for jams in Tray 3 Separation tabs in the paper cassette are deformed Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray or replace the cassette Pickup roller is worn or damaged Replace the pickup roller Feed roller is dirty worn or damaged Clean the feed roller If it is still dirty after cleaning or if it is worn or damaged replace the feed roller Drive gears are damaged Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged Connecto
220. is E 0 856 Raon 2 mna bni Pa HER S 268 Printing submenu ers 269 Print quality submenu a5 22 uu docs sange ade Reach Rn oe dbs oan 270 System setup submenu Wa 271 I O submenu ta Kn apace aay DA an ee gf a Pan ya FAR org a See are 272 Resets submenu 1 ee eee eee tenes 272 DIAONOSUC MENU agawa can 9 9 dac eee ee eee oe es KAMA 213 Service menu ee eee eee 274 Sensor test letter codes AA 288 Tray 2 paper size codes eens 288 ONES paa BELA GE ceo Let eee ee at een es couse es KGG 298 Sensors 26 a sss ede AKNG na bana mena ba ea ee Rd 300 DONOINS a CT 301 Motors and fans 0 ccc eens 302 Supplies and accessories 4 a a na e040 cnm Yes ieee divs 311 Common fasteners 0 00 eee eee eee 314 FOB IOCAUONS aus ne naa Gawi eee ees ee ds eee ees E RO 316 External covers and panels 0 0000 ccc eee eet ee eee 317 Internal components 1 of 5 paaa maa ee casted Y vole ce ees Kama 319 Internal components 2 of 5 eee 321 Internal components 3 of 5 a Koo o c oo oo oo upon ewe Ree aed 323 Internal components 4 of 5 Wan 325 Internal components 9 of 5 3 2 1 ama Dep kr io KAKA ees Rer 327 Paper pickup drive assembly 0 000 eee ee 328 Drum drive assembly s v a a acc ed era nacer Oe eR ede edo 329 Disengaging drive assembly 0 0c cee eee 330 Fuser drive assembly cee nes 331 Cassette eee eee eens 332
221. is closed The wrong PIN was entered At least one supply item is incorrectly positioned in the printer and another supply item is missing incorrectly placed out or low Tray XX must be inserted or closed before the current job can be printed Description Action o The printer received a PJL file system 1 Printing may continue Turn the printer off and then back on If the message reappears there may be a problem with the software application Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the flash memory and try again To remove this message from the display turn the printer off and then back on To enable writing to the flash memory turn off write protection using HP Web Jetadmin To remove this message from the display turn the printer off and then back on Press 0 and then press for help Press M and W to step through the instructions Re enter PIN correctly After three incorrect PIN entries the printer will return to Ready Press 0 and then press for help Follow the instructions on the display to locate and replace the incorrect supply Press A and W to step through the instructions Press for detailed information Press A and W to step through instructions C9660 90901 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message Desorpton Taen INSTALL COLOR The cartridge is either not installed or Insert the cartridge or make sure CARTRIDGE not c
222. ithin specifications For example media Use media that meets specifications See that is too thick causes poor fusing Supported media weights and sizes on page 29 Fuser is not within nip width specifications Replace the fuser Fuser sleeve is scarred or damaged Replace the fuser Pressure roller is scarred or damaged Replace the fuser Thermistor is deteriorated Replace the fuser DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Distortion or blurring Table 7 33 Causes for distortion or blurring Color plane registration is out of specification Calibrate the printer from the Print Quality menu See Calibrate Now on page 294 ETB is defective If the ETB belt does not rotate smoothly replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now on page 294 ETB motor drive gear is worn or damaged Replace the ETB motor Drum motor drive gear is worn or damaged Replace the drum motor for the affected color Color registration detection unit is defective Replace the color registration detection unit Laser scanner unit is defective Replace the laser scanner for the affected color Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now on page 294 DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB
223. izes Allows you to configure the media size for tray 1 The appears default value is ANY TRAY 1 TYPE A list of available types Allows you to configure the media type for tray 1 The appears default value is ANY TRAY N SIZE A list of available sizes Allows you to configure the media size for Tray 2 or NS 2 0r 3 appears Tray 3 The default setting is the size detected by the guides in the tray To use a custom size move the switch in the try to custom TRAY N TYPE A list of available types Allows you to configure the media type for Tray 2 or N 2 or 3 appears Tray 3 The default is PLAIN 268 Control panel troubleshooting C9660 90901 Configure device menu The Configure device menu has several submenus These submenus allow you to change the printer s default printing settings adjust the print quality change the system s configuration and I O options and reset the printer to its default settings Printing menu The settings in the Printing menu affect only jobs without identified properties Most jobs identify all of the properties and override the values from this menu Table 7 40 Printing submenu Menem Values Deseripton COPIES 1 32000 Allows you to set the default number of copies DEFAULT PAPER SIZE A list of available sizes Allows you to set the default media size appears DEFAULT CUSTOM UNIT OF MEASURE Allows you to set the default size for any job without PAPER SIZE X DIM
224. l inline memory modules DIMM Printer stand Optional 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 that supports letter legal executive JIS B5 A4 and A5 sized media standard on HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn and 4600hdn printers Flash DIMM Fast InfraRed FIR pod Optional enhanced input output EIO network card standard on HP Color LaserJet 4600n 4600dn 4600dtn and 4600hdn printers FIR connection HP Web Jetadmin software Standard bidirectional parallel cable interface IEEE 1284 compliant Supplies status page contains information on toner level page count and estimated pages remaining No shake cartridge design Printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation Internet enabled supply ordering capabilities using embedded Web server or printer Status and Alerts C9660 90901 Identification Model and serial numbers The model number and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer The model number is alphanumeric such as C9660A for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 The serial number contains information about the country region of origin the printer version production code and the production number of the printer see Figure 1 2 WE WLETT Pacanna printer version n a production code country p region Serial No JPOB123456 of origin production number CERIN Made in Japan pacwane C966DA Figure 1 2 Model and serial number
225. lacing the laser scanner cover plate 1 of 2 181 Removing and replacing the laser scanner cover plate 2 of 2 181 Removing and replacing the left side laser scanner retaining bar left side of printer 1 012 182 C9660 90901 Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure C9660 90901 6 53 6 54 6 55 6 56 6 57 6 58 6 59 6 60 6 61 6 62 6 63 6 64 6 65 6 66 6 67 6 68 6 69 6 70 6 71 6 72 6 73 6 74 6 75 1 1 KZ 1 3 1 4 5 7 6 7 1 7 8 19 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 1 20 7 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 7 25 1 26 1 21 1 28 1 29 1 30 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 Removing and replacing the left side laser scanner retaining bar rear of printer 2 of 2 182 Removing and replacing the right side laser scanner retaining bar right side of printer 1 of 2 183 Removing and replacing the right side laser scanner retaining bar rear of printer 2 of 2 183 Removing and replacing the laser scanner units
226. lacing the multi purpose tray Wi 152 Removing and replacing the control panel 1 of 3 ca 153 Removing and replacing the control panel 2 of 3 Wan 153 Removing and replacing the control panel 3 013 Wa 154 Installing a new control panel overlay eee ee 154 Removing and replacing the DC controller shield a 155 Removing and replacing the paper pickup unit 1 Of 2 a 156 Removing and replacing the paper pickup unit 2 0f2 eee 156 Removing and replacing the paper pickup sensor PCB 1 of 2 aa 157 Removing and replacing the paper pickup sensor PCB 2 of 2 0 0 0 cee eee 157 Removing the cassette pickup rollers na 158 Replacing the cassette pickup rollers llli 158 Removing and replacing the paper pickup drive unit llle 159 Removing and replacing the multi purpose tray pickup roller and separation pad 1 of 2 160 Removing and replacing the multi purpose tray pickup roller and separation pad 2 of 2 160 Removing and replacing the solenoids llle 161 Removing and replacing the color registration detection unit 1 of 2 163 Removing and replacing the color registration detection unit 2 of 2 163 Removing and replacing the developing disengaging rod 0 cece ee 164 Reinstalling the developing disengaging rod 1 Of 2
227. lity meet customer requirements A Print the PQ troubleshooting pages to identify the problem Perform corrective actions C After meeting print quality requirements go to Step 6 Interface A Run a print job from the host system B Perform corrective actions Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 209 Troubleshooting power on When you turn on the printer if it does not make any sound or if the control panel display is blank check the following items Verify that the printer is plugged into an active electrical outlet with the correct voltage Verify that the on off switch is in the ON position Make sure the rear fan is running indicating the system is operational Verify that the firmware DIMM and the formatter are seated and operating properly Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards then try to turn the printer on again Make sure the control panel display is connected Check the fuses in the power supply If necessary replace the power supply O O N O OF FBP CQ N a If necessary replace the DC controller 210 Troubleshooting process C9660 90901 Printer error troubleshooting Note Note C9660 90901 The following tables explain messages that might appear on the printer control panel Alphabetical printer messages and their meanings are listed in Table 7 2 and numerical printer messages are listed in Table 7 3 Not all messages are described in the tables those messages that are not
228. lled by HP If customer schedules or delays HP installation more than 30 days after delivery warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration b software interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by HP c unauthorized modification or misuse d operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of 300 000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the subject of the claim and for damages for bodily injury or death to the extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective HP product TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE CUSTOMER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED I
229. ller shield To access and service many of the internal components you first need to remove the DC controller shield on the left side of the printer To remove the DC controller shield Remove the print cartridges and the ETB Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the left cover See page 148 Remove the 9 screws shown in callout 1 JO OC i QO N a A possible tenth screw might be located on the rear of the printer at the bottom of the DC controller shield callout 2 If a screw is present remove it 8 Remove the DC controller shield Figure 6 17 Removing and replacing the DC controller shield C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 155 Internal components front Paper pickup unit 1 Remove the DC controller shield See page 155 2 Move the ETB latch receptacles to the UP position Use a screwdriver to rotate them because they are stiff Remove the two screws shown in callout 1 Disconnect the connector J1020 shown in callout 2 from the DC controller PCB 5 Lift the paper pickup unit and pull it forward Guide the connector through the trough shown in callout 3 Figure 6 18 Removing and replacing the paper pickup unit 1 of 2 Figure 6 19 Removing and replacing the paper pickup unit 2 of 2 156 Internal components front C9660 90901 Paper pickup sensor PCB To remove the paper pickup sensor PCB Remove
230. ly for the indicated print cartridge Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Developing disengaging motor error 1 Reconnect the connectors J4024 and J1019 between the developing disengaging motor and the DC controller PCB Replace the developing disengaging drive assembly Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Turn the printer off and then back on Heseat the firmware DIMM making sure it is in the 168 pin slot J1 C9660 90901 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message besorpton Acton 64 PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 64 PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE ERROR For help press alternates with 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE ERROR To continue press D 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL For help press alternates with 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL To continue press D 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL To continue press 79 XXXX PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 8X YYYY EIO ERROR Scan buffer error One or more printer settings saved in the non volatile storage device is invalid and has been reset to its factory default Pressing the button should clear the message Printing can continue but there may be unexpected behavior X Description
231. maged Attaching roller is worn or damaged Replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now on page 294 High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Light color Table 7 18 Causes for one color printing light Poor contact in the transfer bias contacts between the Clean the contacts for the affected color If the ETB and the printer contacts are still dirty after cleaning or if they are damaged replace the contacts or the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now on page 294 Transfer charging roller is worn or damaged Replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now on page 294 Photosensitive drum is worn Replace the print cartridge for the affected color High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB Laser scanner unit is defective Replace the laser scanner for the affected color Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now on page 294 DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Dark image Table 7 19 Causes for dark images Image de
232. magenta drum motor M4 black drum motor M5 pickup motor M6 ETB motor M8 fuser motor SL 1 cassette pickup solenoid SL2 multi purpose tray pickup solenoid Figure 5 33 illustrates the pickup feed system which can be divided into three units e pickup feed unit from the point the paper is picked from the tray until it reaches the fuser e fuser delivery unit from the fuser to the output bin e duplex feed unit from the output bin to the registration shutter at the bottom of the ETB Fuser Delivery unit NE 3 C 3n Duplex feed unit cer 3 9 ID O j Pickup Feed unit Q Paper path for simplex printing Paper path for duplex printing Figure 5 33 Pickup feed system C9660 90901 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 127 Pickup feed unit At the bottom of the paper path the pickup unit picks individual pieces of paper from the trays Then the ETB carries the paper to the top of the paper path The sequence of events is as follows 1 The formatter sends a print command to the DC controller which rotates the pickup motor the drum motors the ETB motor and the fuser motor The cassette feed roller and registration roller rotate as the pickup motor starts to rotate 3 Paper is picked from the cassette or multi purpose tray A separation claw in the cassette prevents picking multiple sheets of paper A separation pad in the multi purpose tray prevents multiple sh
233. map from the printer control panel It also describes the control panel menus the items within each menu and the possible values for the menu items Troubleshooting tools help isolate the cause of printer failures This section includes explanations of the printer configuration page and the event log Diagnostics provides instructions on how to access and use the diagnostic tools incorporated into the printer Service menu provides procedures for entering the service menu and performing service oriented tasks These tasks include counts for entering the serial number service ID transfer unit maintenance fuser maintenance color page total page and clearing the event log Diagrams provides graphical locations and tables for the printer s internal assemblies and sensors Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 205 Troubleshooting process When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation the printer control panel alerts you of the situation This section contains a pre troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems e Use the pre troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps required to fix the problem e Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions The flowcha
234. mary charging rollers the toner charging rollers the developing cylinders the attaching roller and the transfer charging rollers Figure 5 7 shows the high voltage power supply circuit Developing cylinder High voltage power DC controller PCB supply PCB Primary charging roller photosensitive Transfer charging roller drum Toner charging roller ETB beli Primary charging high voltage generation circuit IC1012 CPU ak charging high voltage generation circuit r rrr generation circuit Attaching high voltage generation circuit Attaching roller Transfer high voltage generation circuit IC1015 am Developing ASIC high voltage Figure 5 7 High voltage power supply circuit 98 Engine control system C9660 90901 Low voltage power supply The low voltage power supply circuit converts the AC voltage that is input from the electrical outlet to DC power and delivers it to each load in the printer Figure 5 8 shows the low voltage power supply circuit including the amount of voltage supplied to each component The AC power is supplied to the low voltage power supply by turning on the power supply switch SW5 The AC power is converted to the DC power that the printer requires e 24 V goes to t
235. mbly Components described as a PCB may consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts such as cables and sensors 92 Engine control system C9660 90901 DC controller circuit The DC controller is responsible for controlling the print operation sequence for the printer The sequence of events is as follows 1 Power is turned on The low voltage power supply unit supplies DC power to the DC controller The CPU in the DC controller starts to control printer operations The printer enters the standby state O A O N Based on the print command and the image data input from the formatter the CPU sends a signal to drive the laser diode the motors and the solenoids Note See the general circuit diagram on page 307 for detailed information on the printer circuitry DC controller PCB ICTOO9 IC1010 i d memi Developing Pickup motor MK gt PE ul du M disengaging motor Cassette pickup solenoid Multi purpose tray pU ETB motor pickup solenoid Cassette paper sensor H K D i a rum motors Multi purpose tray paper u SM sensor EI a Paper leading edge peg IC1014 M sensor CPU TI F t OHT sensor H M Pe na Fuser paper sensor c d1r Drum home i H FT positon sensors Fuser delivery sensor H Le Delivery tray paper full pig U ETB speed sensor psa et U Developing disengaging Cassette paper size detection IC1012 sensor switch
236. move the screw shown in callout 1 and disconnect the connector shown in callout 2 3 To remove the cassette solenoid remove the screw shown in callout 3 and disconnect the connector shown in callout 4 Figure 6 27 Removing and replacing the solenoids C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 161 Color registration detection unit To remove the color registration detection unit 1 Open the top cover and the front cover 2 Remove the ETB Note To protect the ETB from damage always remove the ETB when removing the color registration detection unit 3 Remove the control panel See page 153 4 Disconnect the connector shown in callout 1 5 Remove the two screws shown in callout 2 6 Remove the screw shown in callout 3 this screw is located on the right side of the printer underneath the plate where the screws in callout 2 are located 7 Remove the control panel support assembly shown in callout 4 and then remove the color registration detection unit which is located behind the stay CAUTION Do not touch the lens for the color registration detection unit 162 Internal components front C9660 90901 Figure 6 28 Removing and replacing the color registration detection unit 1 of 2 Figure 6 29 Removing and replacing the color registration detection unit 2 of 2 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 163 Internal components left side Drum drive units To remove the developing disengaging rod Remo
237. ms might not be covered by the product s Hewlett Packard warranty Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems If the printer is not connected to an MS DOS based host proceed to Table 7 37 Communications check Table 7 37 Communications check Action Is your computer configured to These parameters are required to communicate with the printer the parameters described in Verify that the configuration of the computer s communications port the configuration instructions matches these parameters Note If these parameters are not set properly an error might display on the control panel EIO troubleshooting If the printer contains an optional HP Jetdirect print server and you cannot communicate with the printer over the network verify the operation of the print server Print a configuration page If the Jetdirect card does not appear under Installed personalities and options on the configuration page indicated by the arrow in Figure 7 5 see the troubleshooting section of the HP Jetdirect Print Server Software Installation Guide If the host system and printer are still not communicating replace the formatter PCB and the EIO card and reconfigure the printer If the problem persists a protocol analyzer might be needed to find the source of the problem HP LaserJet printers are not designed to work with mechanical switch box products without proper surge protecti
238. n The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray XX The tray switch is in the STANDARD position Close the tray Adjust the side and rear media guides against the paper If the media used is Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal sized the tray switch should be set to STANDARD Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel Reset the paper size in the paper handling menu To change media type press Use A and 15 to highlight the type then press c to select To change the media size to Letter A4 Executive B5 JIS A5 or Legal leave the tray switch in the STANDARD position To change the media size to other sizes move the tray switch to CUSTOM adjust the paper guides against the paper and close the tray Use A and y to highlight the media size then press 7 to select Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 221 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message TRAY XX lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt Size specified by user alternates with TRAY XX lt TYPE gt lt SIZE gt To change type press TYPE MISMATCH TRAY XX lt TYPE gt alternates with Ready To enter menus press D Unable to store job lt JOBNAME gt USE INSTEAD TRAY 2 lt TYPE gt SIZE TRAY 3 TYPE The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray XX The tray switch is in the CUSTO
239. n after an overnight idle period 75 seconds DMAX DHALF When you request calibration from the control panel Calibrate Now 280 seconds 4 minutes 40 seconds Table 5 5 Cleaning timing and duration Cleaning occurrence When the printer continuously prints with no idle period or spin down for 51 pages Duration either 5 seconds or 21 seconds 5 seconds is the most common DMAX DHALF CPR drum phase Type of cleaning primary and toner charging rollers At intervals of 90 and 140 pages The printer will finish printing the current job before cleaning 16 seconds ETB Chapter 5 Theory of operation 119 ETB cleaning During this step all toner particles that remain on the ETB are returned to the photosensitive drums in each print cartridge Figure 5 27 illustrates this step The ETB is automatically cleaned when the printer is turned on when the covers are closed and after printing a specified number of pages The DC controller applies negative bias to the photosensitive drums and either a positive or negative bias to the transfer charging rollers This creates a difference in potential between the photosensitive drums and the ETB Both positive and negative residual toner returns to the photosensitive drums e Negative potential waste toner Primary charging roller O Positive potential waste toner Waste toner nob E container Bk cartridge Developing and
240. n is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output or for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed Automatic or manual color adjustment The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment halftones and edge enhancements used for each element in a document For more information see your printer driver online Help Note Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing all color documents The Manual color adjustment option allows you to adjust the neutral gray color treatment halftones and edge enhancements for text graphics and photographs To access the Manual color options from the Color tab select Manual then Settings Manual color options Manual color adjustment allows you to adjust the Color or Color Map and Halftone options individually for text graphics and photographs Note Some applications convert text or graphics to raster images In these cases the Photographs settings will also control text and graphics Halftone options Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output You can select halftone settings for text graphics and photographs independently The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail e The Smooth option provides better results for large solid filled print areas It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations Choose this option when uniform and smooth area fills
241. n operational periods from the point when the printer is turned on until a print operation is completed and each motor stops rotating In the table below ETB stands for electrostatic transfer transport belt This component is described later in this chapter as are the other components mentioned in the table Table 5 1 Basic operation sequence Period From the time the power switch is turned on until the ETB cleaning is completed Purpose To clear a potential on the drum surface and to clean the ETB Remark During this period the printer checks the toner level and detects whether the cartridges are present The printer also executes the pulse width modulation adjustment color registration adjustment and image density calibration control as required STBY standby period From the end of the WAIT or LSTR period or last rotation until the formatter inputs a print command or until the power is turned off To keep the printer ready to print When the formatter sends a sleep command the printer enters PowerSave mode INTR initial rotations period From immediately after the formatter inputs a print command until the TOP signal is sent to the formatter To stabilize the photosensitive drum s sensitivity in preparation for a print operation PRINT print period From the end of the INTR period until the leading edge detection sensor detects paper and then turns off the t
242. n suorittaa ilman erikoistyokaluja VARO Mikali kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina nakymattomalle lasersateilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa Ala katso sateeseen VARNING Om laserprinterns skyddsholje 6ppnas da apparaten ar i funktion utsattas anvandaren for osynlig laserstralning Betrakta ej stralen Tiedot laitteessa kaytettavan laserdiodin sateilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 775 795 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser C9660 90901 Chapter 1 Printer description 41 Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP Color LaserJet 4600 4600n 4600dn 4600dtn 4600hdn Printer Model Number Including 500 sheet paper feeder C9660A C9692A C9661A C9662A C9663A Printer C9664A 500 sheet paper feeder Product Options ALL conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 950 1991 A1 A2 A3 A4 EN 60950 1992 A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 1 IEC 825 1 1993 A1 EN 60825 1 1994 A11 Class 1 Laser LED Product EMC CISPR 22 1997 EN 55022 1998 Class Bi EN 61000 3 2 1995 EN 61000 3 3 1995 EN 55024 1998 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B2 ICES 002 Issue 2 AS NZS 3548 1995 Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 7
243. n the printer has 5 MINUTES been inactive for an extended period 30 MINUTES 1 HOUR 2 HOURS 4 HOURS AUTO Sets the default personality to automatic switching PCL PCL or PostScript emulation PS O CLEARABLE N Sets whether a warning is cleared on the control WARNINGS JOB panel or when another job is sent AUTO CONTINUE ON Determines printer behavior when the system OFF generates an auto continuable error SUPPLIES LOW CONTINUE Sets low supplies reporting options STOP JOB STORAGE LIMIT 1 100 Sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs stored on the hard disk at the printer JAM RECOVERY AUTO Sets whether the printer will attempt to reprint pages ON after a jam OFF LANGUAGE A list of available Sets the default language languages appears Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 271 I O menu The I O menu allows you to configure the printer s I O options Table 7 43 1 O submenu Menem Values Desorption O TIMEOUT 5 300 Allows you to select the I O timeout in seconds PARALLEL INPUT HIGH SPEED Allows you to select the speed at which the parallel ADVANCED port communicates with the host and to enable or FUNCTIONS disable the bi directional parallel communication ElO X Possible values are Allows you to configure ElO devices installed in slot Where X 1 2 or 3 TCP IP 1 2 0f 9 IPX SPX APPLETALK DLC LLC LINK SPEED NOVELL Resets menu The Resets menu allows you to reset factory settings
244. nal 500 sheet paper feeder output bin printer control panel top cover front cover contains Tray 1 Tray 2 500 sheet standard tray Tray 3 500 sheet paper feeder optional on 4600 4600n and 4600dn models on off switch O N O oO A WO N access to print cartridges transfer unit and fuser 26 Printer assemblies C9660 90901 Figure 1 6 C9660 90901 Rear view HP Color LaserJet 4600 series shown with additional 500 sheet paper feeder Oo N O C FP N output bin on off switch Tray 3 500 sheet paper feeder optional on 4600 4600n and 4600dn models EIO connection quantity 3 memory access FIR Fast InfraRed connection parallel connection power connection Chapter 1 Printer description 27 Media requirements Selecting print media You can use many types of paper and other print media with this printer This section provides guidelines and specifications for selecting and using different print media Before purchasing any media or specialized forms in quantity verify that your paper supplier obtains and understands the print media requirements specified in the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide The guide is available through Hewlett Packard Customer Support HPCS See page 47 for ordering information lt is possible that media could meet all of the guidelines in this chapter and still not print satisfactorily This may be a result of abnormal characteristics of the printing envir
245. nd print cartridges can be ordered directly from Hewlett Packard See Chapter 8 for ordering information World Wide Web Printer drivers updated HP printer software and product and support information can be obtained from the following URL In the U S http www hp com support 1j4600 Printer drivers may be obtained from the following sites In China ftp www hp com cn support 1 4600 In Japan ftp www jpn hp com support 1j4600 In Korea http www hp co kr support lj4600 In Taiwan http www hp com tw support lj4600 or the local driver website http www dds com tw HP Service Parts Information Compact Disc This powerful CD ROM based parts information tool is designed to give users fast easy access to parts information such as pricing and recommended stocking lists for a wide range of HP products To subscribe to this quarterly service in the U S or Canada call 800 336 5987 In Asia Pacific call 65 740 4484 Parts identification and pricing information can also be checked via the World Wide Web at http www hp com go partsinfo HP Support Assistant Compact Disc This support tool offers a comprehensive online information system designed to provide technical and product information about HP products To subscribe to the quarterly service in the U S or Canada call 800 457 1762 In Hong Kong Indonesia Malaysia or Singapore call Mentor Media at 65 740 4477 Customer care reseller sales and service support ce
246. nel are lit Press A Press PAUSE RESUME The display should show HIF DISE LOAD Press A until SKIP CALIBRATION is highlighted o 0c Aa CQ Press C The printer will skip calibration and then continue its power on sequence Calibrate Now Use the following procedure to calibrate the printer whenever you replace the DC controller the ETB the drum drive motors the drum drive gears or a laser scanner 1 Press 2 to enter the FEHLS Press Ww to highlight CCHF IGURE DELICE Press to select OHE iGURE DEUICE Press Ww to highlight FEIHT GUALTT Press Oto select PzPHT GUPBLITY Press Y to highlight CALIERATE HOL Press CO to select CALIBRATE NOH O N Oa OF FP CQ N Wait for the printer to calibrate 294 Engine resets C9660 90901 Service menu Accessing the Service menu The Service menu is PIN protected for added security Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu When you select SERUICE from the list of menus you are prompted to enter your 8 digit PIN number The PIN for this printer is 04460002 Press A or Y until the first digit of the PIN is displayed Press C to save the digit The display will replace the digit with an asterisk Hepeat steps 1 and 2 until all eight digits are entered PR c N Press amp at any time to move to the previous digit Clear event log This item allows you to clear the printer s internal event log Total page count The page count stored in NVRAM and p
247. nlet soeed PS11 fuser delivery PS12 output bin full PS13 MP tray paper presence PS2 Tray 2 paper presence PS1 Tray 2 paper size SW1 SW2 SW3 0 0 0 0 0 7 see Table 7 48 ITIO mi ooui Door SW SW2 SW3 Tray 2 paper size switch arrangement Table 7 48 Tray 2 paper size codes Size code SW SW4 Switch state 4 Paper size Custom see note below Letter A5 Legal B5 JIS Executive A4 tray not installed Depressing all three switches of the Tray 2 paper size levers to cause the control panel to display the custom paper menu Press the amp button to return to the sensor diagnostic display 288 Diagnostics C9660 90901 WARNING Note C9660 90901 To toggle a sensor find and move the sensor flags in the following locations e A Remove Tray 2 The flag is located in the center paper inlet path of the paper pickup unit directly in front of right side white roller The flag is recessed above the registration shutter in the paper pickup unit The fuser might be hot wait 10 minutes for it to cool down e B Open the ETB and wait for the fuser to cool down The fuser inlet flag is in located at the front center of the fuser Access the flag from above the black print cartridge e C The fuser delivery flag is located at the upper center of fuser behind the fuser Caution label It is w
248. nsity is not adjusted correctly Decrease the density for each color Color registration detection unit is dirty Clean the lens on the color registration detection unit Color registration detection unit is defective Replace the color registration detection unit DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 254 Image defects C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Dark color Table 7 20 Causes for one color printing dark Poor contact in the drum ground primary charging bias and developing bias contacts of the high voltage PCB and the print cartridge Solution Clean the contacts on the cartridge for the affected color If they are still dirty after cleaning or if they are damaged replace the cartridge High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Completely blank image Table 7 21 High voltage PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Causes for a completely blank image Solution Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective All black or solid color Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Table 7 22 Causes for an all
249. nt log installed personalities and options memory security paper trays and options Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 279 Note Figure 7 8 Supplies status page The supplies status page illustrates the remaining life for the following printer supplies e print cartridges all colors e transfer unit e fuser To print the supplies status page Press to enter the MEMUS Press W to highlight INFORMATION Press C to select 141322837104 Press W to highlight PEIHT SUPPLIES alila oa Bm OW N Press to select PRIN SUPPLIES TIRUS The message PRINTING SUPPLIES STATUS appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the uat la status page The Kaka returns to the Ready state after printing the supplies status page If you are using non HP supplies the supplies status page will not show the remaining life for those supplies Supplies status page black print cartridge information cyan print cartridge information magenta print cartridge information yellow print cartridge information image transfer kit ETB information oO c A c N image fuser kit information 280 Tools for troubleshooting C9660 90901 Figure 7 9 C9660 90901 Usage page The usage page lists a page count for each size of media that has passed through the printer This page count includes the number of pages that were printed on one side the number that were printed on two sides duplexed and totals of the two printin
250. nter 8 Close the transfer unit and front cover Close the top cover and turn the printer on After a short while the control panel should display HEL TRANSFER KITS 9 Press Y to highlight E 10 Press C2 to reset the transfer unit count 11 Wait for the printer to calibrate 80 Replacing supply items C9660 90901 Replacing the transfer unit when it is not at end of life If you replace the transfer unit when it is not at the end of life for instance if it is defective you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the transfer unit count through the control panel To calibrate the printer do the following Press to enter the FEHL Press Ww to highlight CCHF IGURE DELICE Press CO to select CGHE IGLRE DEUICE Press Ww to highlight PEIHT GUALTT Press to select FEINT GUALITH Press Y to highlight CALIERATE Hok Press CO to select KEL IBERTE MOLL O N O C FP Q N Wait for the printer to calibrate To reset the transfer unit count do the following Press C2 to enter the HEHUS Press Y to highlight CCHF IGURE DELICE Press to select COMFIGURE DELICE Press W to highlight RESET SUPPLIES Press CO to select RESET SUPPLIES Press W to highlight HEN TRANSFER KIT o o ITN OO FWD O s D mM o O mM SD D O Press CO to select HEL TERNSFER KIT h U D o o O im Press to reset the transfer unit count mah C9660 90901 Chapter 4 Printer main
251. nter The Customer Care Reseller Sales and Support Center is available to assist resellers and service technicians To reach this support center call 1 800 544 9976 HP authorized resellers and support To locate authorized HP resellers and support call 1 800 243 9816 in the U S or 1 800 387 3867 in Canada HP service agreements Call 1 800 743 8305 in the U S or 1 800 268 1221 in Canada Other areas Outside of North America and Europe contact the local HP sales office for assistance in obtaining technical support for resellers and service technicians 46 Parts and supplies C9660 90901 Ordering related documentation and software Table 2 1 shows where to order related documentation and software Telephone numbers for the various sources are e Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A 1 800 227 8164 U S only e Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E 49 7031 14 2253 e HP Distribution Center HPD 661 257 5565 Fax 805 257 6995 Table 2 1 Related documentation and software Description Part Number HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide 5963 7863 HP JetDirect Print Server Administrators Guide 5971 3257 PCL PJL Technical Reference Package 5021 0330 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Getting Started Guide C9660 90902 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Service Manual C9660 90901 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Printer Service and Support CD ROM C9660 60107 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Pri
252. nter Self paced Training Kit C9660 67905 C9660 90901 Chapter 2 Service approach 47 Warranty statement Hewlett Packard warranty statement HP Color LaserJet 4600 4600n 4600dn 1 year limited warranty 4600dtn and 4600hdn printer 1 10 HP warrants HP hardware accessories and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period specified above If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or like new HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions for the period specified above due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free If HP is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of installation if insta
253. nterrupter TLP1241 Reference Figure 8 8 WG8 5362 000CN Photo interrupter TLP1241 Figure 8 11 WG8 5362 000CN Photo interrupter TLP1241 Figure 8 12 WG8 5362 000CN Photo interrupter TLP1241 Figure 8 16 WS3 5746 000CN Connector drawer Figure 8 6 XA9 1275 000CN Screw truss head M3x6 XA9 1276 000CN Screw machine with washer M3x8 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 353 354 Numerical parts list C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Index Numerics 2 sided printing jams 243 operation 133 A access denied 69 accessories cleaning 72 hard disk 20 list of 20 ordering 45 part numbers 311 acoustic emissions 25 adhesive labels printing 33 supported sizes 29 alerts e mail 276 alienation motor component test 290 removing and replacing 171 altitude 24 ammonia based cleaners avoiding 72 ASCII escape sequence 70 assemblies locating 26 remanufactured 46 replacing 44 atmospheric pressure 25 attaching rollers locating 112 AUTOEXEC BAT 264 B born on date 296 C cables part numbers 311 calibrate now 294 calibration bypassing 294 color registration 122 density 123 halftone 123 caliper transparencies 32 capacity circuit 24 input trays 29 cardstock printing 32 cartridge fan function 95 removing and replacing 197 cassette jams 240 paper pickup rollers removing and replacing 158 paper sensor locating 127 paper size detection switches locating
254. od See page 164 2 Remove the eight screws shown in callout 1 and remove the four drum gear grounding plates Note that the grounding plates and drive gears for the cyan and magenta drum drive units have longer shafts than for the yellow and black drum drive units 3 Remove the four drum drive gears shown in callout 2 De y Figure 6 33 Removing and replacing the drum drive gears Note Calibrate the printer after removing and replacing any of the drum drive gears See Calibrate Now on page 294 166 Internal components left side C9660 90901 Note C9660 90901 To remove the drum home position sensors 1 2 3 Remove the drum drive gears See page 166 Disconnect the four connectors shown in callout 1 Push each drum home position sensor holder behind the connectors shown in callout 1 toward the rear of the printer and flex it to remove the projection Remove the sensor Disengage the two tabs holding each drum home position sensor in its holder and remove the sensors Figure 6 34 Removing and replacing the drum home position sensors Calibrate the printer after reassembling the drum drive unit See Calibrate Now on page 294 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 167 To remove the drum drive motors 1 Remove the drum drive gears See page 166 2 From the front of the printer release the tab that holds the black interlock cover in place callout 1 and then remove the interlock cover 3 Remove th
255. of paper The back non printed side of the paper is dirty See Table 7 24 on page 256 Dirt on front of paper The front printed sided of the paper is dirty See Table 7 25 on page 256 Vertical lines Vertical lines are printed See Table 7 26 on page 256 White vertical lines White vertical lines appear in the image See Table 7 27 on page 257 Horizontal lines Horizontal lines are printed See Table 7 28 on page 257 White horizontal lines White horizontal lines appear in the image See Table 7 29 on page 257 Missing color One of the four toner colors is not printed See Table 7 30 on page 257 Blank spots The image has blank spots See Table 7 31 on page 258 Poor fusing Toner is loose on the printed image See Table 7 32 on page 258 Distortion or blurring The image appears distorted or colors seem out of alignment See Table 7 33 on page 258 Smearing The image is smeared or dirty See Table 7 34 on page 259 Misplaced image The image is placed incorrectly on the page Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 253 See Table 7 35 on page 259 Light image Table 7 17 Causes for light images Image density is not adjusted correctly Increase the density for each color Poor contact in the attaching bias contacts between Clean the contacts Replace them if they are still the ETB and the high voltage PCB dirty or are da
256. oller Figure 8 14 5 assembly RH2 5471 000CN Cable flat Figure 8 8 2 RH7 1490 000CN Fan cartridge Figure 8 6 13 RH7 1491 000CN Fan formatter Figure 8 6 14 RH7 1494 000CN Motor M7 developing disengaging Figure 8 11 4 stepping RH7 1495 000CN Motor M6 ETB DC 24 volt brushless Figure 8 16 2 RH7 1495 000CN Motor M8 fuser DC brushless 24 volt Figure 8 12 5 RH7 5319 000CN Solenoid Figure 8 9 2 RS6 2510 000CN Spring tension Figure 8 8 12 RS6 2511 000CN Spring tension Figure 8 6 5 RS6 2511 000CN Spring tension Figure 8 7 7 RS6 2537 000CN Spring tension Figure 8 4 12 RS7 0135 000CN Cam gear 66T Figure 8 8 11 RS7 0136 000CN Gear 29T Figure 8 8 8 RS7 0137 000CN Gear 2001 magenta and cyan Figure 8 4 10 RS7 0138 000CN Gear 2001 black and yellow Figure 8 4 11 RS7 0139 000CN Gear 17T Figure 8 4 15 RS7 0176 000CN Gear 30T Figure 8 10 3 RS7 0179 000CN Gear 16T 128T Figure 8 11 3 VD7 0216 301CN 110 volt Fuse 125 volt 6 3 amp Figure 8 8 19 VD7 0644 001CN 220 volt Fuse 250 volt 4 amp VD7 1731 502CN 110 volt Fuse 250 volt 20 amp Figure 8 8 20 VD7 1838 001CN 220 volt Fuse 250 volt 8 amp WC2 5452 000CN Switch cassette paper size Figure 8 5 9 WC4 5169 000CN Microswitch front cover Figure 8 6 3 WG8 5362 000CN Photo interrupter TLP1241 Figure 8 8 9 352 Numerical parts list C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Table 8 23 Numerical parts list continued Part number WG8 5362 000CN Description Photo i
257. oller first If the roller is still dirty after cleaning or if it is damaged replace the indicated part Letter codes before the roller names in Table 7 36 correspond to the letters at the top of the repetitive defects ruler in Figure 7 3 Not all rollers are shown in the ruler Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers Instead rub the roller with lint free paper If dirt is difficult to remove rub the roller with lint free paper dampened with rubbing alcohol Table 7 36 Repetitive defect spacing A toner charging roller Distance Type of defect Replacement part print cartridge B developing cylinder defect on front of paper print cartridge C primary charging roller blank spots print cartridge D toner feed roller print cartridge E media attaching roller defect on front of paper ETB F fuser pressure roller poor fusing fuser G photosensitive drum or transfer rollers center to center distance Replace any print cartridges that have a damaged photosensitive drum Replace the ETB H photosensitive drum 94 mm defect on front of paper blank spots print cartridge J fuser sleeve 107 mm poor fusing fuser cassette feed roller 54 mm defect on front of paper cassette cassette feed sub roller 44 mm defect on back of paper cassette registration roller 54 mm defect on back of paper paper pickup assembly re
258. on llle 122 Drum phase calibration hagas ma wk oe e CREE cia an eR Rh s Re Bah 122 Image stabilization control llle 123 PICKUP CEO System no most ew GANAN Ka bud ERE 9 Len ON SUR Rand 125 zioni P 128 Fuser delivery Ultra ab GERA a chm d en Que dete Dos d RS em End ned 132 Duplex feed unit ca ono 02 Lon S ees ob wh beens Wana Gadd x AG 133 500 sheet paper feeder 0 0 eee nee es 134 Pickup and feed operations na 135 Contents vii viii Contents 6 Removal and replacement jnre C aoe oe ad acne dr ee an ae oa dre eee ee be ae eds 139 Removal and replacement strategy cc eee 139 Repair NOUCES 4 wind marka maa ek LA rdi ara ro ah boa di mr bed MAY 139 Caution regarding electrostatic discharge ESD 139 Reguired tools M m 140 Types Of SCTEWS a uos 200 koh gor E BKA WA NG KALA KA KM 3L ABA ol EO as 141 SUDDIICS APA AAP PDA 142 Print cartridges and ETB us a ua dr bd argen sana nines AA AA 143 Covers and external components cc eee eee 144 Rear COVE 4 cae AA MG bobs BNG AE AKALA ATE KAAGAD OR Ea ne AT HA Rese 144 TOD COVO akte ente PAA 145 Rear top COVOD a as hrs PRA SE PAR she dee dense DBA BUKANA hn SUP RE 146 LOM COVO babon dA 2 59 13 9 ML eed E HER we ac Eric US dde d 148 pisce T OV CT
259. on LaserJet 4600 During printing During standby During PowerSave Off Minimum recommended circuit capacity for typical product When the printer is in standby mode it continues to consume a minimal amount of energy Note This information is preliminary and might not be current Please see http www hp com support 4600 for current information Environmental specifications Keep the printer within the environmental conditions shown in Table 1 4 for optimum performance Table 1 4 Environmental specifications Item Operating Temperature Recommended 171025 C 69 lO 77 F Allowed 10 to 30 C 50 to 86 F Humidity Recommended 30 to 70 RH Allowed 1096 to 8096 RH Altitude Allowed 0 to 2600 m 0 to 8530 ft 24 Site requirements C9660 90901 Supply storage requirements The life of supplies is greatly affected by their storage environment Use Table 1 5 to determine the shelf life of sto red supplies Table 1 5 Supply storage requirements Item Storage time Storage condition Temperature 2 5 years Normal maximum of 0 to 35 C 32 to 95 F 18 days Severe maximum of High 35 to 40 C 95 to 104 F Low 0 to 20 C 32 to 4 F Maximum temperature change rate 40 to 15 C 104 to 59 F within 3 minutes 20 to 25 C 4 to 77 F within 3 minutes Humidity 2 5 years Normal maximum of 35 to 85 RH 18 days
260. on These devices generate high transient voltages that cause permanent damage to the formatter PCB This circumstance is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printer configuration page Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 263 AUTOEXEC BAT standard configurations Parallel DOS commands Ensure that the AUTOEXEC BAT file contains the following statements for parallel interface communications MODE IPT1 P For MS DOS version 4 0 and above MODE IPT1 B Note This example assumes that you are using parallel printer port LPT1 If you are using LPT2 or LPT3 replace LPT1 in the example with the appropriate printer port Printer Job Language PJL commands See the HP Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual for a complete description of PUL commands This manual is available with the HP PCL PJL Reference Set on CD ROM part number 5021 0337 PJL Enter This command enables the specified printer language If the printer does not receive this command it enables the default language This ensures the correct operation applications that do not support PJL The command syntax is PJL Enter LANGUAGE PCL PostScript lt CR gt lt LF gt UEL universal exit language This command also referred to as the universal exit language command terminates the current printer language and returns control to PJL It performs the following actions e Prints all data received before this command
261. on This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions it may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase separation between equipment and receiver e Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located e Consult your dealer or an experienced radio TV technician Note Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules 38 Regulatory statements C9660 90901 Safety information WARNING Note Figure 1 7 C9660 90901 Laser safety statement The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since 1 August 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States The printer is certified
262. onal 500 sheet paper feeder C9660 90901 Troubleshooting Chapter contents Introduction cs acess end SErEIESSES 54662065 53505 2953 an 3 205 Troubleshooting process AA 206 Pre troubleshooting checklist 207 Troubleshooting flowchart AA 208 Troubleshooting power on aa 210 Printer error troubleshooting 0 000 cee eee ees 211 Status messages 0 aa 211 Warning messages ees 211 Error messages 4a 211 Critical error messages es 211 Alphabetical printer messages 212 Numerical printer messages runs 223 Paper path troubleshooting llslllssn 234 GING ade Ona en Se La ena At 234 Jam locations WWW 234 Jam locations by error message 235 Paper jam recovery a 236 Avoiding paper jams cc ees 237 Persistent JAMS cee eee 238 Paper transport troubleshooting 0000 eee eee 244 Multiple pages are fed an 244 Paper is wrinkled or folded 0 0 00 cee eee 244 Paper is skewed 0 2 cc eee 245 Image formation troubleshooting luus 246 Print quality problems associated with media 246 Overhead transparency defects 247 Print quality problems associated with the environment 247 Print quality
263. oner particles used in this product might be too fine for effective vacuuming and could result in damage to conventional vacuums A vacuum specifically designed for cleaning toner can be used if it is capable of filtering fine particles 5 microns in diameter 72 Cleaning the printer and accessories C9660 90901 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items CAUTION C9660 90901 You can identify supply items by their labeling and their blue plastic handles For instructions on installing supplies see the installation guides supplied with each supply item The following table lists the approximate replacement intervals and part numbers for printer supply items and the control panel messages that prompt you when it is time to replace each item Table 4 2 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items Supply item Printer message Expected Ppproxinate Part number life time period Black K print AA 9 000 pages 2 7 months 6825A001CN see Table 8 1 Cyan C print cartridge 8 000 pages 2 7 months 6824A0001CN see Table 8 1 Magenta M print cartridge 8 000 pages 2 7 months 6823A001CN see Table 8 1 Yellow Y print cartridge Image Transfer kit ETB Image Fuser kit REPLACE FUSER KI 8 000 pages 2 7 months 6822A001CN see Table 8 1 120 pad 40 months RG5 6484 000CN pages see Table 8 1 7 150 000 50 months RG5 6493 000CN pages 110V RG5 6517 000CN 220V se
264. onment or of other variables over which Hewlett Packard has no control for example extremes in temperature and humidity Hewlett Packard recommends testing any media before buying it in large quantities CAUTION Using media that does not conform to the specifications listed here and in the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide can cause problems that require service This service is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements Media specifications For optimum results use conventional 75 g m 20 Ib xerographic paper Verify that the paper is of good quality and is free of cuts nicks tears spots loose particles dust wrinkles curls or bent edges Avoid fanning the print media before loading it into the paper trays 28 Media requirements C9660 90901 Supported media weights and sizes Table 1 8 shows the media types and sizes supported by the printer and the printer accessories Table 1 8 Supported media specifications Tray Supported media Media specifications Capacity Tray 1 Paper 60 to 163 g m 100 sheets of 75 g m A4 Letter 16 to 43 Ib 20 Ib paper Legal Executive JIS B5 A5 Do not load more than the Custom maximum stack height of Minimum size 10 mm 0 6 in 76 by 127 mm 3 by 5 in Maximum size 216 by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 in Transparencies 0 13 mm 5 mil maximum stack height of A4 Letter 10 mm 0 6 in Glossy film 0 13 mm 5 mil maximum stack height of A4 Letter 10 mm
265. or monochrome 1 2 speed Gloss 1 mode glossy paper full color monochrome 1 3 speed Gloss 2 mode glossy paper full color monochrome 1 3 speed Gloss film mode glossy film full color monochrome 1 3 speed Envelope mode envelope full color monochrome normal Thick paper mode thick paper full color monochrome normal Label paper mode adhesive labels full color monochrome 1 2 speed Auto mode plain paper OHT full color monochrome automatically adjusts for media The DC controller determines a media mismatch ejects the media and stops the printer in the following situations e when OHT is detected and the printer is set to either thick paper or gloss mode e when plain paper is detected and the printer is set to OHT mode However if the printer is set to plain paper mode and OHT is detected the DC controller will automatically switch the printer to OHT mode and printing continues normally Chapter 5 Theory of operation 131 Fuser delivery unit The fuser delivery unit consists of the fuser which melts the toner and presses it onto the paper and the delivery unit which feeds the paper into the output bin The sequence of events is as follows 1 The ETB carries a sheet of paper with transferred toner into the fuser 2 The fuser motor adjusts its speed to maintain even tension on the paper as i
266. or items that could be causing the damage e e If the customer is using non HP supplies try replacing those supplies with genuine HP supplies to see if the problem goes away e If necessary instruct the customer on proper media storage correct loading technique and printer operation Make sure the customer knows not to grab paper in the output bin during duplex printing Paper path checklist I Verify that media is correctly loaded in the input trays and that all length and width guides are set correctly LJ Clean the printer Toner and paper dust in the paper path can inhibit free movement of media through the printer and can block the sensors LJ Use the paper path test in the Diagnostic menu to vary the input selections of the printer to determine if the problem is associated with a particular area of the printer LI Worn rollers or separation pads can cause multifeeds Check the condition of the pickup rollers and separation pads Bent separation tabs on the front corners of the input trays can cause misfeeds and multifeeds Replace the tray if necessary LI Defective paper tray switches can cause jams by communicating the wrong paper size to the formatter LI Defective paper sensors along the paper path might signal a false jam I Scraps of media left in the paper path can cause intermittent jams Always check that the paper path is clear when cleaning the printer and when clearing jams Also remove the fuser and carefully c
267. orrectly installed in the printer the cartridge is fully seated Press for detailed information alternates with Press A and y to step through the instructions For help press If the error persists replace the cartridge Verify that the connectors between the memory tag antenna memory controller board and the DC controller are seated properly Replace the antenna PCB for the indicated color Replace the memory controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 INSTALL FUSER The fuser is either not installed or not Insert the fuser or make sure the For help press correctly installed in the printer installed fuser is fully seated Press for detailed information Press A and vy to step through the instructions If the error persists verify that fuser connector J4034 is good replace it if necessary Replace the fuser assembly Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 INSTALL SUPPLIES At least one supply item is missing or Press and then press for For status press is not correctly seated in the printer help and another supply item is missing Follow the instructions on the incorrectly placed out or low Insert display to locate and replace the the supply item or make sure the missing or incorrect supply installed supply item is fully seated Press A
268. ote Printer mode The HP Jetdirect print server supports Novell Directory Services NDS as well as bindery modes For more information see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide For Windows 95 98 ME NT 4 0 2000 and XP systems use the printer installation utility for printer setup on a NetWare network 64 Enhanced I O EIO configuration C9660 90901 Note C9660 90901 Windows and Windows NT networks For Windows 95 98 ME NT 4 0 2000 and XP systems use your printer installation utility for printer setup on a Microsoft Windows network The utility supports printer setup for either peer to peer or client server network operation AppleTalk networks Use the HP LaserJet Utility to set up the printer on an EtherTalk or LocalTalk network For more information refer to the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrators Guide included with printers equipped with the HP Jetdirect print server LocalTalk configuration The LocalTalk interface enables you to print directly from a stand alone Apple Macintosh computer or from a Macintosh computer on a LocalTalk network For specific information on configuring the computer and printer to print through a LocalTalk interface refer to the printer s getting started guide and the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrators Guide For LocalTalk configuration the DIN 8 printer cable must be connected to the printer port of the Macintosh computer LocalTalk network configuration To
269. otor startup error fuser motor rotation error print cartridge motor startup error print cartridge motor rotation error ETB motor startup error ETB motor rotation error developing disengaging motor startup error developing disengaging motor rotation error USO D OK DN O O Description no color black cyan magenta yellow zOoxoc No system was found Turn the printer off and then back on This message might also appear if the transfer unit is missing or incorrectly installed Ensure that the transfer unit is correctly installed ETB motor error 4 Clean the ETB unit intermediate connector J4017 If the connector is damaged replace it Reconnect the connetors J4022 for the ETB motor J4017 between the ETB and the printer and J4014 on the DC controller PCB Replace the ETB motor Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Fuser motor error 4 Reconnect the connectors J4030 for the fuser motor and J1002 on the DC controller PCB Replace any damaged parts Replace the fuser drive assembly Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Print cartridge motor error Reconnect the print cartridge connector on the DC controller PCB J1013 for cyan J1031 for magenta J1032 for yellow and J1033 for black Replace the drum drive assemb
270. ou to optimize certain parameters for all jobs BACKGROUND rather than optimizing by media type TRANSFER RESTORE OPTIMIZE CALIBRATE NOW Executes all printer calibrations DMAX DHALF color plane registration and drum phase adjustment 270 Control panel troubleshooting C9660 90901 C9660 90901 System setup menu The System setup menu allows you to make changes to general printer configuration default settings such as PowerSave Time printer personality language and jam recovery Table 7 42 System setup submenu UU Desiplon JOB STORAGE LIMIT 1 100 Sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs stored on the hard disk at the printer JOB HELD TIMEOUT COLOR MONO MIX TRAY BEHAVIOR POWERSAVE TIME PERSONALITY Sets the period of time that the system keeps files in job storage before deleting them from the queue AUTO AUTO will reset the printer to the factory default MOSTLY COLOR setting which is MOSTLY COLOR PAGES MOSTLY COLOR PAGES will exhibit the NEVER MOSTLY BLACK SWITCH behavior to maximize performance PAGES MOSTLY BLACK PAGES will exhibit the LOOK AHEAD FIRST behavior to improve cost per page as much as possible while minimizing impact to performance USE REQUESTED Allows you to specify settings for the tray selection TRAY behavior This setting allows you to configure the MANUALLY FEED trays to behave like trays in some previous HP PROMPT printers 1 MINUTE Reduces power consumption whe
271. parallel cable 52 Unpack the printer C9660 90901 Unpacking the printer Note Save all the packing materials in case you need to repack and transport the printer at a later date WARNING The printer weighs approximately 36 kg 80 Ib HP recommends having two or more people lift or move the printer 1 Donotcut the straps Open the top flaps of the packing box Detach the straps from the top flaps and lay them on the floor A UK oF 2 Lift the box frame up and off the printer 3 If the printer has an optional 500 sheet paper feeder it is packaged on top of the printer Lift the 500 sheet paper feeder from the package and place it in the prepared location C9660 90901 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 53 4 Remove the shipping blocks accessory packs and inner cardboard frame that surrounds the printer 5 Lift the printer from the packing pallet and place it in the prepared location Two people must lift and move the printer 6 If you are using an optional 500 sheet paper feeder align the printer with the guidepins on top of the 500 sheet paper feeder 54 Unpack the printer C9660 90901 7 Remove the packing tape from the front and rear of the printer 8 Using the side handles open the top cover Firmly lift the two green handles on either side of the fuser Lift the fuser cover completely and pull on either of the orange tabs to remove the fuser packing tape and plastic shipping locks Close the f
272. place the fuser Solution Replace the print cartridge for the affected color ETB belt has horizontal scars Missing color Table 7 30 Causes for a missing color Poor contact in the developing bias contacts of the high voltage PCB and the print cartridge Replace the ETB Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now on page 294 Solution Clean the contacts If they are still dirty after cleaning or if they are damaged replace the print cartridge or the high voltage contacts Replace the high voltage PCB Primary charging roller is defective Replace the print cartridge for the missing color Laser scanner unit is defective Replace the laser scanner for the missing color Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now on page 294 High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 257 Blank spots Table 7 31 Causes for blank spots High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Poor fusing Table 7 32 Causes for poor fusing Media is not w
273. printer e Do not use paper with irregularities such as tabs or staples e Donot use letterhead paper with low temperature dyes or thermography Preprinted forms or letterhead must use inks that can tolerate temperatures of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Do not use any media that produces hazardous emissions or that melts offsets or discolors when exposed to 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Do not use transparencies designed for use with Inkjet printers or other low temperature printers Use only transparencies that are specified for use with HP Color LaserJet printers Printing on special media Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media e For optimum results use conventional 75 g m 20 Ib xerographic paper e Verify that the paper is of good quality and free of cuts nicks tears spots loose particles dust wrinkles curls or bent edges Transparencies When printing on transparencies use the following guidelines e Handle transparencies using the edges Oils from your fingers can remain on the transparency and can cause print quality problems e Use only overhead transparencies recommended for use in this printer Hewlett Packard recommends using HP Color LaserJet Transparencies with this printer HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results Table 1 9 describes the recommended specifications for transparencies Transparencies not designed for LaserJet printing will melt
274. printer is calibrating or cleaning it will pause printing For most calibrations and cleanings the printer will not interrupt a print job but will wait for the job to complete before calibrating or cleaning Table 5 4 shows when the printer calibrates the duration of the calibration and the type of calibration that occurs Table 5 5 shows when the printer cleans and the duration of the cleaning The sections that follow discuss calibration and cleaning in more detail Table 5 4 Calibration timing and duration Calibration occurrence When you turn the printer on Duration 75 seconds for calibration but because of other initialization activities the printer takes a total of 2 minutes to be ready for printing Type of calibration DMAX DHALF When you install one or more print cartridges that have not previously been installed in the printer 150 seconds 2 minutes 30 seconds DMAX DHALF color plane registration CPR After 50 pages have printed since installing a print cartridge The printer will finish printing the current job before calibrating 75 seconds DMAX DHALF After 1000 pages have printed since the last calibration The printer will finish printing the current job before calibrating 75 seconds DMAX DHALF After 8 hours since the last calibration but not while the printer is in PowerSave mode Typically this calibration occurs on the first job or control panel interactio
275. problems associated with jams 247 Print quality troubleshooting pages 247 Understanding color variations 248 Color selection process 0 0 eee eee ee 248 Matching COlOrS AA 249 Using COIT see kurz oo ate PA 249 Color options 02an ote gee oe RE pM e Ts 250 Adjusting color balance 0 0 00 cece eee 252 Image defects s ago eaten repe PETGd EAT SERIES Pd s 253 Repetitive defects troubleshooting LLL 260 Interface troubleshooting lille 263 Communications checks 0 0 cee eee eee 263 EIO troubleshooting a 263 AUTOEXEC BAT standard configurations 264 Printer Job Language PJL commands 264 Control panel troubleshooting Aa 267 Printing a MENU map 23213 don ge ee m os 267 Information menu llle 268 Paper handling menu inn 268 C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 203 204 Configure device menu 2 ee es 269 Diagnostics menu ssh one wo 4 AA AA 273 Service MENU 1 eee ees 274 Tools for troubleshooting iii 275 Embedded Web server 0 00 cece eee eens 275 To access the embedded Web server 275 Printer Status and Alerts software 278 Printer configuration page 279 Supplies status page 00 0 280 Usage page bod oat hecho ak TT TT CC
276. r 4 Printer maintenance 83 Printer memory The printer has five dual in line memory module DIMM slots Note For maximum flexibility in DIMM support the formatter is designed with four 168 pin DIMM slots and a fifth 100 pin DIMM slot Due to technical limitations only four DIMMs can be loaded at a time so the fifth DIMM slot 100 pin is logically the same as the fourth DIMM slot 168 pin The system can only have a DIMM installed on the fourth DIMM slot 168 pin provided that no DIMM is installed in the fifth DIMM slot 100 pin and vice versa Use these DIMM slots to upgrade the printer with e more printer memory DIMMs are available in 64 128 and 256 MB e flash memory DIMMs available in 4 MB unlike standard printer memory flash DIMMs can be used to permanently store downloaded items in the printer even when the printer is off e DIMM based accessory fonts macros and patterns other DIMM based printer languages and printer options Note Single in line memory modules SIMMs used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with the printer Before ordering additional memory print a configuration page to see how much memory is currently installed 1 oa A O N 84 Printer memory Press to enter the MEHUS Press Y to highlight 14202147108 Press to select HFGRMAT ION Press Y to highlight PRIHT COMEIGUEBTIDH Press CO to select PRINT COHPFIGUEBHTIOMN C9660 90901 Installing memory and font DIM
277. r removed from the laser scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes Never operate the printer with any parts removed The sheet metal parts can have sharp edges Be careful not to cut yourself when handling sheet metal parts Caution regarding electrostatic discharge ESD The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Watch for the ESD reminder shown at the left when removing printer parts Protect the parts that are sensitive to ESD with protective ESD pouches Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 139 Required tools Before servicing the printer gather the following tools Phillips 2 magnetized screwdriver 152 mm 6 inch shaft Small flat blade screwdriver Small needle nose pliers ESD strap Penlight optional All components in the HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printer use Phillips head screws that require a 2 Phillips screwdriver Ensure that you have a Phillips screwdriver and not a Posidriv screwdriver Figure 6 1 below shows the difference between a Phillips and a Posidriv screwdriver Note that the Phillips tip has more beveled surfaces Figure 6 1 Phillips and Posidriv screwdriver comparison 140 Introduction C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Types of screws Table 6 1 describes the screws used in the printer and provides guidelines to help determine where to use each type of screw The screws can vary in length depending on the thickness of the mate
278. r to the printer has poor contact Reconnect all connectors to the printer Replace any damaged connectors Paper feeder pickup solenoid is damaged Disconnect the connector J4006 for the paper feeder solenoid from the paper feeder PCB Measure the resistance between the cable side connectors J4006 2 and J4006 1 If the measured resistance is NOT about 160 ohms replace the paper feeder pickup solenoid Pickup motor is defective Replace the paper pickup drive assembly Paper feeder PCB is defective Replace the paper feeder PCB Paper pickup assembly is defective Replace the paper pickup assembly DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 241 Jams in the paper path Table 7 9 Causes for jams in the paper path Registration shutter is defective This applies to jams that occur before the registration roller Drive gears are damaged This applies to jams that occur before the registration roller Registration roller and registration sub roller are dirty worn or damaged This applies to jams that occur before the registration roller Attaching roller is damaged This applies to jams in which paper is crumpled into an accordion as it enters the ETB Cartridge shutter open close mechanism is damaged This applies to jams in which paper is crumpled into an accord
279. ransfer positive bias To form an image on the photosensitive drum according to the video signal input from the formatter and to transfer the toner image to the paper After the power is turned on the cartridge is cleaned every 35 pages and the ETB is cleaned every 100 pages LSTR last rotations period From the end of the PRINT period until the ETB motor stops To deliver the paper out of the printer and to clean the ETB The last rotations period lasts until the instant the formatter sends a print command Then the initial rotations period starts again Chapter 5 Theory of operation 91 Engine control system The engine control system is the brain of the printer It controls all the other systems according to commands from the formatter The engine control system consists of the following e DC controller PCB e fuser power supply PCB e high voltage PCB e low voltage power supply unit e formatter Each of these components is described in the following sections l DC controller PEB KX LASER SCANNER SYSTEM Fuser power supply Ci Formatter PCB Ki PCB TY IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM High voltage PCB l du PICK UP FEED SYSTEM Low voltage power supply unit P P P RES jaa a oL uL a M M Sem Sam Figure 5 2 Engine control system Note In this manual the abbreviation PCB stands for printed circuit board asse
280. rapped in a clear roller e D The output bin full sensor is located on upper rear edge of the fuser e E Remove Tray 2 The Tray 1 MP tray paper presence sensor flag is the black lever on the front right of the paper tray cavity e F Remove Tray 2 The Tray 2 paper presence sensor flag is the black lever in the middle center of the paper tray cavity e G Remove Tray 2 The Tray 2 paper size sensor switches are located on the left rear side of the paper tray cavity e H The door switch is located on the right front of the printer frame underneath the right cover Component test special mode test The component test allows you to exercise individual parts independently to isolate problems Each component test can be exercised once or repeatedly If CORHTIBUDUS is selected as the repeat option the test will cycle the component on and off This process will repeat for 2 minutes and then the test will terminate Menus cannot be accessed during component tests so the button serves the same function as the CANCEL JOB button The door interlock switch must be defeated to run any of the component tests If covers are removed the door switch must be manually cycled during some tests for the engine to recognize a change The ETB assembly can be open closed or removed while some of these tests are executing Print cartridges can be installed or removed during certain tests The display prompts for removal of some or all cartridges
281. re LED N CP ka drum Transfer charging roller ETB belt C9660 90901 Image formation process The image formation process consists of eleven steps divided among five functional blocks electrostatic latent image formation block developing block transfer block fusing block e cleaning block Figure 5 13 illustrates the process The next sections describe the print cartridges and the ETB in detail followed by a description of each functional block The image formation steps are numbered consecutively through the blocks SS SS SSS SSS aaa Fusing block EE IA AA AA bea mm ETBbelt l me a eim nee Photosensitive 7 Transfer Y 10 EIB cleaning drum rr 10 ETB cleaning lt lt SS SS Er em a ee a Photosensitive pana see ee S NEN Lay Photosensitive 10 ETB cleaning drum Electrostatic latent image formation block ee 2 Primary charging 3 Laser beam exposure ee R hotosensitive drum Development block 5 Development 4 Toner charging 9 6 Attaching lt Print paper path Development cylinder Transfer block Direction of rotation o a an a ao an ine an a a an a Sc lm sm nme hn nm am Se a ms a Sma Cassette pick up Figure 5 13 Image formation process Multi purpose tray pick up
282. re of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second without deterioration e Do not use paper with a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced e The printer creates colors by printing patterns of dots overlaying and varying their spacing to produce various colors Varying the shade or color of your paper will affect the shades of your printed colors Heavy paper e Use Tray 1 for paper that is heavier than 105 g m 28 Ib bond up to 43 Ib bond e For optimum results when printing on heavy paper use the printer control panel to set the media type for the tray to HER e In either the software application or the driver select Heavy as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for heavy paper e Because this setting affects all print jobs it is important to return the printer to its original settings once your job has printed See the section in the online user guide on configuring input trays CAUTION In general do not use paper that is heavier than the recommended specification for this printer Doing so can cause misfeeds jams inferior print quality and excessive mechanical wear However some heavier media types such as HP Cover Stock can be safely used See Table 1 8 for supported paper types and sizes 32 Media requirements C9660 90901 CAUTION Note C9660 90901 Envelopes Envelopes can be printed only from Tray 1 Set the tray s media size to the specific envelope size For information about loading
283. rial being fastened Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one into its original location Table 6 1 Types of screws Illustration Description Screw machine with washer M3x8 part number XA9 1276 000CN To hold plastic to metal example printer covers Screw self tapping To hold plastic to plastic Screw truss head M3x6 part number XA9 1275 000CN To hold sheet metal to sheet metal example formatter cage Retaining ring e type To hold a bolt through a slot or a gear in place Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 141 Supplies Note Note CAUTION 142 Supplies The customer replaces print cartridges the fuser and the ETB unit as they are depleted Chapter 4 explains when to replace supplies and provides instructions on replacing them The printer tracks the amount of use on the customer replaceable supplies by keeping a page count Swapping supplies between printers might cause a misrepresentation of supply life values and is not recommended If you replace either the fuser or the ETB when servicing the printer and these supplies have not yet reached the end of their estimated life you must reset the page count for these supplies through the Configure device menu on control panel See page 81 and page 83 for instructions on resetting the ETB and fuser counts Table 6 2 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items Supply item Black
284. ridge for the color indicated with a cartridge in another slot to determine whether the error follows the cartridge or stays with the slot If the error follows the cartridge replace that cartridge Otherwise continue with step 3 Reseat the connectors between the memory PCB J602 J605 and the antenna PCBs J901A D the memory PCB and the DC controller PCB J1028 Replace the antenna PCB Replace the memory PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Press for more information Remove one or two pages from the output bin as directed by the display Press to continue printing 13 XX YY DUPLEX NOTE If JAM RECOVERY OFF JOB INTERRUPTED some pages will not be reprinted Discard top sheet Re send the missing pages and press Or 13 XX YY DUPLEX JOB INTERRUPTED Discard top two sheets and press Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 223 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message besorpton Jaer 13 XX YY JAM IN DUPLEX PATH For help press 13 XX YY JAM IN PAPER INPUT PATH For help press 13 XX YY JAM IN PAPER PATH For help press 224 Printer error troubleshooting There is a jam in the duplex path There is a Jam in the media input path There is a Jam in the media path Press for detailed information about clearing the jam Press A and W to step through the instructions Check if the
285. ring information is also available from the embedded Web server Remove media from the output bin No action is necessary however the data is useful to help troubleshoot paper jams Follow the instructions on the printed pages Follow the instructions on the printed pages Do not grab paper as it temporarily comes into the output bin The message will disappear when the job is finished Turn the printer off and then back on to remove this message from the display C9660 90901 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message Desorpton Tan RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED alternates with Ready For menus press RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with Ready For menus press RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED alternates with Ready For menus press Receiving upgrade REINSTALL COLOR CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press REMOVE ALL PRINT CARTRIDGES To exit press Cancel Job key REMOVE AT LEAST 1 PRINT CARTRIDGE To exit press Cancel Job key REPLACE lt COLOR gt CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press REPLACE FUSER KIT C9660 90901 The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system but was unsuccessful because the file
286. rint a configuration page Once you open the URL you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future 1 The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about the printer the Information tab the Settings tab and the Network tab Click the tab that you want to view 2 See the following sections for more information about each tab Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 275 Information tab The Information pages group consists of the following pages Device Status Displays the printer status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies with 0 percent representing that a supply is empty The page also shows the type and size of print media set for each tray To change the default settings click Change Settings Configuration page Shows the information found on the printer Configuration page Supplies Status Shows the life remaining of HP supplies with O percent representing that a supply is empty This page also provides supplies part numbers To order new supplies click Order Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window To visit any website you must have Internet access Event log Shows a list of all printer events and errors Usage page Shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed grouped by size and type Device Information Shows the printer network name address and model information To change these entries click Device Information on the Sett
287. rinted on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted not including engine test prints If you install a new formatter when repairing a printer use this menu item to reset the page count to the previous value In this way the page count reflects the number of pages printed by the engine rather than starting over for the new formatter The page count is broken into two categories total mono pages and total color pages Transfer kit count This item allows you to reset the transfer unit count if the value is lost such as when you replace the formatter This value is initially set to zero at the factory Enter a value up to 120 200 This Yelo IS AA reset to zero when a customer installs a new transfer kit and sets F ISFER KIT to FES in the Resets menu Fuser kit count This item allows you to reset the fuser count if the value is lost such as when you replace the formatter This value is initially set to zero at the factory Enter a value up to 150 000 This value is automatically reset to zero when a customer installs a new transfer kit and sets HEL FLESER ETT to TES in the Resets menu Serial number If you replace the formatter use this item to reset the serial number of the printer C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 295 Service ID This item allows the date that the printer was first used to be shown through the control panel eliminating the need for customers to keep paper receipt
288. rinter Status and Alerts software is available to users of both networked and directly connected printers To use Printer Status and Alerts software with a directly connected computer you must choose the Custom installation option when you install the printer driver Select the option to install Printer Status and Alerts For network connections Printer Status and Alerts is installed automatically with the Typical software installation option This software allows you to view the embedded Web server information for a particular printer It also generates messages on the computer regarding the status of the printer and print jobs Depending on how the printer is connected you can receive different messages e Networked printers You can receive regular job status messages that appear every time a print job is sent to the printer or every time the print job finishes printing You can also receive alert messages These messages appear when you are printing to a particular printer if that printer experiences a problem In some cases the printer can continue to print such as when a tray that is not being used is open or a print cartridge is low In other cases a problem may prevent the printer from printing such as when paper is out or a print cartridge is empty e Directly connected printers You can receive alert messages that appear when the printer experiences a problem but can continue printing or a problem that prevents it from printing You
289. rinter problems These problems are indicated by abnormalities in the printers power on sequence The LED that the flowchart refers to is on the formatter Figure 7 12 on the next page indicates where this LED is located This is a heartbeat LED that blinks on and off when the formatter is operating properly A Does the LED blink with 4 fast bursts at power on B Does the LED blink at a fast steady rate during memory testing 1 blink per 8 MB C Is the LED off for about 8 seconds while the boot code is decompressing then the display activates D Does the LED blink at a steady rate of 1 blink per second Check the firmware Check the memory Check the formatter Check display for an error code Check the memory Check the formatter Check the firmware Check the display for proper connection and operation Check the display for an error code Check the firmware Check the formatter Check the display for an error code If the printer display does not light perform an engine test to check the engine You must have paper loaded in Tray 2 for the engine test Figure 7 11 Diagnostics flowchart C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 283 Figure 7 12 Formatter LED 284 Diagnostics C9660 90901 Note C9660 90901 Engine diagnostics This section provides an overview of the engine diagnostics incorporated into the HP Color LaserJet 4600 series printer The printer contains extensive inte
290. rn the printer off and then back on 2 3 Cartridge fan error F2 Reconnect the connector J1004 on the DC controller PCB Immediately after starting the print operation measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V replace the cartridge fan Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 57 4 Formatter fan error F1 j 2 Reconnect the connector J1003 on the DC controller PCB Immediately after turning the printer on measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V replace the formatter fan Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Turn the printer off and then back on Replace the memory PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 231 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message besorpton Acton 59 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 59 X Y PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 62 NO SYSTEM To continue turn off then on 232 Printer error troubleshooting A printer motor error has occurred X Description motor error motor startup error motor rotation error fuser m
291. rnal diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality issues paper path issues noise issues component issues and timing issues Diagnostics mode some of the diagnostic tests automatically put the printer into a special diagnostics mode The special diagnostics mode allows the printer to perform actions that it normally could not because the printer would enter an error state Always follow the control panel directions in the Diagnostic menu to properly exit the special diagnostics mode and return the printer to a normal state Diagnostics that put the engine into the special diagnostics mode There are three diagnostic tests that put the engine into a special state e Disable cartridge check e Sensor test e Component test While the printer is in the special diagnostics mode the display should read When the printer is in the special diagnostics mode the three tests listed above appear in the menu and are available to be run To access other diagnostic tests or to leave the special state press the to the normal state A good understanding of how the printer operates is required to use the engine diagnostics successfully Before proceeding with these diagnostic tests be sure you understand the information in Chapter 5 of this manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 285 WARNING Figure 7 13 Note Diagnostics tests Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues For component or noise isolation you can
292. roblem you can specify which input tray to use specify whether to use the duplex path and specify the number of copies to print Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems The following options become available after you enter the diagnostic e Print test page Run the paper path test from the default settings Tray 2 no duplex and one copy To A one ania scroll down the menu and select the setting then scroll back up and select FEINI TEST to execute the test e Source Select Tray 1 Tray 2 2 or Tray 3 if the optional 500 sheet paper feeder is installed e Duplex Enable or disable 2 sided printing e Copies Set the numbers of copies to be printed the choices are 1 10 50 100 or 500 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 287 Note Figure 7 14 Note Sensor Test special mode test This diagnostic test allows you to test the printer s sensors and switches for proper operation Each sensor is represented by a letter as indicated in Table 7 47 A one below the letter indicates paper is present For the paper size sensor the range of values is from 0 to 7 Table 7 48 indicates the switch state and paper size associated with each of these values To eliminate the display flicker during this test you can leave the door switch in the open state Table 7 47 Sensor test letter codes Letter Sensor top of page Sensor switch number PS3 Idle value doors closed paper in Trays 1 and 2 fuser i
293. rom the printer 11 Remove the screw that attaches the hinge unit and remove the hinge unit from the fuser drive 192 Internal components top C9660 90901 Figure 6 64 Figure 6 65 Removing and replacing the fuser drive unit 2 of 2 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 193 Fuser inlet paper sensor To remove the fuser inlet paper sensor Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the fuser See page 82 Unhook the two tabs shown in callout 1 they are on the front of the sensor Disconnect the connector directly in front of those tabs this connector is hidden in the picture JO OF FP Cc N rm Remove the fuser paper sensor Pout a E Figure 6 66 Removing and replacing the fuser paper sensor 194 Internal components top C9660 90901 Fuser delivery sensor To remove the fuser delivery sensor Remove the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the fuser See page 82 Unhook the two tabs on the back of the sensor on the connector side Disconnect the connector shown in callout 1 N O OFF FP C N Remove the fuser delivery sensor shown in callout 2 m i pai AA t ul Fa E a a M P lt ag lo E d Lj i E NG 5 a Figure 6 67 Removing and replacing the fuser delivery sensor C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal
294. rt guides you to the appropriate section of this chapter that provides steps for correcting the malfunction Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure check the following e Are supply items within their rated life e Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors Note The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition 206 Troubleshooting process C9660 90901 Pre troubleshooting checklist The list below describes basic questions to ask the customer to help quickly define the problem s Table 7 1 Pre troubleshooting checklist Environment Is the printer installed on a solid level surface Is the power supply voltage within 10 volts of the specified power source Is the power supply plug inserted in the printer and the outlet Is the operating environment within the specified parameters as listed in Chapter 1 of this manual Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight Does the customer use only supported media Is the media in good condition no curls folds etc Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits Input trays Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications Is the media set into the tray correctly Are the paper guides aligned with the paper Is the cassette properly installed in the printer Print cartridges
295. run the diagnostics with the covers removed Removing the rear cover top cover rear top cover and side covers provides a better view of the areas being tested To operate the printer with the covers removed defeat the door switch SW4 callout 1 and depress the ETB connector callout 2 after closing the ETB Take caution when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury Only trained service personnel should access and run the diagnostics with the covers removed Never touch any of the power supplies with the printer turned on Door switch and ETB connector Any time a cartridge is installed or removed while the covers are removed the door interlock must be cycled to simulate opening and closing the top cover in order for the engine to recognize the change The ETB must be closed and its connector must be depressed before cycling the door switch or the printer will generate a 59 90 Printer Error With covers installed the door switch and ETB connector are automatically operated With covers removed you must manually perform these steps 286 Diagnostics C9660 90901 Note C9660 90901 Individual diagnostic tests The following sections explain in more detail how to operate the various diagnostics properly Print event log This item prints an event log that displays the last 50 entries in the printer s event log starting with the most recent Show event log This item displays on the control panel the last 50 event
296. rvices available to you On site service agreements To provide you with the level of support best suited to your needs HP has on site service agreements with three response times Priority on site service This agreement provides 4 hour service response to your site for calls made during normal HP business hours Next day on site service This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service request Extended coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP s designated service zones are available on most on site agreements for additional charges Weekly volume on site service This agreement provides scheduled weekly on site visits for organizations with many HP products This agreement is designated for sites using 25 or more workstation products including printers plotters computers and disk drives For more information on HP service agreements call 800 835 4747 U S or 800 268 1221 Canada 50 HP maintenance agreements C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Installation and configuration Chapter contents Unpack the printer llle 52 Unpacking the printer 2 0 0 0 a 53 Installation 225422682 20e824 bo 906 505 a 56 Installing the media tray ii 56 Connecting power a D7 Installing the print cartridges 57 Installing a new overlay optional 59 Testing the printer operation Wak 59 Using PowerSave
297. ry Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 19 error Check the ETB connection Replace the ETB Replace the DC controller 54 20 error Check the connection Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 21 54 22 54 23 or 54 24 error Check the connections Replace the toner level sensing PCB Replace the DC controller C9660 90901 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued message peseription Jaen 55 X PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 55 X PRINTER ERROR To continue press 57 X PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 58 X PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 58 X PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on C9660 90901 The DC controller is not communicating with the formatter The problem could be caused by a timing error or an intermittent connection A printer fan error has occurred X Description 3 cartridge fan vertical fan F2 4 formatter fan horizontal fan F1 A memory tag error was detected X Description 3 CPU 4 power supply Press v to continue Turn the printer off and then back on Reseat or replace the connectors between the DC controller and the formatter If the problem persists replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now on page 294 Replace the formatter Initialize NVRAM See NVRAM initialization on page 293 Tu
298. s Jadeg ayasseg EMS o 3 E 01s0 anos zms oo F5 Lt anos LMS 9 z rn NOZNVJ o MIZNYA 8 ANDd 5 Yun Jasnj LHL CHL NOLNV LOL XTLNV GNDd II ANOS OLdX33Hd bdvI MTOIdS vSO aN9d IVGlds SAvc vINMd seovr aareorr v 9 MS youms 100q anos OLdX334d o dVO SO LO LIN po aN9d 12067 eile 1vdidS avert ENMd yun Jesnj LHL ZHL ANOS OLdX33Hd cdvo NT10lds eSO GNDd 1VGlds anrat CWNMd KAI 31018 ANOS OLdX33ud Ldvd MTOIdS LSO aN9d lvdldS 8AvC AE ALIAM HANE o e o 5 ba NOOdWL PI 3oNvud 3 3 3 2 THOUT100V THOUT200V IINITOV HLans H LNIVIA ANOS GNDd VAvCT 82d Addng 16 og eBeyoA wo J91ulad c 8 Josuas uopajag Kionjag 1esnJ4 EC EH 3 cISd oa AL cB ry g 17 7 H NIWMd PU LLovr me aAve H3 4 ZH Fesa CH E i E walas 9 TH JO1ON Jasny HIT ZPJ anoa olorr JOSUOS uoo3 2q We 9 i EJ NISO peojiang AeL Alanilag NE 7 A 3 Aas TH oeorr a o 3 r 5 e H4 L 6 Cn E uey a6puue9 E CNVJ g Josues uOn2ej9 sz0rr gt Buibebuasig Buidoje eq B TE amaa be T ssa AHH anos 5 5 ugy JOyEWIOH Cs spa feet Cn 5 Buibe6 Cm 4 Nasvua E INV 10 0 A BuiBeBuesiq ce v asvHa 3 Buidoja nag ns f Nvsvud 8 i et vsa lt a31 vzorr E 8 aunsodxy Mewud 9 2 Srorr HH a Josuag uonoejeQ giopr z er TER soon wing
299. s for different grades of paper A boldface type value indicates a commonly available standard weight for that grade Note Text and book grades marked with an asterisk actually calculate to 51 61 71 and 81 but are rounded to standard book or text weights of 50 60 70 and 80 Table 1 10 Weight equivalence table Metric weight Bond Cover Bristol Index Tag weight weight weight weight weight 17 by 22 i 20 by 22 5 by 25 5 by 24 by 36 inches 26 28 5 30 5 inches i inches inches inches 37 60 g m 39 64 g m 46 75 g m 49 80 g m 50 554 90 g m 584 654 105 g m 684 110 g m 678 748 120 g m 758 834 135 g m 148 g m 834 924 150 g m 163 g m 944 1048 170 g m 1084 176 g m 1054 1174 120 133 154 190 g m 199 g m 203 g m 216 g m 244 g m 250 g m 155 253 g m 1623 264 g m C0 N KH KH k MD IE 271 g m C9660 90901 Chapter 1 Printer description 35 Environmental Product Stewardship Program Protecting the environment Hewlett Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on the environment Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas O3 Energy consumption Energy usage drops significantly while in PowerSave mode which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of
300. s for proof of warranty Because the printer does not have an internal clock the service ID date s availability is dependent on the printer being connected to a source that can provide the date such as the installer the driver or the embedded Web server In cases where the printer is not connected to a date source the service ID will not be available and the control panel will display E 585 Restoring the Service ID If you replace the formatter the date is lost Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date the printer was first used The date format is YYDDD Calculate the date as follows 1 To calculate YY subtract 1990 from the calendar year For instance if the printer was first used in 2002 calculate YY as follows 2002 1990 12 YY 12 2 To calculate DDD use the following formula 30 calendar month 1 calendar day DDD If the calendar day is 31 use 30 instead For instance if the printer was first used on October 17 calculate DDD as follows a Subtract 1 from 10 October is the tenth month of the year 10 1 9 b Multiply 9 by 30 9 x 30 270 c Add 17 to 270 270 17 287 Thus DDD 287 Converting the Service ID to an actual date You can use the printer s Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty Convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows 1 Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed 2 Divide DDD by 3
301. s on e Off turns off both trapping and adaptive halftoning RGB Color Two values are available for the RGB Color setting e Default instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as SRGB sRGB is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization www e Device instructs the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode To render photographs properly with this selection you must manage image color in the application or operating system Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 251 Adjusting color balance This printer features automatic color calibration to provide high quality color output In situations that require critical color control you can manually adjust the density balance of the printer s four toner colors The available range for each color is from 5 to 5 The default value is 0 CAUTION This procedure should only be performed by your network administrator Performing this procedure changes the color balance of the printer by altering halftones and affects all print jobs To adjust color density Press C to enter the MELE Press v to highlight CONFIGURE DELICE MENL Press to select COMFIGURE DEVICE MENU Press W to highlight PEIHT GUuAL TTS Press CO to select PRINT GUBL T Tv Press Y or A to highlight ADJUST COLOR Press Y or A to highlight the desired color Press Y or A to highlight the correct density setting O ON Oo C FP c N Press C to select the density setting 10 Press amp to set the den
302. s on the control panel display starting with the most recent PQ troubleshooting This item prints a series of print quality assessment pages that help troubleshoot print quality problems Disable cartridge check special mode test This diagnostic test allows you to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer with one or more print cartridges removed or swapped Because the cartridges are not keyed the diagnostic test can be run with one to four cartridges removed or swapped to another location Consumable Supply errors are ignored while in this mode Once in this mode you can navigate the menus and print internal pages or send an external print job to the printer This diagnostic test can be used to isolate print quality problems related to individual cartridges and to isolate individual cartridge problems such as noise Do not remove or swap cartridges before entering the disable cartridge check diagnostic After entering the test you can remove or swap cartridges While performing the disable cartridge check you can navigate the menus and print internal pages as desired from the control panel Use the button to access the menus as you normally would You can also send external print jobs to the printer To exit this diagnostic press the CANCEL JoB button and then select amp Paper path test This diagnostic will generate one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of paper jams To isolate a p
303. same time Parallel connections A parallel connection is made by connecting the printer to the computer using a bidirectional parallel cable IEEE 1284 compliant with a c connector plugged into the printer s parallel port The cable can be a maximum of 10 meters 30 feet long When used to describe a parallel interface the term bidirectional indicates that the printer is able to both receive data from the computer and send data to the computer through the parallel port Parallel port connection To use the enhanced capabilities of the bidirectional parallel interface ensure that the most recent printer driver is installed These enhanced capabilities include bidirectional communication between the computer and printer faster transfer of data and automatic configuration of printer drivers Factory settings support automatic switching between the parallel port and one or more network connections on the printer Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 61 Network connections You may connect the printer to a network in several ways Direct to network Connect one end of the network cable to the RJ 45 port on the Jetdirect print server card Connect the other end to the network Figure 3 4 Direct to network connection Network print server Connect one end of a network cable into the server Connect the other end to the network Connect one end of a second network cable to the printer and the other end to the network
304. sh memory DIMMs for storing forms fonts and signatures Hard disk accessory The optional hard disk accessory can be mounted in one of the EIO slots on the rear of the formatter The optional ElO based hard disk is used for creating multiple original prints mopies and storing forms fonts and signatures CPU The HP LaserJet 4600 series printer formatter incorporates a 400 MHz RISC processor Chapter 5 Theory of operation 101 Printer memory If the printer encounters difficulty managing available memory a clearable warning message will appear on the control panel some printer messages are affected by the auto continue and clearable warning settings from the Configure Device menu under System Setup If CLEARABLE WARNING JOB is set on the control panel warning messages appear on the control panel until the end of the job from which they were generated If CLEARABLE WARNING ON is set warning messages appear on the control panel until C is pressed If an error occurs that prevents printing and AUTO CONTINUE OFF is set the message appears until is pressed Read only memory Besides storing microprocessor control programs the read only memory ROM stores dot patterns of internal character sets fonts Random access memory The random access memory RAM contains the page I O buffers and the font storage area It stores printing and font information received from the host system and can also serve to temporarily stor
305. sh overlay C9660 40002 ETB assembly C9660 69004 Figure 8 7 5 ETB assembly C9660 69004 Figure 8 16 1 ETB latch assembly RG5 6456 000CN Figure 8 6 15 Fan cartridge RH7 1490 000CN Figure 8 6 13 Fan formatter RH7 1491 000CN Figure 8 6 14 Filter left side RB2 8596 000CN Figure 8 3 9 Filter rear RB2 8597 000CN Figure 8 3 8 Finnish overlay C9660 40009 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 343 Table 8 22 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Reference Firmware DIMM C9156 67901 Figure 8 2 10 Formatter duplex C9661 69001 exchange Figure 8 2 9 C9661 67901 new Formatter simplex C9660 69001 exchange Figure 82 9 C9660 67901 new French overlay C9660 40003 Front cover assembly RG5 6466 000CN Figure 8 3 4 Fuse 125 volt 6 3 amp VD7 0216 301CN 110 volt Figure 8 8 19 Fuse 250 volt 4 amp VD7 0644 001CN 220 volt Fuse 250 volt 20 amp VD7 1731 502CN 110 volt Figure 8 8 20 Fuse 250 volt 8 amp VD7 1838 001CN 220 volt Fuser C9660 69002 110 volt Figure 8 7 1 C9660 69003 220 volt Fuser assembly C9660 69002 110 volt Figure 8 17 1 C9660 69003 220 volt Fuser cover left RF5 3774 000CN Figure 8 18 3 Fuser cover right RF5 3775 000CN Figure 8 18 4 Fuser drive assembly RG5 6512 000CN Figure 8 7 11 Fuser drive assembly RG5 6512 000CN Figure 8 12 1 Fuser power
306. sity for the next color 11 After setting the density for each color press PAUSE RESUME 252 Image formation troubleshooting C9660 90901 Image defects If specific defects occur repeatedly print a Print Quality Troubleshooting page see Print quality troubleshooting pages on page 247 and follow the instructions on the page If you are unable to resolve the problem use the information in this section to identify the root cause of the problem Image defects fall into the categories listed in Table 7 16 Possible causes and recommended solutions for each of these categories are listed in the tables that follow In general the items are listed in order from minor repairs to major repairs Check the items in the order in which they appear Table 7 16 Image defects Image defect Light image Description A very light image is printed More information See Table 7 17 on page 254 Light color One color is light in an image See Table 7 18 on page 254 Dark image A very dark image is printed See Table 7 19 on page 254 Dark color One color is dark in an image See Table 7 20 on page 255 Completely blank No image is printed See Table 7 21 on page 255 All black solid color An all black or solid colored image is printed See Table 7 22 on page 255 Dots in vertical lines Vertical lines of white dots appear in the image See Table 7 23 on page 255 Dirt on back
307. sport belt locating 112 structure 112 e mail alerts 276 embedded Web server accessing 275 using for troubleshooting 275 viewing with Printer Status and Alerts 278 embossed media 31 emissions acoustic 25 envelopes loading 33 printing 33 supported sizes 29 environmental features 19 specifications 23 24 stewardship program 36 error messages alphabetical list 212 numerical list 223 paper jams 235 ETB belt locating 297 expected life 74 feed roller locating 112 locating 26 112 motor locating 127 part numbers 335 replacing 79 replacing before end of life 81 structure 112 ETB driven rollers locating 112 event log printing 282 viewing 276 exchange program 46 extended input output connections locating 27 F fans cartridge 95 formatter 95 function 94 locating 94 95 302 Fast InfraRed connection locating 27 fasteners 314 features printer 19 feed speed control 131 Finnish laser safety statement 41 FIR connection locating 27 flash memory 84 101 font DIMM adding 85 enabling 87 formatter function 100 removing and replacing 175 system 100 formatter case removing and replacing 178 C9660 90901 C9660 90901 formatter fan function 95 removing and replacing 198 front cover locating 26 removing and replacing 152 fuser cleaning 72 delivery sensor locating 127 delivery sensor removing and replacing 195 drive unit part numbers 331 drive unit removing and replacing 192 function 96 inlet paper sensor loc
308. ssembly RG5 6469 000CN Cable paper feed 334 Illustrations and parts lists RG5 6419 000CN C9660 90901 Figure 8 16 ETB assembly Table 8 16 ETB assembly Description Quantity Part number ETB assembly C9660 69004 Motor M6 ETB DC 24 volt brushless RH7 1495 000CN Cable ETB RG5 6417 000CN Roller oblique RB1 2155 000CN Photo interrupter TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN C9660 90901 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 335 Figure 8 17 Fuser assembly 1 of 2 Table 8 17 Fuser assembly Description Quantity Part number Fuser assembly C9660 69002 110 volt C9660 69003 220 volt Sensor flag RB2 8498 000CN Fuser cover left RF5 3774 000CN Fuser cover right RF5 3775 000CN Note Table 8 17 lists parts shown in Figure 8 17 and Figure 8 18 If you order a replacement fuser you will receive all the parts shown in both figures 336 Illustrations and parts lists C9660 90901 Fuser assembly 2 of 2 Figure 8 18 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 337 C9660 90901 Figure 8 19 500 sheet paper feeder assembly location diagram Table 8 18 500 sheet paper feeder assemblies Description Optional 500 sheet paper feeder and Tray 3 assembly Quantity Part number 5781A001AA Cassette 500 sheet paper feeder 338 Illustrations and parts lists RG1 4140 000CN C9660 90901 Figure 8 20 500 sheet paper feeder internal components Table 8 19
309. ssembly see Figure 8 11 on page 330 Drum drive assembly cyan magenta see Figure 8 10 on page 329 Drum drive assembly yellow see Figure 8 10 on page 329 Drum drive assembly cyan magenta see Figure 8 10 on page 329 10 Drum drive assembly black see Figure 8 10 on page 329 11 Fuser drive assembly see Figure 8 12 on page 331 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 315 PCB locations Table 8 3 PCB locations Description Fuser power supply PCB Quantity Part number RG5 6399 000CN 100 127 volt RG5 6400 000CN 220 240 volt High voltage power supply PCB RG5 6395 000CN Toner sensor PCB RG5 6393 000CN Pickup PCB RG5 6392 000CN Low voltage power supply PCB RG5 6410 000CN 100 127 volt RG5 6411 000CN 220 240 volt Memory tag antenna PCBs RG5 5469 000CN Memory controller PCB RG5 6396 000CN DC controller PCB RG5 6391 000CN Formatter simplex C9660 69001 exchange C9660 67901 new Formatter duplex C9661 69001 exchange C9661 67901 new Firmware DIMM C9156 67901 I O daughter card C9144 60001 i The formatter is available with either simplex or duplex capability Be sure to use the correct formatter for the model of printer you are servicing The HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4600n printers do not have duplex capability 316 Illustrations and parts lists C9660 90901 WA KIN INUMAN i
310. system is full The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to It The cartridge is not fully seated The printer is executing a Component test and the component selected is Belt only The printer is executing a Disable cartridge check or Component test where the component selected is Cartridge Motor The identified print cartridge has reached the end of life Printing will not continue until the cartridge is replaced The fuser kit is at end of life 1 Printing may continue Turn the printer off and then back on to remove the message from the display If the message reappears there may be a problem with the software application Turn the printer off and then back on to remove the message from the display This will also delete any files saved in RAM To enable writing to the RAM disk turn off write protection using HP Web Jetadmin software To remove this message from the display turn the printer off and then back on A firmware upgrade is in progress Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to Ready 1 Press for detailed information 2 Press A and vy to step through instructions Remove all print cartridges Remove one print cartridge Replace the identified print cartridge to continue printing Press for detailed information Press A and y to step through instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web ser
311. t 2400 produces photorealistic images ImageREt 2400 provides 2400 dpi color laser class quality through a multilevel printing process This process precisely controls color by combining up to four colors within a single dot and by varying the amount of toner in a given area As a result ImageREt 2400 together with the 600 by 600 dpi engine resolution creates millions of smooth colors Paper selection For the best color and image quality select the appropriate media type from the printer menu or from the front panel SRGB Standard red green blue SRGB is a world wide color standard originally developed by HP and Microsoft as a common color language for monitors input devices scanners digital cameras and output devices printers plotters It is the default color space used for HP products Microsoft operating systems the World Wide Web and most office software sold today SRGB is representative of the typical Windows PC monitor today and the convergence standard for high definition television The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop CorelDRAW Microsoft Office and many other applications use SRGB to communicate color Most importantly as the default color space in Microsoft operating systems SRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between applications and devices using a common definition that assures typical users will experience greatly improved color matching SRGB improves your ability to match
312. t cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and insert the cartridge until it is completely seated p 4 7 RE TOI d eng v e Ng o by i pee aM O T2 SLE 8 Installation is complete Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions 78 Replacing supply items C9660 90901 Replacing the transfer unit Replace the transfer unit when the printer control panel displays REPLACE TRANSFER KIT Note If you replace the transfer unit when it is not at the end of life for instance if it is defective you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the transfer unit count through the control panel See page 81 for instructions 1 Turn the printer off Using the side handles open the top cover 3 Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down The front cover will open as you pull down the transfer unit unit 5 Grasp the transfer unit with two hands Simultaneously press in the blue buttons on either side of the transfer unit and slide the unit out of the printer DB DL gt C9660 90901 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 79 6 Remove the new transfer unit from the bag Place the used transfer unit in the bag for recycling See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions 7 Hold the transfer unit on either side Guide the feet into the cups and slide the transfer unit into the pri
313. t enters the fuser 3 The fuser melts the individual toner particles The fuser sleeve and pressure roller mix the liquefied toner and press it onto the paper to create the desired color 4 The paper passes from the fuser into the output bin A sensor in the output bin detects when the bin is full The DC controller will stop the printer after the current print is completed 132 Pickup feed system C9660 90901 Note Figure 5 37 C9660 90901 Duplex feed unit During 2 sided duplex printing the duplex feed unit retrieves the paper from the output bin and sends it back through the pickup feed unit to print on the second side The sequence of events is as follows 1 The paper with the front side printed passes through the fuser 2 The fuser motor M8 rotates counterclockwise for a specified length of time after the paper reaches the fuser delivery sensor The fuser delivery roller reverses direction and feeds the paper into the duplex feed unit Figure 5 37 illustrates this switch back operation 3 The oblique roller and feed roller allow the left edge of the paper to contact the left side plate in order to align the paper on the left margin The paper then re enters the pickup feed unit and is printed on the second side The paper passes through the fuser a second time and comes to rest in the output bin During duplex printing the printer prints the second side of the page first For instance if a 4 page print job is to
314. ted memory size 3 failed RAM test 4 exceeded maximum RAM size 5 invalid DIMM speed A DIMM is installed in both 168 pin DIMM Slot 4 and 100 pin DIMM Slot 5 X Description temperature image density sensor color plane registration sensor image density sensor yellow drum home position sensor magenta drum home pos sensor cyan drum home position sensor 10 black drum home position sensor 11 black density sensor 12 cyan density sensor 13 magenta density sensor 14 yellow density sensor 19 ETB speed control sensor 20 color plane registration sensor 21 24 toner level sensors Press CANCEL JOB If the problem persists replace the DIMM card in the slot indicated This is an invalid configuration DIMMs can not be installed in both of these slots at the same time Remove one of the DIMMs or move one of the DIMMs to a different slot Turn the printer off and then back on then check items in the order listed 54 1 error Check the fuser See 50 X fuser error 54 3 error Check the connections Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 5 error Check the connections Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 6 error Check the connections Replace the color registration detection assembly 54 7 54 8 54 9 or 54 10 error Check the connections Replace the drum phase sensor for the indicated color 54 11 54 12 54 13 or 54 14 error Check the connections Check the cartridge and replace it if necessa
315. tenance 81 Replacing the fuser Replace the fuser when the printer control panel displays REPLACE FUSER KIT 1 Turn the printer off 2 Using the side handles open the top cover WARNING The fuser might be hot Wait 10 minutes before proceeding 3 Completely loosen the blue thumb screws on either side of the fuser 5 Remove the new fuser from the bag Place the used fuser in the bag for recycling See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions 6 Grasp the sides of the fuser and push down firmly into the printer 82 Replacing supply items C9660 90901 7 Tighten the blue thumb screws 8 Close the top cover and turn the printer on After a short while the control panel should display 9 Press Y to highlight E 10 Press to reset the fuser count Replacing the fuser when it is not at end of life If you replace the fuser when it is not at the end of its life for instance if it is defective you will need to reset the fuser count through the control panel To reset the fuser count do the following Press to enter the FEHL Press Ww to highlight CCHF IGURE DELICE Press to select COHF IGURE DEVICE Press W to highlight RESET SUPPLIES Press CO to select RESET SUPPLIES Press W to highlight HEW FUSER KIT o ON DOO FWD U D o o O o D D O Press D to select HEH FUSER KIT Press Y to highlight YES mah mah mah C Press to reset the fuser count C9660 90901 Chapte
316. ter and follow the instructions After completing this additional testing proceed to the next major step in the troubleshooting flowchart Displ Power On gt R mp Event Log Does the display Is the printer on indicate any of the and displaying a YES 4 YES readable message Have you following evaluated READY the OFFLINE Event Log POWERSAVE ON A i For paper jams Show Event Log encountered to display during attempts information to print Event Log on current error see Paper path and correct it troubleshooting A Perform power on checks See note below B B After correcting all Print and messages and evaluate the errors B go to Step 3 Event Log After control panel display becomes functional go to Step 2 After evaluating the Event Log go to Step 4 Figure 7 1 Troubleshooting flowchart Note If the printer s display is blank but the power on checks pass try printing an engine test page to determine whether the problem is with the engine display or with the formatter See page 292 for instructions 208 Troubleshooting process C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Troubleshooting flowchart continued Information Pages Will it print a Configuration A Show Event Log to display information on the current error and correct it B Print Configuration Page and verifiy information C After verifying Configuration Page go to Step 5 Image Quality Does the print qua
317. ter replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now on page 294 Duplex feed guide is damaged Replace the ETB unit Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB See Calibrate Now on page 294 C9660 90901 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 243 Paper transport troubleshooting If media is feeding incorrectly use the information in this section to identify and resolve the problem Multiple pages are fed Table 7 12 Causes for multiple pages feeding Separation tabs in the cassette are damaged Tray 2 Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray or Tray 3 or replace the cassette Multi purpose tray separation pad is worn Replace the separation pad assembly Multi purpose tray separation pad has a defective Make sure the spring is set in place If the spring is spring damaged replace the separation pad assembly Paper is wrinkled or folded To diagnose the cause of wrinkled or folded paper use the Print Stop test in the Diagnostics menu Adjust the stop time so the paper stops before it enters the fuser Open the ETB If paper is wrinkled at this stage use Table 7 14 to diagnose the problem If paper is not wrinkled at this stage use Table 7 13 to diagnose the problem See page 291 for more information on the Print Stop test Table 7 13 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper part one paper path entrance Registration shutter is defective Make sure the registration shutter is clean and moves smoothly If t
318. ter of the gear to release it callout 2 and then remove the gear Remove the three black screws shown in callout 3 Disconnect the three connectors on the back of the paper pickup drive unit and remove the unit Figure 6 24 Removing and replacing the paper pickup drive unit C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 159 Multi purpose tray pickup roller and separation pad To remove the multi purpose tray pickup roller and separation pad Remove Tray 2 from the printer and remove any paper in the tray Rotate the two lock pins outward shown in callout 1 and tilt the cassette cover forward Push the blue roller snap shown in callout 2 towards the back of the tray and remove it Pull up on the multi purpose tray pickup roller shown in callout 3 and remove it Push outward on the two tabs that hold the separation pad in place callout 4 oO c A Q N Pull the separation pad forward to remove it callout 5 Figure 6 25 Removing and replacing the multi purpose tray pickup roller and separation pad 1 of 2 Figure 6 26 Removing and replacing the multi purpose tray pickup roller and separation pad 2 of 2 Note Always replace the separation pad when you replace the multi purpose tray pickup roller 160 Internal components front C9660 90901 Solenoids To remove the cassette solenoid or the multi purpose tray solenoid 1 Remove the paper pickup unit See page 156 2 To remove the multi purpose tray solenoid re
319. the circuit diagram for the scanner motor control DC controller PCB Ar aaa 131009 J402A 6 BDI 2 S a V BD PCB AN 2 ee ee RU eg AA AA CM a 24VA Scanner moter Scanner driver IC J Scanner motor driver PCB divider Integrator Drive circuit circuit ASIC IC1014 Figure 5 11 Scanner motor control circuit C9660 90901 Chapter 5 Theory of operation 105 Image formation system The image formation system is the central hub of the printer Figure 5 12 shows the image formation system During image formation an image of colored toner is formed and then fused onto the paper The image formation system consists of the following physical components e four laser scanners e four print cartridges e ETB e fuser VDATA4 VDATA4 VDATA3 VDATA3 HI VDATA2 LI BO fi Print l command Formatter PCB VIDEO signal Figure 5 12 Image formation system 106 Image formation system laser beam Primary charging Fuser roller Developing cylinder M Bj Bk cartridge per Lo E Memory Attaching tag roller D Hr HE Memory controller PCB E a amp a High volt DC controller PCB Ign voltage power supply PCB Primary exposu
320. the printer has the following a well ventilated dust free area a hard level surface not more than a 2 angle e for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 4600n and 4600dn the surface must support 37 kg 81 Ib e for the HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn and 4600hdn the surface must support 44 kg 97 Ib a level surface that supports all four corners of the 500 sheet paper feeder a constant temperature and humidity Do not install near water sources humidifiers air conditioners refrigerators or other major appliances Make sure to keep the printer away from the following direct sunlight dust open flames or water the direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation systems magnets and devices that emit a magnetic field areas subject to vibration walls or other objects There must be enough space around the printer for proper access and ventilation See Figure 1 4 on page 23 Space requirements The printer must have the following amounts of space above and around it Figure 1 4 Space requirements 1 2 3 C9660 90901 530 mm 20 9 inches 1294 mm 50 inches 804 mm 31 7 inches Chapter 1 Printer description 23 Electrical specifications Table 1 3 lists the electrical specifications required to run the printer safely Table 1 3 Electrical specifications Item 110 volt models 220 volt models Power requirements 100 127 V 10 6 220 240 V 10 6 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 50 60 Hz 2 Hz Power consumpti
321. tion of the problem Transfer unit and fuser warranty C9660 90901 This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for one year or until the printer control panel indicates a low life message whichever occurs first This warranty does not cover products that have been modified refurbished remanufactured misused or tampered with in any way This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may have other rights which vary from state to state province to province and country region to country region THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED THE HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL INDIRECT PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS FROM ANY BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE In the event that your product proves to be defective please return to place of purchase with a written description of the problem Chapter 2 Service approach 49 HP maintenance agreements HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty Support services may vary by area Check with your local HP dealer to determine the se
322. tray Tray 1 ee 151 FONI COVO M x gx cnet Perm ark as ee Seo seen bea aed ana 152 Control panel 0 2 0 0 ee eee 153 Internal components a 155 DC controller shield eee 155 Internal components front ii 156 Paper pickup unit oo oo eek ave m e awak man donee NG 156 Paper pickup sensor PCB 0c cece eens 157 Cassette Tray 2 paper pickup rollers 158 Paper pickup drive unit a 159 Multi purpose tray pickup roller and separation pad 160 se hee AA 161 Color registration detection unit 162 Internal components left side 164 Drum drive UhllS PE AA 164 Memory tag antenna PCBs llle 170 Developing disengaging motor assembly 171 DG controler POB Se ima eda oan AE eer ert 172 Memory controller PCB anaana 173 Cassette paper size detection switch 174 Internal components rear Wa 175 FOMMAUC uus esie ea EE AON RES bee 175 Low voltage power supply Wa 176 Formatter CASE wa oe rie ene e pum m cg ace boe DA 178 Laser scanner units Wa 180 Internal components right side 185 High voltage power supply PCB Lsss 185 Toner level detection PCB 0 00 0 eee eee 187 High voltage contact blocks 188 BOOSTER m
323. uirements auda KNA ex der Ea wd reni RR A eee beh eee ewe 23 Electrical specifications aa 24 Environmental specifications e 24 Supply storage requirements llli 25 Printer Specifications sss 2 aide uite adr boo bed ee OR de ee eee Up ve ee eee ROI a 25 Printer assemblies sies us era wk RO nma mad Pewee AR ah 26 Media requirements ii 28 Selecting print media uuu eus soon Pena PENA Seo ok nan Sas She we ot 28 Media specifications uu kr d cR E Earw dass ex RO dashes oes weed SERE owe 28 Supported media weights and sizes es 29 Media to avoid neo began anes gees Sheen onde Depe it Gan mah eae eee ere ae 31 Media that may cause damage to the printer eee eee 31 Printing on special media xz 3c eased 9rd poni 7o pe camedareehedeetek ware bore 31 Weight equivalence table nnana naaa eee eens 35 Environmental Product Stewardship Program ak 36 Protecting the environment in 36 Regulatory statements aaa mara 6 ooh on KAR Owe GG PK ee ee eee eS 38 FCC Regulations 2 eee cen Bed mal oa swan DRONE ede does Poeun dee 38 Safety redu soassa mah os at aes Ae eee ge Gee Bee A ee eee Ge 39 Laser safety statement n n n annaa 39 Material Safety Data Sheet 0 ee eee 39 Toner safety yna id ADEN dried d E Gak Bre RU oe ARAL adan d Ee Oe ee xatd 39 Canadian DOC reglilatiOnS 0 ma ame Hanan um deuce Sardi s 3
324. um print quality on transparencies Additionally transparencies cause the printer to adjust printer soeed and fuser temperature Other media types affect the printer settings as well Selecting heavy or glossy media for example causes the printer to change the engine speed The printer driver also gives you customized control of color text graphics and photos Use the printer driver to set the following color control options Print in Grayscale Halftone options Edge Control RGB Color See the printer driver s online Help for details on color settings and their effect on printed output e 2 e Neutral Grays e e Available drivers The following printer drivers are included with the printer Table 3 1 Printer drivers Operating system PCL 5c PCL 6 PS Not all printer features are available from all drivers or operating systems See the online Help in your driver for availability of features Note If your system did not automatically check the Internet for the latest drivers during software installation download them from http www hp com support j4600 Once connected select Downloads and Drivers to find the driver you wish to download 66 Printer drivers C9660 90901 Note Note C9660 90901 Additional drivers The following drivers are not included on the CD ROM but are available from the Internet or from HP Customer Care OS 2 PCL 5c 6 printer driver OS 2 PS printer driver Windows NT 3 51 PCL 5c
325. uring transmission to the printer application and try printing a Other causes include poor quality parallel cables poor connections or home grown applications On rare occasions the formatter is at fault different file If the message appears only with a certain software application or print job contact the software vendor for assistance If the message persists with different software applications and print jobs disconnect all cables to the printer that connect it to the network or PC Turn the printer off Remove all memory DIMMs or third party DIMMs from the printer Do not remove the firmware DIMM in slot J1 Remove all ElO devices from the printer Turn the printer on If the error no longer exists install each DIMM and EIO device one at a time making sure to turn the printer off and back on as you install each device Replace a DIMM or EIO device if you determine that it causes the error Remember to reconnect all cables that connect the printer to the network or computer If the error persists replace the firmware DIMM Replace the formatter and calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now on page 294 which is usually indicated by a 79 Service Error 228 Printer error troubleshooting C9660 90901 C9660 90901 For help press 51 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with 51 XY PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 52 XY PRINTER ERROR For help press
326. ury This product contains lead in solder For recycling information contact http www hp com go recycle contact your local authorities or go to the Electronics Industries Alliance website hitp www eiae org Extended warranty HP SupportPack provides coverage for the HP hardware product and all HP supplied internal components The hardware maintenance covers a 1 to 5 year period from date of the HP product purchase The customer must purchase HP SupportPack within 90 days of the HP product purchase For more information contact the HP Customer Care Service and Support group Spare parts and supplies availability Spare parts and supplies for this product will be available for at least five years after production has stopped For more information On HP s environmental programs including Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products HP s commitment to the environment HP s environmental management system HP s end of life product return and recycling program Material Safety Data Sheets See http www hp com go environment or http www hp com hpinfo community environment Chapter 1 Printer description 37 Regulatory statements FCC Regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installati
327. user cover 9 Open the front cover and remove the packing tape from the transfer unit Close the front cover and the top cover L ZEIT Saan 7 m C9660 90901 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 55 Installation Installing the media tray 1 Remove the tray from the printer Push the media lift plate down until it locks Remove the cardboard from the tray 2 Adjust the rear length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the back of the tray to the length of the media being loaded Slide the width guides to the desired size 3 Load media face up Make sure that the front corners of the media fit under the front corner tabs 56 Installation C9660 90901 Connecting power 1 Plug the AC power cord into the printer and into the power outlet 2 Turn the printer on Installing the print cartridges 1 Open the top cover Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down The front cover will open as you pull down the transfer unit CAUTION Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open If the transfer unit is punctured print quality problems may result 2 Grasp both sides of the cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the cartridge from side to side C9660 90901 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration 57 3 Remove the tape from the orange shipping lock Remove and discard the orange shipping lock 4 Remove the inside sealing tape b
328. ve the rear cover See page 144 Remove the top cover See page 145 Remove the rear top cover See page 146 Remove the left cover See page 148 Remove the DC controller shield See page 155 oO c A Cc N Remove the five screws shown in callout 1 and remove the drum drive grounding plate callout 2 which covers the developing disengaging rod 7 Unhook the spring shown in callout 3 and slide the developing disengaging rod up and out 1 JB f j TE m n L PANG a CI IE an ik i ms i zi Figure 6 30 Removing and replacing the developing disengaging rod H r4 i 443 e L E Ai paa 164 Internal components left side C9660 90901 Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the developing disengaging rod be sure to rotate the white gear located between the black and magenta drum drive units fully clockwise until it comes to a complete stop as indicated in callout 4 below Also make sure the developing disengaging rod passes through the slots in the drive clutches in the up position in each of the four drum drive units engaging each clutch The clutch on the yellow drum drive unit is particularly difficult to see and engage properly Figure 6 31 Reinstalling the developing disengaging rod 1 of 2 Figure 6 32 Reinstalling the developing disengaging rod 2 of 2 C9660 90901 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 165 To remove the drum drive gears 1 Remove the developing disengaging r
329. ver Replace the fuser to continue printing Press for detailed information Press A and y to step through instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 219 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message Deser on Tan REPLACE SUPPLIES At least one supply item is out and Press to identify which For status press amp needs to be replaced and another supplies should be replaced supply item is either out or low Replace the identified supplies to continue printing Press for detailed information Press A and vy to step through instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server REPLACE TRANSFER The transfer unit has reached end of Replace the transfer unit to KIT life continue printing For help press Press for detailed information Press A and y to step through instructions Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server Resend The firmware upgrade was not Attempt upgrade again upgrade completed successfully Rotating The printer is testing the developing Press CANCEL JOB when ready to stop alienation motor disengaging motor This motor is this test To exit press called the alienation motor in CANCEL JOB firmware messages Rotating The printer is executing a Component Press CANCEL JOB when ready to stop belt drive Test
330. verview 106 process 107 inkjet transparencies avoiding 31 inks specifications 33 input trays capacity 29 locating 26 supported media 29 internal components part numbers 319 326 isolating problems 44 J jams avoiding 237 duplex path 243 paper path 242 persistent 238 recovery 236 top cover 243 Tray 1 240 Tray 2 240 Tray 3 241 troubleshooting 234 Japanese VCCI statement 40 Jetdirect print server card adding 88 Jetdirect print server card configuring 277 K Korean EMI statement 39 L labels printing 33 supported sizes 29 language changing on display 59 embedded Web server 276 overlays 59 printer job PUL 264 universal exit UEL 264 laser safety statements Finland 41 United States 39 laser scanner system overview 104 laser scanner units component test 290 removing and replacing 180 LaserJet 4600 series printer models 18 LaserJet Family Print Media Guide 28 Index 357 358 LaserJet Utility for Macintosh 68 latent image forming 113 left cover removing and replacing 148 letterhead loading 33 printing 33 levels security 69 life span ETB 73 fuser 73 print cartridges 73 light affects on color variation 248 location requirements 23 locking control panel settings 69 low voltage power supply circuit 99 function 99 locating 303 removing and replacing 176 M Macintosh HP LaserJet Utility 68 maintenance agreements 50 matching color PANTONE 249 swatch book 249 variation 248 Material Dat
331. y SZ mki M cartridge DC positive bias C cartridge 1 KAG DC negative bias E E DC negative bias DC negative bias Figure 5 27 ETB cleaning 120 Image formation system C9660 90901 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 C9660 90901 Photosensitive drum cleaning A cleaning blade inside the print cartridge clears the remaining toner on the photosensitive drum as the drum rotates past the blade This waste toner is moved into the waste toner container in the top of the print cartridge Figure 5 28 illustrates this step Waste toner container Waste toner transfer plate Cleaning blade pA Drum cleaning During the printing process toner adheres to the primary charging roller and the toner charging roller To prevent print quality defects this toner needs to be cleaned The DC controller alternately applies negative bias in different values to the primary charging roller and the toner charging roller when one of the following occurs e The printer is turned on e The covers are closed e Atthe start of a print operation e After printing a specified number of pages Applying bias removes the toner from each roller The toner on the primary charging roller is transferred to the photosensitive drum and the toner on the toner charging roller is transferred to the developing cylinder Then the cleaning blade scrapes the toner on the photosensitive drum into the waste toner container as described above The
332. y pulling the orange loop on the end and pulling the tape completely out Discard the tape 5 Grasp the blue handles on the sides of the print cartridge Insert the print cartridges starting with the bottom cartridge in the position shown C cyan Y yellow M magenta K black 6 Close the transfer unit and front cover Close the top cover After a short while the control panel should display FE 58 Installation C9660 90901 C9660 90901 Installing a new overlay optional Some printer models are shipped without the control panel overlay installed Overlays are available for several languages If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English follow this procedure 1 Position the new overlay over the top of the control panel Insert the left tab of the overlay into the slot on the printer face Line up the tab on the right side of the overlay with the slot on the right side of the control panel Set the overlay in place by pushing down on the overlay near the blue button 2 The control panel displays LANGUAGE in English Press W until the preferred language is highlighted Press to save the preferred language Testing the printer operation Print a configuration page to ensure the printer is working properly Press C to enter the MEHLES Press Ww to highlight IHF RPBGgTIOH Press to select IMFORMATION Press Y to highlight RIHT CONFIGURATION a A c N e Press Y to select PRIHT CONFI

color LaserJet 4600 -- Service Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents